Home

FlexiSign 7.0 User Manual

1. 92 barcodes nneennneneenennnn 134 Bezier handles 0 111 Bezier paths ccccceeees 144 bitmap rendering intent 220 bitmap toolbar 006 169 DItMADS ii 163 Adobe filters 006 182 0 6 eee mene Pecan ie cer ere 180 brightness contrast 181 changing color mode 168 changing resolution 167 color balance 181 color MOCES 0 c seen 163 creating new bitmaps 166 CLOD aeia 174 embedded ICC profiles 164 erise aea 172 OXPOFTING ccceeeeeeeeeees 165 fill175 Her seia 179 IMPOMtiING eccccseeeeeeeees 165 laS Onsen 170 level eise 180 magic wand l a 171 marquee n se 170 MOVE saaneena ienai 172 Daintbrush cscecceeees 173 DCG I ana 174 Previewing ccccseeeeeeeeeees 16 rasterizing objects into bitmaps cceeeeeeees 166 reduce noise 179 resampling cccseeeeeeees 167 SCANNING eeccceseeeeeeeeees 165 sharpen seeeeeceeeeeeeeees 180 STAM rinna a 177 TF AGIING ei 182 transparency 168 using DesignCentral 164 blending effect 8 202 block text aannnnnnannnnnaannnnnn 117 blocking output of tiles 286 border printing 00 227 Index Page 347 DOORS aariaa 109 314 CHANGING oarra 90 braille text cccccseeeeeeeees 133 changing ordet 83 break apaft ccccs
2. hk Al a I black The following options can be adjusted in this dialog box Advance after plot Cut page crossings Pause between colors Pause between pages Apply copy spacing between pages Passes Advances the media and resets the origin Cuts the borderline of a page when the output is tiled into several pages Selects whether the Production Manager should pause after each color is processed allowing you to change the pen or the media This option can only be selected when Send all colors is checked Selects whether the Production Manager should pause after each page is processed allowing you to load the media after each page Separates pages tiles and panels using the amount of space specified for spacing out copies in the Copies group on the General tab Defines the number of times that the blade will cut the same path Set this option if you are using thick or hard media that can t be cut in a single pass Cutting your Design Page 239 Automatic Registration Marks Send all colors Weed border Easy weed margin Horizontal weedlines Vertical weedlines Auto weld Auto trap Optimize cutting order Adds small rectangles to the corners of each layer to aid in positioning each piece 3 The automatic registration marks are simply placed at the corners of each layer If the layers are different sizes the automatic registration marks will not line up with
3. 0ccceeeee 320 Setting Dither Options for Angled Screens ccccceeseeeeeeeees 321 Setting Cutter Driver Options ccccccceessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 323 Editing ICC Profile Properties cccccccccceessessseeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeees 324 Appendix A ASCII Code cccccecesssnnssseeeeeeeeceennseeeeees 329 Appendix B Installation cccccccsssseeeeeenseeeeeseeseenseeseennees 331 Appendix C Supported File Format ccccccssssssssseeeees 333 File Formats Supported in Design Application ccccccceeees 333 File Formats Supported in Production Manager 008 335 AULOGAD DXE IMOM creirie ae 335 Gerber File Format Supported Features cccccscececceeeeeeeeeeees 336 Appendix D Features List cccccsssseessesseeeeeenseeeeeeeeseennees 337 Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features ccssssssseeeee 339 Using Bezier Tracing ssciceeeceeadecescencdstsanagendetoxiacsieaseenzaceigmiceacesaeees 339 Using Enhanced Curves Tracing cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaes 339 Using Enhanced Corners Tracing cccccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 339 Using Centerline VectoriZation cccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 340 Using Color VeCtOnZatiOn ic s c0 cicveads cca sececcees sccedeivncs eeececdennotedaede 341 Appendix F Keyboard Shortcuts cccccsssssssssssssseseeseees 345 BGO aaae E AI
4. ccccccsseeeeeceeseeeeeeseseseeesaeeeeess 204 Using the Finisher Effect ccccscsccccccsseeeeeceeseeeeseeeeseeeseeaeeeess 206 Using Color Trapping eannnnenneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnensennnnnnnnnsrnnnnnrensennnne 207 USINO SMES aieea ele Nt decane Anette Mooi 208 Using C Omote Ulase E N 209 Contents Page iii 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Working with Measurements and Labels 213 WeEASUMING DISTANCES sxc isest us secsovssculeti leaned nousest p Taia 213 Creating Dimensioning LINES ccccccsseeeeceeeeecseeeeeeeeeeessaeeeees 214 Automatically Dimensioning Objects ccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 215 DIMENSIONING to Page reretia Bieta iaaa 215 Creating Labels eicce centecicel dou n TE 216 Editing Dimension Lines ccccccseeeeceeseeeceeeeecceeeeeseeeeessaeees 217 Configuring the System for Color Printing 219 Setting the Input ProfileS cc ceeecccceceseeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 219 Setting the Display Profiles ccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 220 Selecting Rendering Intents cccccccescesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 220 Printing to a Desktop Printelr cccccsesseeeeeeeeenseeeeeeees 223 Previewing the D SIQN ccccsssceccseseeceseeeceeseecseseeeesaueeeseasees 223 FIDE PHONG see cerns aaa E N 226 Cutting your Design sssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
5. 0cceeeeeeeeeees 209 CMYK swatch tables 95 Contour Cut ccceeeeeeees 258 color control points 59 111 COFTECTION ccccseeeeeeeee 307 convert stroke to outlines 147 MAPPING sesccsetiedidrcresrsees 288 convert to outlines 146 IMOOES ea 305 converting marquee to shape Color bands cceeeeeeees of gt anne eerie an iewe none ien ee 172 color inverSiONn 6068 203 converting objects to shapes GOIOMIIDFANIGS teeta a 115 creating by measurement 93 converting shape to marquee MOIY eose 93 O serene 172 color library ccccseeeeeee eee 90 converting units 08 21 color management systems CODY eatea ea 64 IAE E a MEE EAE 254 307 Corner MAarKS cseeeeee ee 314 color MIX EN tascevciecdeeeviivccve 84 Corner radiuS cccseeeees 107 color MOE 00ccceceeeeeees 168 corners color models for bitmaps 163 make right angle 160 color profiler 000000 288 rounding 0ecceceeeeeeeees 154 COION SPECS ccccceeeeeeeeeees 87 SNAMPENING seeeeeeeeeees 154 color swatches 005 314 cost estimatiOn ccceee 34 color tracing seceeeeees 186 creating bitmaps 166 color trapping 008 207 creating new documenis 27 colors creating swatch tables 94 adding cccseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 85 Crop MAaKS nnnnnnannnnnn
6. 0cce 34 FMXPress diffusion 307 J D WFO siina ahaa 33 fonts jobs CasionisS cnc civekecey 140 aborting 2 s 220eocicteatesee see 278 CHANGING xnortic vue eyed 128 AG GING z setescsasociet devas sss 276 engraving fonts 140 archiving eccceseeeeeeeeees 304 F SIONIS sianie 140 CROP DING dc cscsiete eeen Peet 5ccs 287 installing 140 default job properties 301 modifying fonts in use 141 deleting ccccseeeeeeeeeees 277 UAW rannen enini 140 fitting to media 302 foreground Color 6668 92 arolle la e st cecuucsersesaeces ener 304 freehand drawing 146 job priority ciceressedeecticek 277 POIONIS ega 140 larger than output medium FTP SQUINGS s2i 2asseoes 2TA O OO eee eee nee 282 fuse effect cccceceeeeeeees 191 NESUUMG isione i 279 Getting Started 00 7 pOSItIONINg eeeeeeeeees 302 global color mapping 290 PLATING eean ecee 278 gradient fill ceeeeeeeeeeees 100 printing a tile map 283 gradient rendering intent 220 FECIFECTING cccccseeeeeees 277 gradient stripes 198 RIP NO 232 20 ceca eee cease 277 gradients Otal aa 303 COMING aunan 102 SAVING sinri 276 graphic styles 00 208 selecting cccseeeeeee sees 276 HCN a esse EEEE 11 setting job properties 297 grouping objects 06 68 setting job size 302 QU
7. H 0 Gd Accucut ff QB SM 7777 Label Stock H O O Arlon on 3M ControlTac 180 co J Avery vee Ge SM FloorMinders co C Cartonerat ee 3M Scotchbrand 521 H O Lj Catalina gt 3M Scotchbrand 522 H O Ga Corel o M Q 3M Scotchlite 280i Ref You can select multiple Vendor and Type 4 Select the tolerance for the search from the list Click Search The closest matches for the selected color are displayed on the bottom of the screen When you select a color from the list While adjusting the colors the swatch will show the color you are looking for on the top and the color found in the Color Library on the bottom Original Color New Color 6 Select the color from the list 7 Doone of the following e Click Replace to replace the selected color with the new color found in the Color Library e Click Add to add the new color to the swatch table Setting the Default Fill Stroke Color When a new object is created the default Stroke Stoke Ei Fill am and Fill colors will be used These colors are Default Stroke and displayed in the lower right corner of the design FIII area To change the default Fill Stroke colors 1 Click an empty area on the document 2 Drag the desired color from a swatch table or the Color Mixer into the default Fill Stroke color indicator at lower right corner of the design area Once the default Fill Stroke colors are set all new objects in this document will be created using these colors Set
8. RGB Proofing Default RGB 7 Add In order for this CMYK emulation to be as accurate as possible you have to set the appropriated profiles in the Display Settings tab of Color Settings dialog Add Grayscale Default CMYK 7 Add Cancel Monitor Select the profile that matches your computer monitor Printer Select the printer that will be used to print your design Check Soft proof preserves white point option to emulate the white point of the paper Selecting Rendering Intents Rendering intent A specifies how a color Display Settings Input Profile Rendering Intent Space from the input m Default rendering intents file gets mapped to the CMYK Others color space of the Bitmap EERE Perceptual Pure Hue Output device Vector Relative colorimetric l Relative colorimetric l Test Relative colorimetric l Relative colorimetric l Pure Hue Gradient Spot color l Spot color l Cancel Bitmap The rendering intent to use with bitmap images raster images contained in your job file Pure Hue Rendering intents can be specified for four different types of objects that make up jobs Pure Hue Vector The rendering intent to use with vector objects such as circles polygons lines arcs and Bezier curves contained in vector based files like PostScript DXF or Adobe Illlustrator Text The rendering intent to use with text obj
9. Setup the folder where the plug ins are installed 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences 2 Goto File Path Tab and enter the folder location in Adobe Plug Ins Click Browse to find the folder For more information about the Adobe plug in folder location see your Adobe Photoshop user manual 3 Click OK Once the plug in folder is properly defined in your computer you can use the filters 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Adobe Filters and then select the filter 3 Follow the instructions of each filter For more information about Adobe filters see your Adobe user manual Tracing Bitmaps Tracing allows you to convert bitmap images into vector objects this allows them to be cut or edited using path editing tools The tracing area can be limited by a marquee A bitmap that has been masked cannot be traced unless it is unmasked first After tracing the bitmap if you want to hide the bitmap to see just the traced paths click Preview Bitmap tool on View toolbar or Select Preview Bitmap from View menu Page 182 Working with Bitmaps Using AutoTrace AutoTrace traces each shape in the bitmap DesignCentral has the following options Noise Adjusts the amount of noise that is removed during the Reduction tracing process When None is selected noise will not be removed The Most setting removes the maximum amount of noise Original Image Traced with noi
10. cceceeeeeeeeee eens 10 transparency 202 DesignCentral 43 59 underbase n 204 bitmaps ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 164 Weld ainoita 189 DesignEditor 0 49 57 weld based on colors 192 deskewing objects 63 WIFETFAME 0ccceeeeeeees 203 dimensioning lines 214 emailing a job ccccceeeeees 29 GANO acean 217 embedded files 20068 30 dimensioning to page 215 embedded ICC profiles 321 display profiles 220 engraving fonts 0 140 distort effect cece 200 ENROULG rea 29 distributing objects 74 entering numerical values 20 dithering ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 306 eraser tool cseseeeeeeeeees 172 options for angled screens error CiffUSION 006ceeee 306 ISAE E TETT 321 exclude common effect 190 document setup 006 10 exiting the software 26 documents exporting bitmaps 165 GIOSIING vixxawcsethaiestetersectetincs 29 exporting color profiles 292 OXPOTTING cccceeeeeeeeeees 28 exporting to files 08 28 OW sevasertsosiceewebsedereseaicanes 27 eyedropper eececeeeeeeeeees 86 SAVING ee EEA 28 TANG E E E 108 sending as email 29 editing scchactsntansecdsctacteians 113 sending to EnRoute 29 features list cceeeeees 337 SEtUp ccccceeeeeeeee
11. Select this option to automatically nest jobs once the specified percentage of the media has been covered Select this option to automatically nest jobs once a day at the specified time If checked the images may automatically be rotated when nested so that less of the output medium will be used up Set Number of jobs to 1 to automatically nest pages tiles and separations Page 280 Using Production Manager Nesting Pages Tiles and Separations The software is able to nest the pages of a multi page job so that they line up across the width of the output medium and take up less material To nest the pages of a multi page job 1 On the Layout tab of the Job Properties dialog for the job check Page Nesting Select the job 3 From the File menu select Nest Rearranging Nested Jobs The software allows you to rearrange a set of nested jobs using the Job Properties dialog You can move rotate and mirror the jobs To rearrange a set of nested jobs select the set of jobs and from the File menu select Job Properties In the Job Properties dialog select the Layout tab A red border appears around the edges of the selected image Moving Images To move a nested image click and drag the image in the preview pane of the Job Properties dialog Rotating Images To rotate an image 90 select the image and click on the Rotate Image button Clicking the button a second time will toggle the image back
12. To change an underbase made from a vector object back into a vector object 1 Select the object 2 From the Arrange menu select Underbase then Release Underbase Using the Finisher Effect The Finisher effect defines a coating that will cover an area of the design and protect it from scratches and UV The finish can be applied as a rectangle covering an entire area of the design or as a shape that follows the outlines of the design A finish area can only be output on a thermal transfer device or by using the Print as Separations feature Creating a Rectangular Finish To create a rectangular finish for one or more objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Finisher then Rectangle Finisher 3 Select the spot color for the finish from the list in Design Central After a finish area is created it and the objects it was created for become a single compound object Creating a Shape Finish To create a finish that follows the outlines of one or more objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Finisher then Shape Finisher 3 Select the spot color for the finish from the list in Design Central After a finish area is created it and the objects it was created for Page 206 Working with Effects become a single compound object Removing a Finish To remove a finish area 1 Select the compound object containing the object and its finish area 2 From the Effect menu
13. dark inks This provides a greater number of light colored shades and reduces banding in light colored areas Ink split is only used when a color mode that includes light such as CMYKLcLm is selected To access the Ink Split Curve dialog 1 Open either the job properties or default job properties dialogs e From the File menu select Job Properties e From the Setup menu select Default Job Properties Select the Color Management tab a 3 Click on the Ink Limits button Click on the Ink Split button Sa Light Ink Peaks At 50 0 4 Channel Cyan X Maximum Level of Light Ink fi 00 0 Light Ink Ends At 75 0 d n 100 a Output Minimum Level of Light 00 ki 75 Middle Level of Dark Ink 75 0 Light Peak Smoothness 0 0 la Light End Smoothness 0 0 l mh x m 0 25 50 75 100 az Input Dark Ink Middle Smoothness o o 4 au Baa All Cancel Each shade of ink is represented by a curve plotted on the chart The chart illustrates the amount of each shade of ink that will be output in order to provide a certain amount of coverage The range of coverage that can be specified in the image 0 to 100 is plotted on the X axis and the corresponding coverage of each shade of ink is plotted on the Y axis Dark Ink Start Smoothness 0 0 The available settings are Page 318 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Channel Light Ink Peaks At Maximum Level of Light
14. eek to change the Outline a Offset Reference Line l Click and drag the Offset point to change the gap between outlines Relerente Click and drag the ocation Reference Location point to change the position of the Reference line over the object where the outline is applied Page 194 Working with Effects Using the Shadow Effect Your software allows you to place a shadow around any object The following types of shadows are available Em Block Shadow Drop Shadow Perspective Cast Shadow Shadow Applying Shadows to Objects To apply a shadow effect to one or more objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Shadow 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral or drag the control points 4 Click Apply x Adjusting Shadows Using DesignCentral When shadows are applied to objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral Drop r Select the shadow type between Block Cast Perspective and Drop 17 262cm The horizontal and vertical offset distance from fastacm 4 Original object These fields are not available for m EEU perspective shadows t p 4 Height ratio and slant angle These fields are available pa pr a for Cast shadow only gl i 000cm The distance between the object and the shadow when overlap or offset shadow is selected la pss Perspective ratio Only available for perspective shadows Ci Shadow color O S 0O o m Relief mode d
15. fet B Click this button to toggle the preview to display the selected objects only or the entire design Printing your Design Page 247 RIP and Print Dialog Panel Tab Jobs that are bigger than the media size should be tiled before output Ce M DesignJet 800 42 LPT1 x Job Status sd Properties Tl General Panel Advanced Color Panel size 255400 H tO 22674in 4 k 0 000in Panel Group Box m Tile Total tiles 6 Tile Group Box Overlap Overlap Group Vie CE Box 0 200in Panel tools malm Zoom tools The panel can be divided in several columns and rows Each section or cell is called a Tile To specify a tile that will not be output e Double click or right click the tile The tile will be disabled N Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 S Panel 3 l E J Tile mea ga Nae ai i i s il Panel Height i Seon S a Fa i i baei Disabled l So Row 2 ne a Tienog Page 248 Printing your Design The Panel tab provides several tools to tile the job Panel Toolbar The tool bar provides tools to change the Panel mode and automatically tile E Locks the columns so that the tiles on a same column can be adjusted as a group Ema Locks the rows so that the tiles on a same row will can be adjusted as a group HA Locks both columns and rows so that the entire columns or rows can be adjusted as a group _ e
16. gt Pan A Inner border 020cm Object Tab when both rectangles are selected Using DesignCentral Page 47 DesignCentral Effects Tab When you apply an effect over an object DesignCentral displays the Effect Tab with all properties of the effect The Object Tab for the object where the effect was applied is not visible in DesignCentral but you can still select it using the Select Within tool or double clicking the object with CTRL key pressed See Selecting Objects Within an Effect on page 56 for more details DesignCentral Effect Tab DesignCentral Setup Tab Many of the changes you Mmm make are automatically 35 s applied as you change them You will notice that some commands contain two buttons Apply Cancel on bottom right side of i fD64cm a DesignCentral to confirm or T 64cm z cancel the command pall x I Apply button DesignCentral will open automatically if there is a Setup Tab associated with the command DesignCentral Setup Tab copy command Cancel button Page 48 Using DesignCentral 5 Using DesignEditor DesignEditor is a powerful organizational tool to manage the various layers and objects in your drawing You can choose to display some layers and hide others delete or add layers and do similar functions with individual objects Displaying DesignEditor The DesignEditor consists of two screens the Layers Tab and Objects Tab Layers
17. 4 MASKO saaa 70 magic wand tool 171 M rOrInNg seeeeeeeeeees 46 61 magnify effect 203 MOVING es ene 60 make arC jcctss Wescecs bee ese 156 NESIN rkr dnas 75 make right angle 160 NUMDET NG c cseeeeeeeees 67 manual kerning 000 131 Ordenen 72 MAFQ NS seicccvesceteceeele 43 314 pasting iis 64 marquee tool 170 RESIZING usen r 59 clearing cccceeeeeeeeees 171 rotating oense 45 61 converting to shape 172 selecting 020ecee 52 55 INVErt Ng ccccuittereeliencs 171 SNEALING c0cseeeeeees 46 61 masking objects 00 70 SIZING eoa Reaeacsee tees 44 measuring colors 0668 93 SPACING n 75 measuring distances 213 stroke properties 103 media feed calibration 309 OLE ODISCIS aaraa 31 media SIZEC ccccsseeeeeeeees 302 online Nelp ccccceeeeeeeees 25 media types opening files cceeeeeeees 27 sle e liae CEOE 317 operator precedence 22 FEMOVING c cecceeeeeeeees 318 optimize by 3 point arc 156 MENUS estes erates cet Gti ceees a 9 optimize by curve 155 merging colors from a optimize by smooth arc 155 document into the palette 84 options merging similar colors 83 setup properties 272 Microsoft ICM 254 308 Ordering lAyers ccceeees 51 MIFLONINQwscekcecevesnlceeecsartece 303 or
18. All On All Off OF Cancel 2 Check the boxes for each color channel that you want to preserve unmixed Click All On to check all color channels or All Off to clear all channels 3 Click OK Page 222 Configuring the System for Color Printing 17 Printing to a Desktop Printer Before the final output you may want to print a sample to your desktop printer for proofing To print your document in a desktop printer 1 Make sure all the objects and colors you want to print are visible in your document 2 From the File menu select Print 3 Select your desktop printer and set the appropriated options Check Selection to print only the selected objects 4 Click OK Windows or Print Macintosh Previewing the Design The Print Preview feature allows you to visualize the output before printing to the desktop printer The preview should reflect any changes that you made in the Printer Properties paper size orientation and Print Options Previewing the Design on a Windows Computer To show a Print Preview 1 From the File menu select Print 2 Select your desktop printer 3 Click Preview 7 Print Preview One Page Print Preview Two Pages In the Preview dialog box you have the following buttons Print Closes the preview window and returns to the Print dialog Next Prev Page Allows you to navigate through the pages Printing to a Desktop Printer Page 223 One Page Two Page Di
19. Centerline Vectorization x x x x x Color Vectorization x x x x This chart lists only the major features that differentiate the versions of the software Not every feature present in the software is listed x lt lt lt X x lt X lt X x x x x Page 338 Appendix D Features List Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features The following tracing features are not available on the Macintosh Using Bezier Tracing Bezier Tracing traces the outline of the image and converts it to Bezier curves Bezier curves are very convenient for graphic editing and typically contain fewer points than lines arcs To trace a bitmap using Bezier tracing 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Vectorize and then select Bezier Using Enhanced Curves Tracing This option traces the outline of the image and converts them to Lines and Arcs This option is the preferred method when scanning small business cards or poor quality artwork To trace a bitmap using Enhanced Curves tracing 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Vectorize and then select Enhanced Curves Using Enhanced Corners Tracing This vectorization option is great for larger camera ready artwork It will produce fewer points and sharper corners than the Enhanced Curves option To trace a bitmap using Enhanced Corners tracing 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Vectorize and then sele
20. Keyboard Shortcuts Cancel Edit CTRL F4 CTRL W ALT F4 F Align Both Centers CTRL 5 Align Both Centers CTRL SHIFT 5 to Page Align Bottom CTRL 2 Align Bottom to CTRL SHIFT 2 Align Horizontal CTRL 3 Align Horizontal CTRL SHIFT 3 Centers to Page e Align Left Align Left to Page Align Right Align Right to Page Align Text Baselines Align Top CTRL 8 Align Top to Page CTRL SHIFT 8 Align Vertical CTRL 7 Align Vertical CTRL SHIFT 7 Centers to Page ee Arranging aa Back One CTRL PAGE DOWN Compound CTRL M Convert to Outlines CTRL SHIFT O Convert to Outlines Forward One CTRL PAGE UP Group Redraw Redraw FS Repeat Reverse Path CTRL SHIFT D Direction aaa Rotate Spacing To Back To Front UnCompound Ungroup Help Topics FM ut N Palettes Jo o o Color Mixer M Add Point Bezier Path Tool P Select Tool BACKSPACE DELETE CTRL C C C O B _ cut o P O Cut CTROX D D T Paste Jo FA Select by Attributes D Uno M Appendix F Keyboard Shortcuts Page 345 SPACE View Fiter F Zoom Z Find and Replace O BRB o o Justify Right CTRL SHIFT R Miscellaneous Bea Spell Check Cut Plot CTRL L Shapes CTRL B Circle Tool CTRL P Print Setup Page CTRL SHIFT P Setup on Macintosh biel Measure Tool U Paint Brush Tool B Oval Tool i o Page 346 Appendix F Keyboard Shortcuts Index aborting output 0 278 absolute c
21. Objects Layers Objects E B Master Page Substrate Trash B Page 1 Layer 1 sex Pag lt 2 Substrate w FE Trash DesignEditor Layers Tab DesignEditor Objects Tab To view the DesignEditor e From the View menu select DesignEditor DesignEditor Layers Tab Layers are a convenient way to organize the elements of your design for easy access and editing Think of layers as sheets of acetate stacked one on top of another Where there is no image on a layer you can see through to the layers below Behind all of the layers is the Substrate and the Trash Layer The layer at the bottom of the tab is the bottom layer of your design and the layer at the top of the tab is the topmost layer in the stack By default each new drawing that you open has the following layers Substrate Layer Represents the surface on which your design might be applied You cannot delete copy or edit the substrate layer However you can move it to a different location in the stack or hide it from view so that its color is not visible Grid Layer The Grid layer is placed immediately on top of the substrate layer Use the grid to help you position objects in the drawing area For more information about the Grids see Rulers and Grid on page 11 Using DesignEditor Page 49 Guide Layer The Guide layer contains the drawing Guides For more information about Guides see Guide on page 12 Trash Layer Th
22. Open Source Click this button to open the linked file using the associated program Change Click this button to change the linked file replacing the Source current file with another one Break link Click this button to permanently break the connection between a linked object and its source file Working with Job Info Your program allows you to store information about the job with each file you create You can add or change information about a job at any point in the design and production process This information becomes part of the file and is saved when the file is saved Lok carcet__ Job Tab Customer Tab Statistics Tab To view or edit the Job Info 1 From the Edit menu click Job Info 2 There are three tabs that you can view or edit the job info Job Tab In this dialog box you can edit the information about this particular document Customer Tab In this dialog box you can edit the information about the customer Statistics Tab This dialog box contains stored information about the job including the amount of time spent editing it the number of times it was revised the number of times it was Saved as well as other information Clicking Reset button will restore the number of revisions and the total editing time on a file 3 Click OK Finding Files The Find File feature allows you to search for specific files You can search the file based
23. commands Knife offset Check to enter custom values for knife offset 3 You should only change this value if you are using a pen plotter as a cutting device Packet size Check to specify the packet size sent to the device 3 This setting applies to a limited number of cutters and should not be changed unless your cutter requires it Curve quality Determines the precision of the curves by setting the maximum space allowed between the curve and the line Higher quality requires more lines resulting in increased plot file size and cutting time v Higher quality Lower quality Page 310 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager The default is already set for optimal results Cutter Displays the Cutter Driver Options dialog Options Reset Restores the default settings Tile Tab The tiling feature of the software allows you to split a print job up into a number of smaller tiles that are then output separately This can be used to produce a larger job than a device is capable of outputting in one piece For details on tiling jobs see Tiling Jobs page 281 Labels and Marks i GIS G G amp l Sle Tab Color Black amp You may choose to print crop Width 0 500in z marks and information about the T Print labels job along with any notes that you Position Tp fA fi2 H ponts enter Font Helvetica x 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 F Vv E Print marks None I Tile overlap lines V On bot
24. 00 Sars Asn Rotate Objects Inclination of the line that joins the original object and the center point The portion of the circle where the copies are distributed Radius of the circle where the copies are distributed Specifies whether or not to rotate the copies on the arc Rotate Objects Enabled Rotate Objects Disabled You can control the copies in Block and Diagonal pattern by dragging the Spacing Copies control point at the upper left corner of the bounding box e Drag the point to adjust the number of copies keeping the Spacing unchanged e SHIFT key while dragging adjusts the spacing keeping the number of copies unchanged You can control the copies in Circular pattern by dragging the Center control point e Drag the point to adjust the Angle and the Radius e SHIFT key while dragging adjusts the Radius keeping the Angle value unchanged 5 Click Apply x Working with Auto Serialization Serialization allows you to create multiple copies of objects However It is different from Step and Repeat since each copy will have a Serial Text which is a text following a sequential numbering Serial Text TD 103 ID 104 ID 105 Copies created using Auto Serialization Original objects Arranging Objects Page 67 To Auto Serialize 1 Select the objects At least one of the objects must be text 2 From Arrange menu select Auto Serialize Every word from the selected text
25. 312 313 adjusting cccceeeeeeeeees 315 CODIGO a 174 applying cccceeeseeeeeeeees 82 Cropping JODS ccccceeeees 287 Page 348 Index current palette swatch table 96 EEC lS iregi 189 GUS Dica 143 DIENA iran 202 custom color mapping 288 DrigNteN sosna 203 cut after printing 309 CICANING osica 189 GUE ING aisiaren naia 158 color trapping 0 207 cut out effect eee 190 combine effects 189 CUUPIOt vaccteseicceemscevestesedcaed 229 COMMON cccceeeeeeeeeeees 190 advanced options 239 CUOU naaa 190 paneling ccceeeeeeees 234 GISION enie 200 cutter driver options 323 exclude common 190 cutter settings 310 fINIShET asagh esssancomuedaaasces 206 default color ccccceeeeees 92 HOS E E E EE 191 default job properties 301 invert COIOM 0ecceeees 203 define character 136 IOS nenon 202 define kerning 0008 131 Magnify acumen tener te terre reer 203 degree of precision 268 outline eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 deleting COIOMS cccce0es 83 separate overlap 191 deleting jObDS cceee 277 SEPArAatiNG ceeeeeeeeeees 189 deleting objects 0068 77 SHAGOW scseucevaccsieblevercctees 195 deselect all cccccccceeeees 58 SIDES sad cecenctalarsncdaausete 196 design ALCO
26. Click and drag towards the center of the panel to add a new panel Le leE 1 1m Click and drag the panel border to add a new tile Cutting your Design Page 235 To resize existing tiles 16 20 24 28 1 Move the mouse cursor on top of the tile border 2 Click and drag to resize the tile Click and drag the tile border to resize the tile Tiling the Job Using the Tile Group Box The Tile group allows you to specify the tiles numerically To specifying the size of each tile numerically 1 Select the tile you want to resize in the preview area 2 Enter the new size th ih4666cm _ l I The width of the selected tile tO E6458cm lt 4 The height of the selected tile To tile the job evenly check the tiling option you want to perform and enter the desired number or the size of rows and columns a 4 Divides the job into a specified number of evenly z 4 sized columns a Divides the job into a specified number of evenly VENA sized rows Ye Tat ts a P e a Even Columns Even Rows od Divides the job into a specified size of columns M ol 3 000 starting from the left side iv 4 faod x Divides the job into a specified size of rows starting from the bottom Page 236 Cutting your Design Specifying Overlap Between Tiles You can specify the amount of overlap between rows and columns By overlapping you can eliminate any gaps between th
27. FireWire drivers are provided with output devices that support them Please make sure the proper drivers are installed when using these ports Some network devices do not work with TCP IP and only with LPR protocol Hostnameor The host name or IP address assigned IP address to the output device required Printer Depending on the output device this queue name can either be the printer name such as PR1 or it can be the path to a UNIX print queue See FTP listing above for common printer names Output devices that connect directly to a network may support FTP protocol This allows the RlPed output file to be sent to the output device via FTP Using Production Manager Host name The host name or IP address assigned to or IP the output device required address Printer Depending on the output device this can queue either be the printer name such as pr name or it can be the path to a UNIX print queue Common printer names include HP JetDirect raw EX HP JetDirect raw1 raw2 raw3 EX Plus 3 HP JetDirect Port 600N Intel Netport LPT1_PASSTHRU Express 10 100 Intel Netport LPT1 PASSTHRU Express Pro LPT2 PASSTHRU COM1_PASSTHRU Axis pr1 pr2 pr3 Linksys P1 P2 P3 Hawking lp1 lp2 Ip3 FILE The File port allows you to save the output data as a file The following settings are available Prompt for If checked you will be prompted to file path for provide a filename for the output file each file when e
28. Select the output device in the RIP and Print or Cut Plot dialog from the list 3 Click Properties Or 1 Select the output device from the left pane of Production Manager 2 From the Setup menu select Setup Properties Or Double click on the output device listed in the left pane of Production Manager Setup Properties contains several tabs where you can specify the media settings printing options cutting options etc See Editing Setup Properties on page 272 for more details Setting up Production Manager on a Network The output device does not need to be connected directly to the computer where Production Manager is installed Connecting Production Manager to Networked Output Devices If your output device supports a network connection or you have a Network Print Server you can connect the output device to the Production Manager through a network Please follow the instructions below to use a network to connect the output device Server H Output device Network Computer with Output device with Production Manager network capabilities 1 The computer must have TCP IP protocol properly installed and working 2 The output device or the Print Server must support TCP IP FTP or LPR and have a valid IP address assigned to it 3 When adding setups in Production Manager set the port to TCP IP FTP or LPR depending on the protocol supported by the device and enter the IP address assigned to the
29. Setting the Input Profiles Most files are calibrated for specific output devices Files in RGB format are usually color corrected for display on a certain monitor and CMYK files are color corrected for output to a certain printer Input profiles are used to convert these files to a neutral color space so that your software can later color correct for your output device using the output profiles The Input Profile tab as lt in the Color Settings Display Settings Input Profile Rendering Intent dialog allows you to Profiles for display set the input profiles Monitor that are used when Default RGB Add importing files The Printer input profiles should lay FT match the output Profile devices either a Dian Ue Add monitor or a printer Soft proof preserves white point used in the creation of the files Cancel In this dialog box select the following settings RGB Select the RGB profile that matches the source of images CMYK Select the CMYK profile that matches the source of images Grayscale Select the profile that matches the source of grayscale images You can add additional profiles by clicking the Add button Configuring the System for Color Printing Page 219 Setting the Display Profiles You can emulate the iis output color on your Display Settings Input Profile Rendering Intent computer monitor in a process called Soft Assumed input source profile
30. Ss 2 Click over the path to add new points Removing Self Intersections You can break a path that crosses forming a loop 1 Select the path 2 From the Arrange menu point to Path Direction and then select Automatic This command converts every closed path to compounded outlines Changing Starting Point Every path has a starting point When this path is cut the plotter will start cutting from the starting point In an open path the starting point must be at one end of the path Working with Paths Page 157 To change the starting point 1 Use the Select tool to select a path or the Select Point tool to select one point or segment 2 Select the Change Start Point tool a 3 Click and drag the starting point into its new position SHIFT key while dragging moves the starting point to an existing point 4 Click Apply Y or double click anywhere inside the design area Separating to Closed Paths The Cleaver tool separates closed paths creating new closed paths Open paths will be separated into open paths 1 Select the Cleaver Point tool x 2 Click and drag the cursor to create a cut line SHIFT key while dragging constrains the angle of the cut line m F P i j 7 A amp Jf F Separating to Open Paths The Scissor tool will separate paths always creating open paths regardless of the original path was an open or closed path 1 Select the Scissors tool 36 2 Click
31. The data from the imported ICC profile will automatically overwrite any existing data for the setup Using Output Size Compensation Output Size Compensation allows you to measure slight variations in output size and compensate for them To use Output Size Compensation with a given setup 1 Select the output device setup 2 From the Setup menu select Output Size Compensation Using Production Manager Page 293 Setup Hybrid Device Adjust cutting Measurement Test size Measured size Compensation factor width 2 i 12 000000in 1 000000 Lenath 12 000000in 12 000000in 1 o00000 Test print l Enable print size compensation cave Cancel 3 Ifyou are using a hybrid device and you want to apply output size compensation to the device s cut output instead of its printed output check Adjust cutting 4 Enter the Width and Length of the test print you want to output under Test size For best results the print should be as large as possible while still fitting onto the output medium The test print consists of two sides of a rectangle i e an L This allows most of the media to be reused 5 Click Test Print 6 Measure the actual size of the test print and enter the Width and Length of the test print under Measured size The software automatically calculates the compensation factors that will scale the output size to compensate for the difference between the test size and the measur
32. This method works on each of the three color channels Red Green Blue separately It divides the color range within each channel into equal bands then fits each pixel in the image to the color band closest to it In this method you specify how many colors you want in the posterized results Your software offers you a choice from a list of numbers 8 27 etc If for example you want to divide each color channel into two bands the total number of possible colors in all three channels will be 8 2x2x2 In the same way 3 bands per channel will create 27 colors 8x3x3 etc The Fast method is indeed the fastest posterization method This method is useful for posterizing logos with very distinct colors It is not recommended for photos because the colors in the posterized image are quite different than those in the original image In this method the program finds the most dominant colors in the image Any pixel is converted to one of these dominant colors the one closest to it in color In this method you specify how many colors you want in the posterized result This method is slower but the results are much better than the Fast method This method is recommended both for scanned logos and for photos The limitation of this method is that if you have a picture with many background colors such as many shades of blue in the sky the program may prefer those to objects in the foreground In this method you not only decide how
33. bitmap filters to apply effects The process of converting vector objects into a bitmap is called Rasterization 1 Select the objects 2 From the Bitmap menu select Rasterize You can edit the following attributes Keep Original Checking this option will preserve the original objects a new rasterized image will be placed on top of original objects Create mask When this option is checked the shape of the new bitmap will be the same as the original objects Transparent When this option is checked the background color of the bitmap will be set to be transparent Resolution The resolution of the new bitmap Color Mode The color mode of the new bitmap 3 Click OK Changing Bitmap Properties Once the bitmap is placed in the design area you can edit some of its Page 166 Working with Bitmaps properties like resolution and color mode Changing Bitmap Resolution DesignCentral Bitmap tab allows you to change the resolution of a bitmap To change the resolution of a bitmap 1 Select the bitmap 2 Select the Bitmap tab in DesignCentral Pe 3 Select the new resolution from the PPI fields at the bottom of the tab Check Proportional to keep the horizontal and vertical resolution the same Changing the resolution does not change the number of pixels in the bitmap it merely changes how many pixels fit into an inch As the resolution of a bitmap is increased the area covered by the bitmap will decrease because mo
34. color mode dither type etc will be loaded from the preset When finished click Done Loading settings from a preset only affects the Advanced tab it does not set the job to automatically use that preset in Production Manager Select the media type your job will be printed on Select the desired quality of your printout If your output device supports multiple color modes then you can select one of the supported color modes here Choose an appropriate DPI for your job A higher DPI produces higher quality output but increases the processing time Selects the dither type or the pattern in which the individual dots that make an image are applied to the media See Color Management Tab on page 305 Clicking the Screen button will launch a dialog box when the Angled Screen dither type is selected You can adjust frequency angle and shape for each output channel CMYK See Setting Dither Options for Angled Screens page 321 for details Select Normal Enhanced or Super The higher settings cause the software to render gradients using more elaborate algorithms that produce smoother dithering Output profiles are created for the combination of ink media resolution and dither type of your output device When selecting a profile be sure to select the profile that matches these criteria Select Add to add ICC output profiles from another source Printing your Design Page 253 Properties Color Manag
35. command Original Objects Objects after Common effect Exclude Common Effect Deletes the overlapping area This effect will be always applied to the topmost objects If you want to apply the effect to other objects underneath group the top objects first 1 Select the objects Page 190 Working with Effects 2 From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Exclude Common command Original Objects Objects after Exclude Common effect Fuse Effect Removes all of the object on the top layer except for the overlapping area The object on the lower layer remains intact and the fused portion retains its original color This effect will be always applied to the topmost objects If you want to apply the effect to other objects underneath group the top objects first 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Fuse command Original Objects Objects after Fuse effect Separate Overlap Effect Creates new objects from overlapped areas of selected objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Separate Overlap command Objects after Separate Overlap effect Original Objects Working with Effects Page 191 Combine Effect Options You can control the combine effect by changing the combine options To change the combine options From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Combine Options
36. material 1 Select the objects Arranging Objects Page 75 2 From the Arrange menu select Nest 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral Jal colors Select the color of the objects that will be nested If you want to nest all objects regardless of their color select All Colors F 357cm Height of the panel where the selected objects will be distributed i 924 20m Width of the panel where the selected objects will be distributed Ae po ell Distance between objects after the nesting Break text When this option is checked all text will be separated into individual characters and save more material Free rotate When this option is checked the objects will be rotated to increase the compression ratio and save more material Compress Ratio Displays the compression achieved by nesting the objects You can also click and drag the Resize Panel Control Point located on upper right corner of the panel area When the panel size is too small to fit all objects its border changes color from black to red E x gabcde x o Y Resize Panel al Control Point Edit bcde Original objects in their original Dragging the Resize Panel Control Point position aodCcae Nested objects with Nested objects with Break text Off Free Break text On Free rotate Off rotate Off Snapping Objects Nested objects with Break text On Free rotate On You can activate the
37. 2 Click Eyedropper Val Page 86 Working with Color 3 Move the cursor over the object or bitmap with the color that you want the selected object to be and click Selecting a Solid Fill from a Gradient or Pattern To select a solid color from a pattern or gradient hold down the SHIFT key while you select the color The fill color will be set to match the color at the point that was clicked on Setting Stroke Colors with the Eyedropper To use the eyedropper to set the stroke color of an object instead of the fill hold down the CTRL key The stroke color will be set to match the fill color of the object that was clicked on If the object has a pattern or gradient fill or if it is a bitmap the stroke color will be set to the color at the point that was clicked on Adding a Fill Selected With the Eyedropper to a Swatch Table To add a solid fill pattern or gradient selected with the eyedropper to a swatch table click and drag the fill swatch out of the Fill Stroke dialog into the swatch table ia 7 Solid fil wireframe Drag Advanced 44 HBA H Defining Colors Using the Color Specs Dialog The Color Specs dialog is used to define all properties about colors To view the Color Specs dialog do one of the following e From the View menu point to Color and then select Color Specs command e Double click on a solid color process spot or duotone in any open swatch table e Right click on
38. 55 000 Yellow Yellow 90 000 55 000 Black Black 45 000 55 000 Light Cyan Light Cyan 75 000 55 000 Print as Light Magenta Light Magenta 105 0 55 000 V Print spot colors as process Edit Shape Diamond E Use accurate screens MV Supercell halftoning Check to print each color plane separately teni a DD To print separations for certain colors only clear the checkboxes for the colors you do not want to print Page 316 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Print Check to make each process color separation print in the separations appropriate color of ink If this option is not selected all in color process color separations will print in black Separations for spot colors will always print in black Print spot Check to convert spot colors to their best process color colors as approximations and include them in the process color process separations If this box is not checked and your device supports spot colors each spot color will be printed as an individual separation Use Accurate If checked a special algorithm is used that produces highly Screens accurate halftones but is computationally expensive Supercell If checked supercell Halftoning will be used Supercell halftoning halftoning produces halftones that have four times the shades of gray at the same resolution compared to standard algorithms This comes at the cost of higher memory use and long
39. 8 of its original resolution When the resolution is lowered the tracing process is quicker and produces fewer points but the trace quality will not be as actuate at the reduced resolutions The Optimal setting picks the resolution based on image size to optimize the traces Defines if the stripes are horizontal or vertical Reverses the dark and light portions The color of the resulting vector objects To create stripes using PictureCut Working with Bitmaps Page 185 _ 1 Select PictureCut tool 2 Adjust the tracing parameters in DesignCentral 3 You can trace the bitmap or parts of it e Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular bounding box Surround the area that you want to trace on the bitmap SHIFT key creates a square bounding box e Click with the CTRL key pressed to trace all bitmap 4 To finish using the PictureCut tool select another tool Using Color Tracing The Color Tracing converts a color bitmap into colored paths The color trace process involves two steps The first is Posterizing which reduces the number of colors Then the posterized image is traced into objects with different colors a a oo Original bitmap 27 gt Le a A Neer liz Paths created in color tracing Ca DesignCentral has an Autotrace Tab with all the option described
40. Advanced Border tool 3 Click Add button on DesignCentral 4 Select the file saved in step 1 and click Open The border is added to the list To delete a border from the list delete the file from Border folder ROR SSO Se Ae 7 Oe Border List with a new custom border Parametric Shapes You can adjust the Height or Width and several parameters for parametric shapes Click the Edit button to show a dialog box where you can edit all parameters Ci Shape Parameters kH Triangle v 2 540cm H R H H e 20000m H 7 gt a jso E 10 000cm RA 0 000cm Preview ZN Restore Defaults Cancel Edit DesignCentral for Parametric Shape Parameter editing dialog box Page 110 Working With Shapes Editing Shapes Using Control Points You can create visually complex objects by using Control Points and Bezier handles Rectangle For rectangles you can drag the following control points S Height Width Corner Radius Hold the SHIFT key while dragging the Height or Width control points to resize proportionally Circle Depending on which method you are using you can drag the following control points while creating a circle e Center and the Radius e First and second points First second and third points a Radius Control Points Center Creating a circle using the 3 point Creating a circle using Center an
41. Arrange menu point to Group and then select Ungroup command To release all grouped objects 1 Select the grouped objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Group and then select Ungroup All command Ungroup All Compounding Objects Compounding lets you view overlapping objects exactly as they will appear when cut When you want to create a hole through an object use the Compound feature One way to create the sign on the left is to place white text over a black rectangle That would use two colors of vinyl You can achieve the same results using the compound command and use only one type of vinyl ABC EE ABC Another example of using a compound Compounded objects are treated as a single object Arranging Objects Page 69 pP To compound objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Compound and then select Compound command If objects with different colors are selected the compound object will have the color of the topmost object To compound objects based on their color e From the Arrange menu point to Compound and then select Compound by Color command Objects compounded by color are converted to outlines Cha Original objects Normal compound Compound by color Multiple levels of compounds can be made To release the last compound 1 Select the compounded object 2 From the Arrange menu point to Compound and then select Uncompound co
42. Bands Driver Options Density Selecting a density file applies the ink density adjustment adjustments created in Color Profiler If you do not wish to apply a density adjustment set this field to None Ink Limits Set the ink limit for each color of ink to the maximum percent coverage that the device can output without causing bleeding or drying issues then click OK Selects if the color of the drawing area will be printed with the design Selects if the labels and dimensions added with dimension label tools will be printed with the design Allows the job to be printed as a separation using black ink You can select to print one color channel or all color channels as a separate job Prints separations in color Allows you to map the spot color used in the design to specific ink in the printer See Printing with Spot Colors on page 256 for more details Check to print the selected type of mark Crop Adds crop marks to the output to aid in trimming the printout Marks Overlap Adds overlap marks to the output to aid in aligning Marks overlapping tiles Color Select the ink color that will be used to print the print marks Prints a thin strip of each ink color along the selected edges of the print to show that all print heads are firing Clicking this button launches the Driver Options dialog See Print Options Tab on page 309 for details Printing your Design Page 255 3 On the Mac
43. Click and drag the control point e Hold the Ctrl key while dragging to create a copy of the original object e Hold the Shift key while dragging to constrain the rotation or shear angle to increments of 45 degrees Creating Mirrored Objects Use the Mirror command when you want to create mirrored objects that are separated by a specific distance 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu select Mirror command A mirrored image is displayed along with a Mirror Line If the mirror line is not visible increase the distance in DesignCentral ona he Ha mage N E gt ba ki J x Mirror Line 3 Adjust the Distance in DesignCentral This value is the total distance separating the original and mirrored image Check Keep Original to create a copy of the original image Page 62 Arranging Objects You can also click and drag the control point in the middle of the Mirror Line to adjust the distance Click and drag a point located at Mirror Line s end to adjust the angle SHIFT key constrains the angle while dragging 4 Click Apply v Deskewing Objects Sometimes a scanned image is slanted because the original image was not properly positioned on the scanner To make the image horizontal or vertical use the Deskew command The Deskew command rotates the objects in order to make a baseline horizontal or vertical 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Deskew and select either Hori
44. Effect Object Fill Effect Cancel I Selectio Object Tab Fill Tab e Select Show all to display all the possible type of objects fills or effects e Select All types to select all of the elements listed on the displayed tab e Choose Selection only to limit your selection to the group of currently selected objects In this way you can refine your selection to an area that you define This option is unavailable if you don t have any object selected 3 Select the type of attribute will be used in the selection 4 Click OK Selecting Objects Using DesignEditor You can use the DesignEditor Objects Tab to select one or more objects See Selecting Objects Using Object Tab on page 52 for more details Selecting All Objects To select all objects in a document Selecting Objects Page 57 e From the Edit menu point to Select and then click Select All command Deselecting All Objects To deselect all selected objects e From the Edit menu point to Select and then select Deselect All command Or e Click an empty area Inverting Selection To invert the selection e From the Edit menu point to Select and then select Invert Selection command z gt Page 58 Selecting Objects 7 Arranging Objects This chapter describes how to arrange duplicate and manipulate objects in the design area Resizing Objects Objects may be resized by using the follo
45. Ellipse or Rectangle t f2e0g cm Height of the contour shape Ellipse or Rectangle Proportional Check this value to assure that the cutting line will be resized proportionally when you change its height or width This option is not available for Contour mode With Holes When this option is checked all holes in the selected objects will have an inner contour cut line This option is not available for Ellipse or Rectangle mode Contour with Holes Contour Without Holes E E iF Joint Type specify how the corners are contoured Adjusting Contour Cut Using Control Points When you apply an outline a reference line is displayed with control points You can adjust some of the above fields dragging the control points Page 210 Working with Effects Resize Offset Reference Location Contour mode Rectangle mode Transforming an Object into a Cutting Line If you need a cutting line with a special shape you can create a vector object and transform it into a cutting line A fan shape converted into a cutting line To convert a vector object into a cutting line 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Contour Cut and then select Make Contour Cut The objec s outline color will change to a light gray indicating that it has been converted to a cutting line Even after being converted to a cutting line the object will have its original attributes To convert the cu
46. Empty Dots selected Empty dots are not output CA Check to force the Braille coding to comply with the Standard California Braille standard i The diameter of each dot Edit Click this button to edit the original text Convert to Click this button to convert Braille text back to normal text Text Working With Barcodes You can convert normal text into Barcodes using Code 39 or Extended Code 39 Code 39 is an alphanumeric bar code It can encode numbers 0 9 the uppercase alphabet A Z Space and the some symbols If you need lowercase letters there is also an Extended Code 39 that encodes the 128 character ASCII character set by pairing existing Code 39 characters Converting Text to Barcode 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Barcode and then select Barcode39 or Barcode39 Extended from the menu Page 134 Working with Text Once converted to Barcode the text can not be resized or edited Arc and Path text can not be converted to Barcode Converting Barcode to Text 1 Select the Barcode 2 From the Text menu point to Barcode and then select Barcode to Text _ Barcode 1 2 3 SONT Normal Text Barcode Tab in DesignCentral When a Barcode is selected DesignCentral displays the Barcode Tab and the Barcode Text Tab with the following attributes and commands te yi ey Barcode Tab E Je39 Changes the encoding method Barcode 39 or acca Extended Barcode 39 0 025cm Width
47. If the specified tiles do not cover the job evenly the tiles at the top and right edges will be made small enough to fit in the gap Page 284 Using Production Manager Selecting a Tile To select a tile either click on the tile in the preview pane or select the tile using the HE field in the Selected Tile section of the Tile tab Editing Tiles To edit the size of the selected tile change the values in the Hl and EJ fields You can also resize tiles by dragging their edges in the Preview Pane Click and drag to resize If any of the All Tiles checkboxes are checked the JI and fields may be disabled In this case the fields have been overridden in order to keep all tiles uniform The tiles will not be editable using the Preview Pane either If you drag the edges of the panel over so that part of the job is exposed a new tile will be created to cover the exposed area of the job The exception to this is if you resize the panel using the cropping handles see Cropping a Job page 287 for details Using Production Manager Page 285 Preventing a Tile From Being Output To prevent a tile from being output with the rest of the job e Double click on the tile in the preview pane e Right click on the tile in the preview pane e Select the tile in the Selected Tile section of the Tile tab and clear the Print checkbox Non printing tiles are marked with a hash pattern Non printing tile To make a n
48. Ink Light Ink Ends At Minimum Level of Light Ink Middle Level of Dark Ink Light Peak Smoothness Light End Smoothness Dark Ink Start Smoothness Dark Ink Middle Smoothness Reset Apply to All Select the color channel you want to edit ink split settings for Only the color channels that have multiple shades of ink on the current printer are listed The point on the X axis at which the light ink curve peaks The amount of light ink coverage at the peak of the light ink Curve The point on the X axis where the right side of the light ink curve hits its minimum value The minimum amount of light ink coverage for the right end of the light ink curve B The light ink curve always starts at the origin The amount of dark ink coverage at the point where the right side of the light ink curve hits its minimum value The amount of curve present at the peak of the light ink curve Select 0 for a sharp peak The amount of curve present at the point where the right side of the light ink curve hits its minimum value Select 0 for a straight line The amount of curve present at the start of the dark ink curve Select 0 for a straight line The amount of curve present in the middle of the dark ink curve Select 0 for a straight line Click to restore the ink split settings for the current channel to their previous states Click to apply the current ink split settings to all color channels Setting Job
49. Ink Split Options page 318 for details Check to print spot colors based on settings in global and custom color mapping Page 308 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Printer Options ae Tab The Print Options tab displays settings related to the selected output device The options displayed may vary alela A e le Print direction Bidirectional gt Page spacing Momm Overprint i 0 Dry time None ES depending on your output device Enable driver options Overprint Page Spacing Dry Time Print Direction Media feed calibration Cut sheet after printing Advance after print Restore Defaults Cut sheet after printing Print crop mark V Advance after print Advanced Restore Defaults Allows you to use the available driver options for your output device When driver options are enabled you can set special options from within the driver options dialog When driver options are disabled the printer s own settings will be used Number of times you would like the printer to print over the same area This setting increases the number of ink layers placed on the media The amount of space between each separate job This is the amount of time the printer waits after it has completed printing allowing the ink to dry Direction the print heads move when printing In Bi directional mode the print cartridges print from left to right then from right to lef
50. Opacity Tolerance The percent to which the fill will overwrite the bitmap At 100 the fill will be completely opaque At lower numbers the fill area will get less color but will retain more detail The fill expands until it encounters the edge of the bitmap or a change in color Tolerance determines how big a change in color the fill will tolerate before stopping Tolerance ranges from 0 to 255 Enter a low value to fill colors very similar to the pixel you click or a higher value to fill a broader range of colors ee E A Opacity 100 0 Tolerance 100 Fill tab Working with Bitmaps Page 175 DREA i Original Image Bitm Bose ase ap after Fill li Page 176 Working with Bitmaps Using the Stamp Tool The Stamp tool copies portions of a bitmap to another area on the same bitmap The Stamp tool has the following options in DesignCentral In the Brush Tab you can select the shape and the size of the brush For more details see Changing the Brush on page 178 In the Stamp Options Tab you can adjust ee ES it S Opacity The percent to which the output of the tool Opacity 100 0 will overwrite the existing bitmap At 100 Sie Nonaignec Style the output will be opaque at lower numbers it will be more transparent lf Aligned is selected the origin and destination points always move together whether the tool is drawing or not This i
51. Pennant Fish Two Waves Top Two Waves Patch Cylinder For example you can use the distortions to fit your design in a bitmap to see how the final sign will look Bitmap object Distorted vector object over the bitmap Applying Distortions to Objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Distortion 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral or drag the control points 4 Click Apply x Adjusting Distortions Using DesignCentral When distortions are applied to objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral im Select the distortion type ty pr Rotation angle of the distortion envelope i F Fa Rotates distortion envelope 90 degrees clockwise or counter clockwise q Fal Mirrors distortion envelope horizontally or vertically Adjusting Distortions Using Control Points For each distortion you have a number of control points that can be dragged to adjust the distortion to your requirements The number of points and the effect when the points are dragged will vary according to Working with Effects Page 201 the distortion type Control Points In some symmetric distortions like Wave Top and Patch CTRL key moves the handles independently from the other handle Using the Blending Effect Your software allows you to blend two objects The shape and color of one object will gradually change to another object Both objects must be vector objects Blending a circle into a s
52. Photoshop installed specify here ins the folder where the plug ins are stored Browse Click this button to change the folder Restore Click this button to restore the default settings for above Defaults fields Preferences Font Tab In this dialog box you can set the default settings for external FSfonts Path The folder where the FSfonts are stored Add If the FSfont is protected by a password click this button to enter the password Delete Click this button to delete the selected password Browse Click this button to change the folder Restore Click this button to restore the default settings for above Defaults fields Preferences Tools Tab In this dialog box you can set the default settings for some of the tools available in the software El Apply These preferences allow you to specify the default s Template template used when you apply a template See Using Templates on page 38 ES Combine These preferences allow you to specify the options Options used in Combine effect See Combine Effect Options on page 192 F Cut Plot This tool allows you to specify that the software must or communicate with Production Manager using TCP IP RIP and B Clear this box if the operating system is not th an Windows NT 2000 or XP or if the computer is Print running firewall software that might interfere with TCP IP communications B This setting is not present on the Macintosh Getting Started Page
53. Select the setup icon then from the Setup menu select the Make Active e Right click on the setup icon and select Make Active from the context menu Deleting Setups To delete a setup do one of the following e Select the setup icon in the setup area and click on the Delete button in the toolbar e Select the setup icon in the setup area then from the Edit menu select Delete e Select the setup icon in the setup area and press the Delete key on your keyboard e Right click on the setup icon in the setup area and select Delete from the context menu Using Production Manager Page 271 Deleting a setup will also delete all jobs associated with the setup Editing Setup Properties To edit the setup properties associated with a particular output device do one of the following e Right click the setup icon in the Setup Pane and select Properties e Select the setup icon in the Setup Pane then from the Setup menu select Setup Properties e Double click the setup icon in the Setup Pane Job Workflow Tab The Job Workflow tab displays information about the output device media size Send Print and contour I Rotate image to fit media Job Defaults Apply o Cancel Setup name Name of the setup Send This control only appears for hybrid devices For jobs that contain both a printed image and a contour cut this control selects what will be output Print and Prints the job then cuts the con
54. Table Save Table Save Table As Merge from Document Merge Similar Colors Detine Patterr Delete Sort gt Show gt Right clicking a blank Right clicking the swatch area All fields and control points that can be dragged will show tool tips to help Some commands will also show a brief description at the bottom of your screen To show a tool tip hover the cursor over the field command or control point for a few seconds A 0 000cm a Numeric field with a tool tip Design Area Control Point with tool tip da Button with a tool tip The design area is the white area inside the software s screen It has a border that serves as a guide and represents the size of your substrate The size of the design area does not limit the size of your design or where the design is placed on your media during output Margins can be placed inside the design area Those margins are used to distribute and align objects inside the design area You can change the size and the color of the drawing area and show or hide the borders See DesignCentral Document Tab on page 43 for more information on how to set up your document properties Swatch Table Swatch tables includes a group of standard colors gradients and patterns that can be applied to objects in your design See Working With Swatch Tables on page 80 for more information on swatch tables To toggle the display of swatch tables on and
55. a swatch table and select Color Specs Working with Color Page 87 Color Library Find Swatch table Default zE S Waa White S Salmon Pink a Burgundy Mi Red E Rust Orange S S j g S Manilla Yellow Wi Go H Name Black Mode RGB New Delete Measure IV Use color management Color setting default Rendering intent Color setting default Input profile r Color info Vendor Defaut Category Enhanced Part Comments G B Color Specs Color Tab In the Color Specs Color Tab dialog box you can set all the properties from each color From the list on top of the dialog box you can select the colors that will be displayed in the list You can select any of the following swatch table Used colors All colors All colors used in your present document the document Each color in the list will have an icon on the left side This icon indicates if a color is being used in the document E document that it is using this color T The color is not being used in the document All colors defined in the selected swatch table All colors from all open swatch tables plus the colors used in The color is being used in the document Clicking this icon hides all objects in your document using this color The color is being used in the document but all objects using it are hidden
56. access the dialog select Angled screen as your dithering option in the Printer tab of the Job Properties dialog and click on the Screen buiton Cyan 55 00 Magenta 75 00 55 00 Yellow 90 00 55 00 Black 45 00 55 00 Light Cyan 75 00 55 00 Light Magenta 105 00 55 00 Shape Diamond F E Use accurate screens MV Supercell halftoning Reset I ox Cancel The following options are available Screen To set the screen angle and frequency for a color channel Angle and select the channel in the list and click Edit Frequency Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 321 Channel Cyan Anale f105 000 Enter the angle and frequency desired then click OK Check Apply to All to apply the new frequency to all color channels Shape The shape of the dots that make up the halftone screen For best results choose either Diamond or Ellipse Cosine Dot Cross Diamond Double Double Dot Ellipse Inverted Double Inverted Double Dot Inverted Simple oD DaleTedalatetetels Petals qnn Dot ee r aa Te M ana a E i EENE b b F E ee Line Line X Page 322 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Line Y Rhomboid Round Simple Dot EON Me o e P oF or oa ooro Square a ARM RECOU ae SSS eR Use If checked a special algorithm is used that produces highly Accurate accurate halftones but is computationally expensive Screens Supercell
57. and drag the color to a new position You can edit a posterized color in the color palette To do so click the color with the CTRL key pressed After posterizing the image 1 Click the area in the posterized image with the source color The cursor will change into a paint bucket cursor 2 Drag into the object where the color will be applied When the mouse button is released the color will be applied Click the Drag ee rh Release BA object N where N A the button with the b the color and the source will be color will color applied be applied Page 188 Working with Bitmaps 14 Working with Effects Your software contains a number of tools that you can use to add special effects to the elements in your document Common Features There are a number of basic functions that you can use on all effects Separating Effects To separate an effect from the original object from the Effect menu select Separate After the command name the effect name will be displayed ABC ABC gt 36 Original Object with Text and Effect separated Effect Clearing Effects To remove an effect from the Effect menu select Clear After the command name the effect name will be displayed Using Combine Effects Combine effects are applied to overlapping objects separating or merging the portions that are overlapping Combine effects can only be applied on vector objects they are not available for bitmaps Wel
58. and drag the cursor to create a cut line or just click to split a path in one specific point SHIFT key while dragging constrains the angle of the cut line Page 158 Working with Paths Breaking Paths Use this tool to separate paths at existing points 1 Select the points 2 Select the Break Path tool tied lt Selected Points g i j i i x ee y 1 Pi Pa g You can also use the Break Path tool to cut one specific point in your path 1 Select the Break Path tool A 2 Click the cursor over the path 3 Selected Point Joining Paths Use this tool to join two points separated by a gap 1 Select the points 2 Select the Join Path tool fal 3 Adjust the Tolerance value in DesignCentral Points that are separated beyond this distance are not joined 4 Click Apply x or double click anywhere inside the design area Not joined since the gap is too wide Joined Points Working with Paths Page 159 Merging Paths with the Join Paths Tool The Join Paths tool can also be used to merge two paths into one 1 Using the Select Point tool select the nearest end points of each of the paths 2 Select the Join Paths tool eal _ Selected ST Points gt Converting Corners to Right Angle Use this tool to make right angles To make one sharp corner a right angle corner 1 Select the corner or segments BEJ If yo
59. at equal rate from the center point Page 126 Working with Text Editing Text In an existing text you can enter a new text or replace existing words 1 Select any of the text tools 2 Click on the text you want to edit 3 To insert characters into the text place the cursor in the desired location and begin typing ABC DEF ABdefC DEF GHI GHI Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the cursor within the text The HOME key returns the cursor to the beginning of the current line The END key moves the cursor to the end of a line 4 To replace part of the text select the text you want to replace and type or paste in the text you want to replace it with ABC HE ABC jkll GHI GHI SHIFT and left arrow right arrow keys selects a group of characters e SHIFT and up arrow down arrow keys selects the character from the beginning of a line to the insertion point or from the insertion point to the end of the line e Click and drag to select a group of characters e Double clicking selects one word Selecting Text You can select text as whole text one line at a time or a group of characters Selecting the Whole Text e Select the text with Select tool Selecting One or More Characters e Click and drag the text with Text tool to select a group of characters Working with Text Page 127 Selecting One Character 1 Select the text 2 Select the Character or Paragraph Tab in DesignCentral
60. by doing so 4 Export Law Assurances You agree that neither the Software nor any direct product thereof will be transferred or exported directly or indirectly into any country prohibited by the Licence Agreement Page vii United States Export Administration Act or any international export laws and the restrictions and regulations thereunder nor will it be used for any purposes prohibited by the Act or laws 5 Warranty Disclaimer Limitation of Remedies and Damages In no event will Scanvec Amiable Inc be liable for any damages including infringement lost data lost profits cost of cover or other special incidental consequential or indirect damages arising from the use of the program however caused and on any theory of liability This limitation will apply even if Scanvec Amiable Inc or an authorized dealer or distributor has been advised of the possibility of such damage SCANVEC AMIABLE Inc MAKES NO WARRANTY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND DISCLAIMS WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Scanvec Amiable Inc does not warrant any drivers for plotting scanning or either devices These drivers are provided for our customers as a service only and were developed using information provided to us at the time by the equipment manufacturers Scanvec Amiable Inc is not responsible for any typographical errors in the software or in the docu
61. financial agreements upon them The estimation is calculated based on some elements of your design like the number of characters or the material area These values are automatically gathered from your document Other values like preparation time must be manually entered when doing the job estimation Those cost elements used in job estimation are grouped in Category Item and Type Page 34 Working with Files Category Item Type Color Printing CMYKLcLm printing CMYKOrGr printing Spot Color ICC Customization File Preparation PostScript File Creation Material Area Economy Fluorescent Translucent Using Job Estimation 1 From the Edit menu click Job Estimation 2 Select the Form type 3 Select the Item in the list and edit the Unit Cost Quantity and One Time fields for selected item Repeat this process for all items that need any correction 4 Edit the Quantity and Tax rate fields 5 After the estimation is completed you can either print an invoice by clicking Print button or save the estimation values as a text file clicking Export button The Total value will be automatically inserted in Job Info Job Tab Forms Estimation Editor Form Normal pa Delete Export Print Description Unit cost Quantity Amount Type Each Quantity OT Amount s Unt Intermediate Vinyl All Types 0 40 1 54 0 62 square foot Transfer Tape All Types 0 09 2 31 0 21 squar
62. from Flexi will not have color mapping applied to them Page 290 Using Production Manager e Global color mapping only affects jobs that were added after the color mapping was added Jobs that were already queued are not affected To access the Global Color Mapping module open the Setup menu and select Global Color Mapping Oers ColorName CA PANTONE 871 U PANTONE 872 U PANTONE 873 U PANTONE 874 U PANTONE 875 U PANTONE 876 U PANTONE 877 U PANTONE 8003 U PANTONE 5021 O PANTONE 8062 U PANTONE 8100 O PANTONE 3201 U PANTONE 8281 U PANTONE 3321 U Color mappings are provided for all Pantone colors Adding a Global Color Mapping To add a global color mapping 1 Click on the Add button in the Global Color Mapping toolbar 2 Type aname for the color in the Color field 3 Enter the LAB values for the color selected 4 If desired click on the Measure button to measure a sample of a color with a colorimeter 5 When finished click on the OK button Modifying a Global Color Mapping To modify a global color mapping 1 Click on the Modify button in the Global Color Mapping toolbar 2 Adjust the color mapping as desired 3 When finished click on the OK button Deleting a Global Color Mapping To delete a global color mapping 1 Select the global color from the list 2 Press the Delete key or click on the Delete button in the toolbar Using Production Manager Page 291 Importing and Expor
63. in Autotrace tool and a Color Trace Tab with following options Posterize Bitmap Edge Filter Number of Posterized Colors Merge into Active Undo When this option is checked the posterized bitmap will be kept Determines how aggressively the application removes noise from the bitmap when posterizing None does not remove noise and the Most setting will remove the maximum amount of noise Controls the number of colors the program will use to posterize the bitmap If there are several shades of a given color in the bitmap specifying one or more colors than the actual number needed ensures that the correct colors are retained Merges the selected color into the active color Undoes the last merge operation To posterize and color trace a bitmap Page 186 Working with Bitmaps Select Color Trace tool Adjust the tracing parameters in DesignCentral h Select the number of colors to trace E N You can trace the whole bitmap or parts of it by e Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular bounding box Surround the objects that you want to trace on the bitmap Hold down the SHIFT key to create a square bounding box e Click the bitmap to trace just one object e Click with the CTRL key pressed to trace all of the bitmap 5 Edit the color palette and the posterized image as described in the next item 6 Click Accept Merge into Active Undo T Color Palette Untraced Color S
64. in its original file format When job you add the archived file back into the software it will need to be RIPed again before printing Page 268 Using Production Manager File Paths RIP Band Height Maximum number of RIP threads Print while RIPing Ignore overprint in PDF Allow remote Send Now Interactive Automatic tile flip Native job Archives the print data in the output device s native language No preview information will be available When you add the archived file back into the software it will not need to be RIPed again before printing Sets the folders which will be used for the following Jobs The folder that job files are stored in Temporary The folder for temporary files that are created files during the processing of jobs RIPing files requires a significant amount of storage space If the drive on which the temp directory has only a small amount of storage space you may want to consider relocating the temp directory to a drive with more available storage space Sets the band size that is processed during RIPing Smaller values allow large files to RIP but will take longer to process Sets the number of jobs that can be RlPed at one time One RIP thread is required for each file being RIPed and one RIP thread is required to generate a preview for each file If this option is selected the software will RIP and print the job simultaneously RIPing and printing simultaneously may affect ov
65. in the cutter for contour cutting Some cutters are equipped with sensors that detect the registration marks automatically The Print Marks Color setting in the Advanced tab of the RIP and Print dialog determines the color of the registration marks For best result with a Gerber cutter use the Gerber Edge Center registration mark t 4 Points Places registration marks Horizontal along the upper and lower horizontal edges of the job Vertical Places registration marks on the right side of the image The arrow in the registration mark indicates the media feed direction for cutting Horizontal Places registration marks on the bottom of the image The arrow in the registration mark indicates the media feed direction for cutting L C Gerber Special registration mark for z Edge Gerber Edge Gerber The Gerber Edge Bo Edge registration mark located Center along the center of the lower horizontal edge Gerber An outline is traced around Type 3 the outside of the image 1 OPOS Gerber Odyssey positioning LE marks If checked only one set of registration marks will be printed for the entire job Check to lift the knife and advance the media after output then reset the origin Cuts the borderline of a page when the output is tiled into several pages When this option is not selected the objects are cut or plot in the order they were created When selected the software processes the
66. of a narrow bar pE 50 0 Barcode height Ae j2200 Width ratio between wide and narrow bars 1 1 000 Width ratio between space and narrow bars 2000 Width of blank area before and after the barcode ES te amp JN i Barcode Text Tab Show Title Click this option to show the title under the barcode Show Asterisks Click this option to show the asterisks in the title Font and Style used in title Regular Edit Click this button to edit the original text Convert to Text Convert the Barcode back to text Working with Text Page 135 Working With Special Characters Sometimes you may need to insert a special symbol into your text Using Existing Fonts If you have a font that contains a special character you can use the following method to insert a special character 1 Click the text with Text tool placing the cursor where the special character will be inserted From the Text menu select Insert Symbols Select the font and click the special character that will be inserted Click Enter to change lines and Space to enter a space Click OK ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ojojojojojojoajojojojojojojo BES EARS S fa Tag E oj1j2 3 4js e gt lajejcejajef f ajn etatets ituly iwi xtyt2 elol r s Space Enter Creating New Characters You can convert paths and shapes into a new special character 1 2 3 Select the path From the Text menu select Defin
67. of text A E A A A E Arial eee fr Arial FOE tf muL TA 2 540cm saoo TA 2 540cm i px 4 Afo 4 foo nafo o a A nafo o a A ablnox Al po Al ap f0 000cm 0 000cm H agm He Bafsscccm p E Arial E Arial CE af AT Regula a bal E I ens US te o uy tAl25400m oo a Ee 4 ox Afiooox Afo 7 mapo A falfis es3cm 2 apr Sf Al fi7 sercm 2 r da gt abjooz Spoom A oo a Mijom 4 ap f0 000cm 4 S 0 000cm 4 ayem H DesignCentral for Horizontal Block Text XE A AE araia ai Sf T i il Regar x Regar x T 5 aho ahoz 4 10 0 S aor A Al a a Al abloox joo 4 ab o 000em 4 Jo 000cm A gaps gt DesignCentral for Vertical Block Text Edit DesignCentral for Vertical Path Text A E l a AJE a Arial AfA Regular x E bel Eg Afas TA 2 540cm A fi00 0 Ea 2 tafo al Ea m mpo 4 A a abo ab abl 2b abf0 000em eyf He Edit DesignCentral for Arc Text Page 120 Working with Text Editing Attributes in DesignCentral Some attributes in DesignCentral are common for all types of text others are specific for one type The following attributes are available on the DesignCentral Character Tab pe OE la A E Character Tab bo Tr rial Font and style used in the selected text Click the Reeul arrow to view a list of av
68. off from the View menu select Swatch Table This will also force hidden swatch tables to be displayed Page 10 Getting Started Rulers and Grid Rulers appear along the top and left side of the main screen to help you measure and align objects AS you move the cursor in the design area a tick mark on each ruler follows the movement of the cursor Also the coordinates of the cursor position are displayed at bottom left corner of the screen To show or hide the rulers from the View menu point to Show and click Show Rulers Grids like rulers can help you align objects in the design area Grids are a series of horizontal and vertical dotted lines within the design area They will not show as part of the output To show or hide the grids from the View menu point to Show and click Show Grid The rulers grids and all other numeric values that represent a length follow a unit system defined in your software To change the unit system right click a ruler and select the new unit On Macintosh click and hold on the mouse button on the rulers By default the origin of the rulers is located in the lower left corner of the design area To change the origin you can click and drag the origin icon in the upper left corner of your screen Click and drag the Origin icon The new Origin You can also adjust the origin s position by using the Ruler and Grid Settings dialog box To display this dialog box e Double cli
69. on page 157 about how to change the starting point o o o Locked object with a Padlock symbol To release the lock in a object 1 Select the objects The only way to select locked objects is to click each of them with the Select tool 2 From the Arrange menu point to Lock and then select Unlock command Arranging Objects Page 71 Changing Object Order As you create objects or import files into your document every object will have a position in the stacking order The first object that you create will be in the bottom of the stack This order will be reflected when the objects overlap You can change the object s order in the stack 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Order and then select the new position in the stack To Front Moves the selection to the top of the stack in front of all other objects To Back Moves the selection to the bottom of the stack behind all other objects Forward One Back One You can also change the order dragging the object in DesignEditor Object Tab see Changing Objects Order on page 53 for more details Page 72 Arranging Objects Aligning Objects Align allows you to align objects in relation to one of the objects or to align objects to the design area To align objects to another object 1 Select the objects If you select the objects by dragging a bounding box the first object in the order stack is used as the Stationa
70. output device Page 264 Setting up Production Manager Using the Design Software and Production Manager on a Network Production Manager can be installed on a different computer as long as that computer has a hardware security key attached The computer that has Production Manager and the computer that has the design software must be networked and TCP IP must be installed and working properly Output Device Network Computer with Design Software Computer with Production Manager and Key The following steps will guide you to connect your design software to a Production Manager installed on a different computer 1 Attach the hardware key on the production station and install the Production Manager 2 Install the design software on the design station 3 Launch the Production Manager on your production station create the setups for the output devices and leave it running 4 Launch the design software on your design station The design software can run without the key as long as the network is properly configured and the key is attached to the production station Select RIP and Print or Cut Plot from the File menu Select On another computer Network and click OK 7 Select the Production Manager on the network and click OK Setting up Production Manager Page 265 Page 266 Setting up Production Manager 21 Using Production Manager See Setting up Production Manager on page 263 if you are la
71. perceptual LUT is not checked then relative colorimetric rendering intent will be used to create the LUT and the profile will be smaller in size Create This creates a different LUT specifically for the saturation Saturation rendering intent used for business graphics If create LUT saturation LUT is not checked then relative colorimetric rendering intent will be used to create the LUT and the profile will be smaller in size Page 328 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Appendix A ASCII Code Code Char Code Char Code Char Code Char dal Page 329 ASCII Code Appendix A Page 330 Appendix A ASCII Code Appendix B Installation The following DLL Dynamic Linked Libraries are installed in Windows folder ctl3d32 exe hhupd exe mfc42 dll mfc42u dll msflxgrd ocx e msinet ocx e owl250f dll e msvbvm50 dll e stdole2 tlb e msvcirt dll e vb5 olb e msvcp60 dll e vb5 dll e msvert dll e sentinel vxd sentinel vxd is not installed in Windows NT 2000 and XP systems The following folders are created under the folder where the program was installed Archive Borders Casfonts Color Custom Characters Density Dictionaries Filters Forms FSFonts Help ICCProfile Jobs OutputDrivers Plugins Printers Used as default folder by Production Manager when you add a job Contains the advanced border shapes see page 109 Contains font
72. point to Graphic Style and then select Edit Style 2 Select the style from the list then click Delete 3 Click OK Using Contour Cut Contour cut is a feature that creates a cutting line around objects either vector or lt _ saul bitmaps This allows you to output an image in a printer and then cut its contours using a cutting plotter If you have a hybrid device printer with cutting capabilities you can print and cut using the same machine For more information about how to output a contour cut job see Contour Cutting on page 257 Creating a Contour Cut Around an Object To create a contour cut 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Contour Cut Working with Effects Page 209 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral or drag the Control Point on Contour Cut line 4 Click Apply x Adjusting Contour Cut Using DesignCentral The following attributes from Contour Cut can be adjusted in DesignCentral Contour Select the type between Contour Rectangle and Ellipse A me ates A ed ae enie ia ge ar Contour mode Rectangle mode Ellipse mode Of f 000cm Offset distance from object to cutting line The value can be negative allowing you to make a contour cut line inside the design in order to prevent misalignments in printing and cutting process This field is only available for Contour mode 44 738cm Width of the contour shape
73. select Clear Rectangle Finisher or Clear Shape Finisher The finish area is removed and the objects are normal objects again Using Color Trapping The Color Trapping effect removes most of the overlapping material between objects The effect leaves enough overlapping material to ensure that no gaps will exist between the objects even if the registration is slightly off Original objects Show Fill is off Objects after Color Trapping Applying Color Trapping to Objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Color Trapping 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral 4 Click Apply v Adjusting Color Trapping Using DesignCentral When Color trapping is applied to overlapping objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral 0 600 in Overlapping distance Light to Dark Select if the trapping will be performed from the light to Dark to Light dark color or vice versa tt FCs Light to Dark Dark to Light Working with Effects Page 207 When this option is checked the color trapping will be Include Strokes a pplied to the object strokes Using Styles Styles allow you to capture and apply the fill stroke and the effects from one object to another Styles can be stored for future use Copying and Applying Styles 1 Select the object with the desired fill or effect 2 From the Edit menu point to Graphic Styles and then select Copy Style Select th
74. selecting a selected new tool Menus Menus are commands grouped by the types of operations they perform File Edit View Arrange Text Effects Bitmap Window Help _ A Ee Show Fills a ge Preview Bitmaps Shortcut key Chw Path Direction Enabled Command Show Preview ee sires the Currently available Soft Preview g ee ee eee i keyboard Disabled Command I Navigator View Not available Te Toolbars Ctrl T De sienCentral Ctri I A On Off button Eini Editor I aad dial Status Ber ndicates that a dialog aa ri a a box will be displayed command is currently pi DesienEditor E when this command is active or not chosen fe Swatch Table Meree Similar Colors a o oe Show gt Ruler amp Grid New Table Snap gt Open Table Redraw F5 Submenu Indicator Merge from Document Indicates that a submenu Dene PEN is available Modify Color Libraries When right clicking elements in your software a context menu is displayed The context menu will differ according to the element that you are right clicking on Getting Started Page 9 ar Tool Zoom xo Undo Greate Oval cu Rede Styles Bay Sopy amp Paste rir lear Delete Now Order Lock Select Right clicking a shape Tool Tips Exit Tool Zoom gt xo Undo Create Oval Ca Redi Styles gt B Paste Gey lmport Color Specs New Table Open Table Meree
75. the Freehand Path tool To continue drawing an existing open path select the Bezier Path or Freehand Path tool and click the cursor over either end of the path Drawing Straight Segments Using the Bezier Path Tool 1 Select the Bezier Path tool coy 2 Click where the segment will begin in the drawing area 3 Click where the segment will end Hold the SHIFT key to constrain the line angle 4 Repeat step 3 to create additional straight lines e Press the BACKSPACE key to delete the last segment e Press the ESC key or click the New Path button in DesignCentral to create a new path e Toclose the path place the cursor close to the starting point and click when the cursor shows a small circle underneath or press the Close Path button in DesignCentral p bm Close Path Cursor Closed Path e Press the DELETE key to delete the entire path Page 144 Working with Paths Drawing Curved Segments Using the Bezier Path Tool 1 Select the Bezier Path tool Click where the segment will begin in the drawing area Click and drag where the segment will end in the drawing area By default the new Control Point is Symmetric Hold the SHIFT key while dragging to make the new point Smooth or ALT to make it a Cusp After releasing the mouse button you can still adjust the Direction Lines by dragging the Direction Handles Hold the SHIFT key to change one Direction Line length and angle while keeping the other Dir
76. the Preview option is checked you will see a preview while adjusting the parameters 4 Click Apply x Color Balance Filter DesignCentral shows slider bars Cyan Red Magenta Green and Yellow Blue for adding or subtracting color from the image Example if you drag the Cyan Red slider to the Cyan side the amount of Cyan in your image is increased and the amount of Red is decreased 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Filters and then select Color Balance 3 Adjust the filter settings in DesignCentral by e Choose Shadows Midtones or Highlights in the list to select the tonal range on which you want to focus the changes e Click and drag the sliders or enter the values in the numeric fields e When the Preview option is checked you will see a preview while adjusting the parameters 4 Click Apply v Brightness Contrast Filter Using this filter you can adjust the Brightness Contrast and Saturation of your image 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Filters and then select Brightness Contrast 3 Adjust the filter settings in DesignCentral by Working with Bitmaps Page 181 e Click and drag the sliders or enter the values in the numeric fields e When the Preview option is checked you will see a preview while adjusting the parameters 4 Click Apply v Adobe Filters If you have Adobe filters installed you can use its filter plug ins in your software
77. the boundaries of the job Page 282 Using Production Manager Selected Selects which tile s width and height are displayed in the fields Tile below Bo Selects a tile to be edited The selected tile is highlighted in the preview pane TT Shows the width and height of the selected tile To adjust enter a number or use the arrows Print If checked the selected tile will be output with the rest of the job If cleared the tile is marked with a mesh overlay in the preview pane and will not be output All Tiles These settings apply to all tiles and help you quickly set up automatic tiles of equal size HE Selecting this option divides the job vertically into the number of columns specified Each column will be of equal width HH Selecting this option divides the job into the number of rows specified All rows will be of equal height l If you know that you want tiles of a certain size enter the values for the width and height of the tiles here All tiles will be changed to the specified size Sets the amount of overlap between tiles Enter a negative number to create an offset between tiles Automatic If Automatic tile flip is checked every other tile that is printed will tile flip be rotated 180 so that adjacent vertical edges are always printed with the same side of the print head This helps them match up cleanly gt gt i L RL R L Print Outputs a tile map to aid in asse
78. the output device is inactive or the Production Manager is on another computer on the network and the option Allow remote Send Now Interactive is not enabled in the Production Manager Preferences See Changing the Preferences on page 268 for more details Material Settings The Material group box allows you to specify the size of media used in your output device by entering the Media Width and Height The media size is used to panel your job if it is larger than the media Page 244 Printing your Design 51 D00 x 6O0 c Select your media size from the list or specify a custom size by selecting User Defined jia Poll Size polls the size of the media loaded in the cutter This feature only works if the device and port support bi directional communications 51 000 Material width o 600 000in Material height Position Settings The Position group box allows you to specify where on the media the job is output 0 000in Horizontal offset distance L ry 0 000in Vertical offset distance You can also positioning the job by clicking and dragging 1 Choose Select tool from the tool bar of RIP and Print dialog kl 2 Click and drag the preview to a new position Size Settings The Size group box allows you to change the size of your output 20 200in Width of the output t 2086zin Height of the output no ooo Scale ratio Copies S
79. the swatch table aoe a gt 4 Drag e Using the Color Specs dialog box See Changing The Order of Colors Using Color Specs on page 90 for more details e Right click the swatch table and point to Sort command You can sort the swatch table by Name RGB HSV values Vendor Type or Part Working with Color Page 83 Creating Swatches from the Colors in the Current Design The Merge From Document command creates swatches for every color in the current document in the swatch table of your choosing If your document has gradient fills they will also be added to the swatch table To create swatches for all of the colors in the current design 1 Open the swatch table that you want to save the colors in or create a new swatch table 2 From the View menu select Color then Merge from Document Please select the color palette Metallic Patterns Default New Table11 Cancel 3 Select the table you want to store the color swatches in then click OK If you access Merge from Document by right clicking on a swatch table the swatches will be added to that table without any prompting Applying Colors Using the Color Mixer The Color Mixer dialog box is used to specify and apply color to elements in your design To view the Color Mixer from the View menu select Color Mixer Color Mixer When you select an object the fill color is displayed in the swatch located in the upper left side of the Co
80. to Workspace and select the workspace Entering Numerical Values The software supports a number of unique features that make it easier to enter numerical values Page 20 Getting Started Using Spinner Controls 30 00cm o Use the spinner controls to increase or decrease the value When you click or click and hold the A mouse on one of the arrows the value is increased or decreased incrementally Using the Spinner Control arrow keys on your computer s keyboard will have the same effect Using Built In Arithmetical Operations The software is able to perform a number of calculations whenever a numerical value is being entered Automatic Unit Conversion If you enter a value using a different unit of measurement than the default unit the software will automatically convert the value to the default unit For instance if your default unit is inches you can enter a value of 1 ft and the software will convert the measurement to 12 in Supported units are Fin inch w ot mm millimeter centimeter meter point Calculation of Ratios If you enter a ratio in the format A B the software will scale the previous value in the field by the ratio entered For instance if a value is set to 12 and you enter 2 3 the new value will be 8 Calculation of Percentages If you enter a percentage in the format X the software will scale the previous value in the field by the percentage entered For instance if
81. to its original orientation Mirroring Images To flip an image along its vertical axis select the image and click on the Mirror Image button F gt Using Production Manager Page 281 Tiling and Cropping Jobs olx alelan HAIS Ting preview W J o a a a a aaa aa l mPanel size amp 500 4 a 1 487in 2 3 o 000in m Selected tile gg f 2 o 376in M Print tO 1 487in a All tiles r H f r H i ae7in 4 0 040in J Automatic tile flip Print Tilemap Reset Set Default Send ox Cancel 4 The tiling feature of the software allows you to split a print job up into a number of smaller tiles that are then output separately If a job is larger than the output medium it is automatically tiled into pieces small enough to output All tiling is done from the Tile tab of the Job Properties dialog To access the tiling features 1 Select the job 2 From the File menu select Job Properties 3 Select the Tile tab The following settings are available Panel Size The panel is the part of the job that will be split up into tiles and output by the software If the panel is reduced in size so that it does not cover the entire job only the parts covered by the panel will be output ha Shows the width and height of the panel To adjust enter a number or use the arrows ko The size of the margin The margin is the part of the panel that extends outside of
82. width of drs themedia tat ta de th te ath dadadadadadadadadndadadadadadadadadadadadndadadadndadadndal Page 232 Cutting your Design The job is placed at specified distances from ee the left edge and the leading edge of the media Rotate the job in 90 degree increments F J Mirror the job vertically Viewing Tools The viewing tools allow you to manipulate the job on the preview area Changes the position of the job on the media by clicking and dragging the job preview Zooms in or out Hold the CTRL key to Zoom out Return the preview area to the default view Zoom to fit all objects into the preview area Display the current color selected in the preview area If all colors are selected the box will be crossed out Click this button to toggle the preview to display the selected objects only or the entire design Mie e e Cutting your Design Page 233 Cut Plot Dialog Panel Tab Jobs that are bigger than the media size should be tiled before output oy Cutter COM1 zi Sea eS Properties Zy General Panel Advanced Panel size Span 3 Panel Group Box tO eosin H I or00 Tile Total tiles 6 Tile Group Box Efan Overlap Overlap Group Box CH ME 0 200in Panel tools maa Zoom tools _____ walala Al colors 18 036 2 148 Done The panel can be divided in several columns and rows Each se
83. 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Color Mode and then select the new color mode Making a Bitmap Transparent It is possible to set one of the colors in a bitmap to be transparent This allows part of the bitmap image to appear to be floating in the design without the A outline of the bitmap aN ch ny a y a 4 avy A P x E A N To make a bitmap transparent 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu select Make Transparent 3 Move the wand over the bitmap and click on the color that you want to make transparent 4 To select all instances of the color that appear in the bitmap click Select Similar 5 Click Apply x Page 168 Working with Bitmaps Removing Transparency If you are getting unwanted outlines around your bitmap elements increase the Tolerance setting in DesignCentral To remove the transparency from a bitmap and make it opaque again ie 2 3 Select the bitmap Select the Bitmap tab of DesignCentral es 1 tH let 200 196 pixels 114 KB 24 bits 72 x 72 PPI Embedded 3126 PPI V Proportional Make Opaque Click Make Opaque The Make Opaque button is only visible when a transparent bitmap is Using the Bitmap Toolbar All bitmap editing tools are located in the Bitmap Edit toolbar selected To display this toolbar Bitmap menu select Bitmap Edit Toolbar S
84. 23 EE 4 gp Page 24 Meter Paste Select Tool Show Fills Text Tool Tip of the Day Zoom These preferences allow you to specify the colorimeter used in your software to measure color values and the port where the measurement device is connected For more information about how to use the measurement device see Defining New Colors Using the Color Specs Dialog on page 87 and Modifying Existing Color Libraries Windows Only on page 93 These preferences allow you to specify if the copied objects will be automatically created when pasted and the offset distance from the original object See Duplicating Objects Using Copy and Paste on page 64 for more information These preferences allow you to specify how the objects will be selected See Selecting Objects Using Select Tool on page 55 for more information These preferences allow you to specify how the paths are displayed when the Show Fill option is off See Showing Object s Fill on page 15 for more details Sets several aspects of the text tool See Text Preferences on page 138 for more information Displays a tip when you start your software Selects if the zoom and pan tool will be used only once See Zooming and Panning on page 13 for more information Getting Started Macintosh User Interface Features The following section lists features of the Macintosh user interface that are different than the
85. 3 Click the Move Character control point Selecting One Line 1 Select the text 2 Select the Character or Paragraph Tab in DesignCentral 3 Click the Line Spacing control point The baseline aaa to the layer color default is red ABCDE ABCDE EGE dEi All text selected Second line selected ABCDE ABCDE EGE FORN KLMNO ne character selected Multiple characters selected Changing Text Attributes All fonts in your system are available for selection In addition special fonts installed into your software folder are available These fonts include URW Casfonts and FSfonts To change the font in existing text 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Font and then select the desired font type from the menu If the desired font is not visible in the menu click More at the top of the menu To change the font and other attributes using DesignCentral Page 128 Working with Text 1 Select the text 2 Click the Character Tab in DesignCentral 3 Change the attribute While you scroll the font list you will see a preview using the font that is highlighted Before the font name an icon indicates the font type F TrueType Fonts F Casfonts Adobe Type 1 Fonts uw URW Fonts F FSfonts Changing Default Text Settings All new text created uses the default font setting To change the default font setting 1 Make sure no text is selected 2 Select the Text tool 3 Choose the default
86. 5 x or greater amp Service Pack 4 or higher Installation Procedures The software will not run without a hardware protection key also known as a dongle The hardware key protects the software from being unlawfully copied and must be connected to your computer whenever you use the software There are two types of hardware keys Parallel and USB keys Si USB key Parallel key Windows only The older Macintosh ADB key is no longer supported Installing the Software Page 1 Installing a Hardware Key 1 im e N Turn off your computer Plug the hardware key into the port USB or LPT Turn on your computer When using parallel port keys we recommend that you plug your output device and key into separate parallel ports Once the USB hardware key driver has been installed the driver will cause an LED built into the key to light The USB driver is installed automatically as part of the software installation Installing the Software Windows Follow these steps to install the software Oe ok ae mg co 11 12 13 14 If you re installing on a PC running Windows NT 2000 XP you must have Administrator privileges See your Windows user guide for details Insert the Installation CD Select a language and then click Next Enter your user number and password and then click Next The User number and password can be found on the product hardware key Select the product and language to be i
87. B input profile can be for either a monitor or a scanner If you scanned your image without color correcting it it is recommended to use the scanner profile as a RGB input profile If you have done any on screen color correction you should select your monitor profile as a RGB input profile Gray The Gray ICC input profile applies to all elements of a job that are in grayscale color mode This may refer to either a grayscale scanner or a grayscale monitor Check Use embedded ICC profile to force the RIP to use the input ICC Page 320 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager profile embedded in the file If Use CMYK Simulation is checked RGB images will be imported using the RGB input profile then converted to CMYK and reimported using the CMYK input profile Adding ICC Profiles from Other Sources To add an ICC input profile from another source choose Add from the combo box Setting Rendering Intents Rendering intent specifies how a color space from the input file gets mapped to the color space of the output device For details on setting rendering intents see Selecting Rendering Intents page 220 Print Transparent as White If this box is checked transparent areas of the design or areas in which there are no objects will be printed in white instead of being left blank Setting Dither Options for Angled Screens The Angled Screens dialog displays the dither options that are available for angled screens To
88. Clicking this icon will show all objects in your For each color you can control the following properties Color Name The color name defined in the swatch table Color Mode The color mode can be RGB CMYK LAB HSV Spot or Duotone Spot colors have a small dot on the right side of the swatch Duotone colors have two dots on the right side of the swatch Page 88 Working with Color Process Color Spot Color a Duotone Color ze Color Values The color values for selected color The parameters vary according to the color mode selected Color Info The Vendor Type Part and Comments defined in the swatch table Use Color If this option is selected the settings from the color Management management system are used to print this color You can set a different Input Color Profile and Rendering Intent for each color Creating New Colors Using Color Specs 1 Click New 2 Select the table you want to add colors to from the list at the top of the dialog Change the color name and enter the values in Color Info 4 For each color you want to add do the following a Click New b Type aname for the color under Name c Select the color Mode 3 Ifyou are creating a spot color select RGB color mode first and enter the RGB values that will be used to display the spot color Then change the color mode to Spot d Specify the color values by entering them in the fields to the right or by clicking in the color bar undernea
89. Cutter _ Properties Black Dano job Holding ies e Advanced Displays the Setup Properties aaa Switches to Active jobs for this device Production Cutting your Design Page 229 Cut Plot Dialog General Tab The General tab allows you to specify the size of media size of the job and the location of your output on the media Cutter COM1 zi Status ooo Properties yl General Panel Advanced Material r 51 000 600 0 Material Group box Bi aa 51 000in cape Preview Area TU Color Sending Mode ISendnow Palette Position E e 0 000in Position Group box ie m C3 m Size e 20 200in H Size Group box t osen A g ooo e Copies Copies Group box Go fi GaP 0 1 00in FFF FFF y e efje Positioning tools Zoom tools Ly al AEJ All colors 18 036 2 148 Done You can resize the Cut Plot dialog by clicking and dragging the lower right corner Sending Mode The Send List allows you to select what to do with the job once it arrives in the Production Manager queue Send now The job is automatically processed and sent to the output device Hold in list The job stays in the Production Manager queue until it is manually sent to the output device from the Production Manager window Save to file The job is processed and saved as a native file The Send Now mode is not available if the out
90. Design Page 257 6 Print your design 7 Cut the contour cut Setting Contour Cut Options When a print job containing one or more contour cuts is opened in the RIP and Print dialog you can set the cutting options for the contour cuts in the Contour Options dialog To access the Contour Options dialog click on the Contour button on the Advanced tab of the RIP and Print dialog If you have not yet set up your vinyl cutter you will be prompted to add a setup before you can access the Contour Options dialog Cx 300 COM1 Material 29 020984170n gt ey One set for all copies Number of passes fi I Advance after plot P Auto weld T Cut page crossings Weed border Optimize cutting order 10 000in Cutter Driver Options Send As separate jobs The following options can be selected HS 15 Plus COM1 The cutter that will be used to cut the contour User detined Media size d omn Material width i E0 000in Material height pia Poll Size polls the size of the media loaded in the cutter This feature only works for devices that are capable of two way communication such as serial or USB devices Page 258 Printing your Design Registration mark One set for all copies Advance after plot Cut page crossings Optimize cutting order Auto weld L Select the type of registration mark to help you align the printed media
91. EE SA EAE EE tai 347 Contents Page v Page vi License Agreementinstalling the Software Software License Agreement Carefully read the following terms and conditions sign and return as accepting these terms and conditions This is a legal agreement between you the end user either an individual or an entity and Scanvec Amiable Inc If you do not agree with the following you should promptly return the package Use of this program indicates your acceptance of the terms and conditions stated below The enclosed computer program Software is licensed not sold to you by Scanvec Amiable Inc for use on a non exclusive non transferable basis only under the following terms and Scanvec Amiable Inc reserves any rights not expressly granted to you You may not disclose to any third party any confidential information concerning the Software or Scanvec Amiable Inc or use such confidential information to the detriment of Scanvec Amiable Inc 1 License This software is protected by the United States Copyright Law and International Treaty Provisions Therefore you must treat the Software just as you would any other copyrighted material such as a book This license allows you to a Make one copy of the Software in machine readable form provided that such a copy of the original may be used solely for backup purposes As an express condition of this License you must reproduce on each copy of the Scanvec Amiable Inc copy
92. ICEIINGS ceeeeeeeeee seers 12 test jobs cceeeeeeeeeeeees 278 hardware key ccccseeeeeees 2 TINO nate E E 282 over a local area network 4 UN NESTING cccceeeeeeees 279 holding printed jobs 304 Jobs folder n a 269 hybrid deviCeS 00060 260 ON Dah S enan 159 ICC profiles join together cccce 132 ala Eilao athe ern cnet 321 KEINO cot sett cean a reed dacane 130 embedded 164 321 keyboard shortcuts 345 OXPOMTING cccceeeeeee ees 292 KF diffusion ccseeeeeee eens 306 IMPOFtiNg eeceeeee eens 292 labels wi cece ettea cots 216 311 setting input profiles 320 ASSO TOO cccceeeeeeeeee eens 170 Page 350 Index JAY CFS nnti TAa 49 convert to paths 146 layout PreVieW cceee 298 converting to underbase 205 lens effect cceeeeeeseees 202 CODVING nerona 64 license agreement vii deleting lt neck ceeienend 77 linearization 308 deskewing cceeeeeeeeee ees 63 linked files 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 30 distributing ceeeeeee eee eees 74 locking Objects c00 71 duplicating ccceeeeeeees 65 JOG MNES aa 294 filtering LPR settings 0000008 274 DY COlOh action case 18 LX diffusion ue cocdsceeesceeecedcn 307 GROUPING mesdren 68 Macintosh installation 3 LOCKING sa 71 Macintosh uninstall
93. If checked supercell halftoning will be used Halftoning Supercell halftoning produces halftones that have four times the shades of gray at the same resolution compared to standard algorithms This creates smoother images when printing angled screens However the amount of processing needed to generate halftones is increased Setting Cutter Driver Options The Cutter Driver Options allow you to control the parameters of operation of your output device such as cut speed pressure and execute common tasks roll forward roll backward go to origin from your computer es A en Before Job After Job Macro Before Job After Job Macro Before Job After Job Macro sasis o Delete Save Reset Delete Save Reset Cancel Before Job Tab After Job Tab Macro Tab Cancel ely The settings available in the Cutter Driver Options vary according to your output device Each command has a checkbox to enable or disable it When enabled you can change the value and the command will be sent to the output device overriding the settings in the output device When the option is unchecked the settings from the output device are used Save Saves the changes you made as a new command Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 323 Delete Reset Before Job Cut Fast Medium Slow None Pressure Force Speed Tool After Job Cut Media Auto Cut Macro Initialize Roll Fo
94. LE object 2 From the Edit menu point to Object and then click Edit or Open When you select Edit the program associated with the OLE object will start in a window inside your document and will be finished after the edition If you choose Open a full instance of the program will start and you may leave this application running even after editing the OLE object Double clicking the OLE object has the same effect as Edit command Converting OLE Objects You can convert OLE objects to another format 1 Select the OLE object 2 From the Edit menu point to Object and then click Convert 3 Select the new format from the list 4 Click OK You can also convert OLE objects to basic segments and bitmaps 1 Select the OLE object 2 From the Arrange menu select Convert Linked to Native Changing Linking Properties of OLE Objects 1 From the Edit menu select Link 2 Change the following linking options Automatic By default linked objects are set for Automatic updating Manual This means that your software automatically updates the linked information every time you open the document or any time the linked file changes when the document is open Select Manual to update the object in your document only when you choose to manually update it Update Now When in Manual mode click this button to updates the OLE object in your document to reflect the situation of Page 32 Working with Files the original file
95. Lower numbers will create Opacity MA transparent strokes 100 NL NOS 75 NO gt e 50 NLB _ 25 a gt To draw a line using the Pencil tool Paintbrush tab 1 Select the bitmap 2 Select the Pencil tool 3 Select the foreground color you want to draw in 4 Click and drag inside the marquee Using the Crop Tool The Crop tool allows you to select part of a bitmap and delete the rest of it To crop a bitmap 1 Select the bitmap 2 Select the Crop tool a 3 Click and drag the cursor over the bitmap to create a rectangular marquee Holding the SHIFT key while dragging creates a square marquee Page 174 Working with Bitmaps The marquee selection for the Crop tool must be a simple rectangle or square You cannot use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to create a more complex marquee with the Crop tool 4 Adjust the width and height values of the marquee in DesignCentral You can also adjust the cropping size by dragging the marquee s borders and corners 5 Click and drag a point inside the marquee to move it to a new position 6 Click Apply or double click inside the marquee to crop the bitmap to the selected size Original image with a cropping Cropped Image marquee DesignCentral for Crop Using the Fill Tool The Fill tool fills areas of a bitmap with the foreground color To use the Fill tool 1 Select the Fill tool 22 2 Adjust the values in DesignCentral
96. Page 113 Arrow You can drag the following points on an Arrow shape Length Rotate S Cap Length Wing Angle Tail Width Hold the SHIFT key while dragging the Rotate control point to constrain the angle Advanced Border You can drag the following points on an Advanced Border O E Size Page 114 Working With Shapes Converting Objects to Shapes The Convert To Shape command is used to convert objects to shapes You can quickly convert the traced artwork to the desired shape then edit the shape Original artwork oO o Q O O w amp k Akk K S a Ci QR Q To t T g c o aan Q w ke A k k k T F RQ 3 k k k A G OC PT GR amp wey KW k k oP O G Oo w ke OK OK OO a Q oC g k r ke amp o i G oY wk ey KR Kk am Q C o Q ka Ai ob Ww Ww o w K sad Converting into Starbursts wow ke k k amp woe k we amp o Ronen sie ee saeia C Converting into Rectangles To convert an object into a shape 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Convert to Shape and then select the new shape Working With Shapes Page 115 Page 116 Working With Shapes 11 Working with Text The software allows you to create text and change its appearance The following defines each text type and displays and example Horizontal Text The text follows a straight AB DEF horizo
97. Page 124 Working with Text selected line For path and arc text it will restore the text to its initial position For arc text SHIFT key while dragging adjusts the vertical offset of the select line For all other types of text SHIFT key while dragging moves the selected line left or right 2 Move Character Click this point to select one individual character After selecting one character you can change its attributes Drag this point to adjust the spacing between the selected character and the previous one All characters to the right of the selected character are also repositioned CTRL key while dragging moves only the selected character and leaves the remaining text in place SHIFT key while dragging moves the selected character up or down 3 Rotate Character Drag this point located in the upper right corner of each character to rotate an individual character SHIFT key while dragging rotates the character in increments See Preferences General Tab on page 22 about how to set the increment angle CTRL key while dragging restores the character to its default position 4 Tracking Drag this point to adjust the tracking of the selected text The tracking is adjusted equally for all characters and between all words CTRL key while dragging changes tracking between words 5 Line Spacing Drag this point to produce equal spacing between lines 6 Block Size Drag this point to restrict the text b
98. Page 287 Removing All Tiling and Cropping To remove all tiling and cropping and make the job one piece again click on the Reset button If the job is bigger than the media it will still be tiled to fit the media Using the Color Profiler For instructions on using the Color Profiler module consult the Color Profiler PDF in the Readme folder on your Installation CD Using Custom Color Mapping Custom Color Mapping allows you to map spot colors to exact output values for your specific output device Mapped colors will always print out using the output values set in the Custom Color Mapping module overriding any other color management settings If you have mapped a custom color but don t want to use that particular color mapping for a particular job you have two choices turn off all custom color mapping or delete the color mapping for that particular color Custom color mapping obeys the following rules e Each custom color mapping applies to a single color mode ona single output device If you want to map the same custom color to multiple color modes you must make multiple custom color mappings one for each color mode e Custom color mapping is only applied to jobs in a vector format such as EPS or PostScript It does not affect bitmaps or JPEGs e Custom color mapping is only applied to jobs that are added directly to Production Manager Jobs that are sent from Flexi will not have color mapping applied to them e Cus
99. Properties in Production Manager Page 319 Setting Advanced Color Correction Properties To edit the advanced color correction properties for a job 1 Open the job properties for that job 2 Select the Color Management tab 3 Click on the Advanced button Input ICC profiles AGE Adobe AGB 1998 7 Gray U S Web Coated SWOP v2 be W Use embedded ICC profile l Use CMYK simulation Rendering intent ChE Others Bitmap Perceptual Perceptual Pure Hue Vector Relative colorimetric 7 Relative colorimetric Pure Hue Text Relative colorimetric Relative colorimetric Fure Hue Gradient Felative calorimetric Relative calorimetric Pure Hue Print transparent as white Setting ICC Input Profiles Select the ICC input profile to use to convert the image into a neutral color space There are three types of ICC input profiles that can be specified CMYK The CMYK input profile applies to all elements of a job that are in CMYK color mode If your image is in CMYK color mode then your file was previously separated for output to a specific output device Whenever is possible use the profile used for separation in your design application as the CMYK input profile Try using similar profiles for common ink sets such as CMYK SWOP or High End SWOP if you don t have the matching profile RGB The RGB ICC input profile applies to all elements of a job that are in RGB color mode An RG
100. RIP Diffusion time It takes 2 3 times longer than FMXPress Page 306 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Smooth blends Perform color correction Output profile Properties Advanced Color Management System FMXPress The default diffusion method It s the fastest in terms of RIP time and is suitable for most prints LX Diffusion A faster option as far as RIP times are concerned It s a good choice for large prints that will be viewed from a considerable distance Angled Designed for use with thermal printers to Screen produce vibrant saturated colors This is also used to produce screen print positives Click Screen to set advanced options See Setting Dither Options for Angled Screens page 321 for details Select Normal Enhanced or Super The higher settings cause the software to render gradients using more elaborate algorithms that produce smoother dithering Checking this option activates the color correction settings If this setting is not checked incoming jobs are assumed to have already color corrected in the design application If color correction is off the software will use a generic CMYK profile instead of a profile generated from actual color measurements of output from the device Orange and green inks will not be used Once the image is in a neutral color space the output profile is used to convert the image into the color space of the output device Select the ICC
101. RL e key pressed pressed Resizing to the Same Size Selected objects may be formatted to have the same height and width 1 Select the objects If you select the objects by dragging a bounding box the size of the first object is used as a reference If you select the objects by clicking them with the SHIFT key pressed the size of the first selected object is used as a reference 2 From the Arrange menu point to Sizing and select either Same Width or Same Height Moving Objects You can move objects using one of the following methods Moving Objects by Dragging 1 Select the objects 2 Place the cursor over the object When the Show Fills is disabled placing the cursor inside the object does not change to move mode You must place the cursor over the outline of the object 3 Click and drag to move the object to a new position e CTRL key while dragging creates a copy of the original object e SHIFT key while dragging constrains the new position Page 60 Arranging Objects Moving Objects Using DesignCentral Use DesignCentral when you have to move the objects to a precise position 1 Select the objects DesignCentral displays the Size Tab 2 Adjust the X Y values in DesignCentral me 12 009 New horizontal position of the selected objects Y 13cm New vertical position of the selected objects The point where the X Y coordinates will refer in above fields EEE Rotating Shearing and Mirroring Ob
102. S Fonts o All other lines are font entries Each font entry is on its own line A font entry consists of the name of the font exactly as it appears in Inspire or CASmate followed by an equal sign Font entries are case sensitive The following is an example of a casfopen st file cas Fonts Eng_Tulip4 l Eng_Glacis41 Eng_PaIlm Eng_Almond Eng_script E Iris Iris LZR Normal Block 1 Line E E E Roman Double Line E cursive 1 Line E DOUBLE LINE CONNECTING SCRIPT E E 4 LINE HELVETICA HELVETICA REGULAR 1983 Modifying the Fonts in Use The software allows you to determine which of the fonts on your system will be loaded when the software starts up To modify the selection of fonts the software will load from the Text menu select Font then Modify Removed fonts Selected fonts lt Remove T Arial CYR T Arial Greek T Arial Narrow F Arial TUR AvantGarde Bk BT T AvantGarde Md BT F Avanti 1 F Baha 1 Th BankGothicMdBT ZI lt Remove All Lorem ipsu Edit Sample OK Cancel A piece of sample text in the selected font is displayed at the bottom of the dialog To unload a font select it in the Selected Fonts list and click Remove Working with Text Page 141 To load a font select it in the Removed Fonts list and click Add To unload all fonts click Remove All To add all fonts click Add All To apply the selected font to the current text object cli
103. Sherpa Plus CalComp Canon Desktop Printer DG zi Vinyl cutters Color printers Hybrid devices Cancel 2 Select the type of device being set up Select the Manufacturer and Model Name of the output device from the list 4 Click Next Setup name BESPMESNI eae lt Back Cancel 5 Edit the Setup name of the device 6 Click Next Page 270 Using Production Manager 7 Select the Port the output device uses for communication If necessary edit the communications settings for the chosen port See Editing Setup Properties page 272 for details on the communications settings If TCP IP is available for the network output device use TCP IP If not you should choose LPR or FTP 8 Click Finish Setting Up Desktop Printers as Output Devices To set up a conventional printer as an output device 1 Add the printer to the computer as a standard Windows printer 2 When creating the setup in the software select Desktop Printer under Manufacturer then select the print queue for the desktop printer under Model name and click Next The Port list will be disabled 3 Click Finish Selecting a Setup To select a setup highlight its icon in the setup area Only one device can be selected at any time Activating Setups An active setup is a setup that is ready to output jobs To make a setup active do one of the following e Check the box next to its icon in the setup area e
104. Software or Coded Font Programs Licensee agrees that it will not export or re export the Software or Coded Font Programs in any form without the appropriate United States and foreign government licenses Licensee agrees that its obligations pursuant to this section shall survive and continue after any termination or expiration of rights under this Agreement 7 The Software licensed hereunder may be used to generate screen displays on a single Computer System having a screen resolution of less than 150 dots per inch and to generate output on the associated output device Licensee agrees not to make use of the Software directly or indirectly i to generate bitmap images on a screen display with a resolution of 150 dots per inch or greater ii to generate Typefaces for use other than with the Computer System or iii to generate printed output on other than an output device that Licensor has designated to be approved for use with the Software on the Computer System Any failure of Licensee to comply with this provision is a material breach of this End User Agreement 8 NEITHER LICENSOR NOR ANY OF ITS REPRESENTATIVES MAKES OR PASSES ON TO LICENSEE OR OTHER THIRD PARTY ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION ON BEHALF OF LICENSOR S THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS 9 Licensee is hereby notified that Adobe Systems Incorporated a California corporation located at 345 Park Avenue San Jose CA 95110 2704 Adobe is a third party beneficiary to this Agreement to th
105. Status Printer ee i Monopoly1fib Holding Displays General Panel Advanced Color the Setup Properties ae Tabs Switches to Active jobs for this device Production Manager Printing your Design Page 243 RIP and Print Dialog General Tab The General tab allows you to specify the size of media size of the job and the location of your output on the media DesignJet 800 42 LPT1 gt Job Cen General Panel Advanced Color Material e ee ee Se a2incot SN amp a2 000i tH 600 000in gt Send now Preview Area Position e 0 000in Ga 0 000in Material Group box Sending Mode Position Group box Size bad 25 540in 4 22 67 4in Size Group box Copies m oo ft GaP 0 100in T Automatic tile flip o l FIE Copies Group box JLL Automatic tile flip Positioning tools Zoom tools You can resize the RIP and Print dialog by clicking and dragging the lower right corner Sending Mode The Send List allows you to select what to do with the job once it arrives in the Production Manager queue Send now The job is automatically processed and sent to the output device Hold in list The job stays in the Production Manager queue until it is manually sent from Production Manager Save to file The job is processed and saved as native file prt files The Send Now mode is not available if
106. Table of Contents 1 Installing the Software cccssssseeeesseesesssseeeeeseeeeeenneeees 1 Recommended System Requirements ccccccceeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeaes 1 Installation Procedures cccccccssseeeeecseeeeceecaeeeeeeeesaaeeeesssaaeeeeseaas 1 Using a Hardware Key Over a Local Area Network ccc0esseees 4 Using Prererence Manager esie asia sac acaaibcetd alata aisles 5 PESSWOlOHNSUANCH sitetrtatedsccteced E ae e 6 2 Getting Stane dsa aa E 7 Basic Elements of your Software ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeceaeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeees 7 Changing the VieW cerren a a a AE 13 Tracking your St PS cccccccsseeeecceceeeceeeeeceeeeseeaeeseeeeeeeessaeaeeeeeees 19 USNO WOKS PACOS eisa a E E 20 Entering Numerical Values cccccseeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeas 20 SEWING PIEGIEKENC CS in ra A E 22 Macintosh User Interface Features cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 25 GOT Help emea a a R een ae oe tee 25 Exiting ING SONWale ia ise eset eee ale cave Ge ie ia cele 26 3 Working with PINGS soceseciiecicecasicoivetuciesseccteidvehecanedscciveiseviiins 27 Creating New DOCUMENIS ceeccccceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeees 27 Opening Files aeoe aE E E NE 27 Mporing Fle Sassarin ana E aa tenet erkines Bont 28 SAVING DocuUmen Seen a a a aa 28 EXMOMIAG O Flle Sata cee cne es tate eee ned ent ctaemueseeaeee ees ead 28 Emailing a Job Windows Only cccccseeeee
107. Working with Bitmaps Page 183 e Click the bitmap to trace one object e Click with the CTRL key pressed to trace all of the bitmap The objects created by the autotracing will be all wireframes To fill those objects you have to select and compound them Fa bbs Tracing one object using Click Tracing part of the bitmap using Click and Drag For best results scan the image to be traced in grayscale 256 gray at 300 600 DPI Tracing images scanned at high resolution will create extra points when traced and the paths will not be smooth Using Centerline Tracing The Centerline tool traces a single line down the middle of each part of a bitmap and includes an option to outline any areas that are wider than a specified width This tool is useful for producing neon patterns routing and engraving paths Only black and white bitmaps can be traced using Centerline trace a SS rT 7 na See Paths created in Centerline tracing DesignCentral has an Autotrace Tab with all the options described for the Autotrace tool and a Centerline Tab with the following options Steps Minimum size to be outlined Close Paths Creates a separate closed shape in each fully enclosed area Outline large When this option is checked larger objects will be traced objects with an outline instead of a centerline Color The color of the resulting ve
108. a value is set to 10 and you enter 90 the new value will be 9 Simple Arithmetic Operators If you enter a simple arithmetic expression the software will calculate the result of the expression and enter that value in the field The available arithmetic operators in order of precedence are Getting Started Page 21 Division Multiplication Addition Subtraction For example if you enter 1 8 the value 0 125 will be calculated Operator precedence determines the order in which the arithmetic operations will be calculated when more than one operation is specified In the previous list operators are listed from top to bottom in order of operator precedence For instance if you enter 6 2 3 the software will calculate 6 2 first then multiply the result by 3 yielding a result of 9 Automatic Application of Entered Values and Arithmetic Once you enter a numerical value ratio or arithmetic expression in a numerical field the software will automatically apply that value after a brief delay You can also press TAB to apply the value immediately Avoid pressing ENTER as it will trigger the OK button and close the dialog Setting Preferences Many aspects of your software may be saved so that they are set up the way you like every time you open a new file These settings are known as program preferences There are other settings that are saved on a document basis Which means that each time you open or save a docu
109. ach job is saved to a file Use custom If checked enter the file extension you extension want to use for the output file in the space provided Default The default folder in which output files Location will be placed Click Browse to select a folder SCSI Use this port if your output device supports SCSI connection Folder Outputs to a file in the specified folder using a naming convention specific to the output device COM Serial communications port This port is only supported by cutters In addition to the standard serial port controls for bits per second data bits parity stop bits and hardware software flow control there are checkboxes which enable disable the following wires DTR Data Terminal Ready Using Production Manager Page 275 DSR Data Set Ready RTS Request To Send CTS Clear To Send DCD Data Carrier Detect Automatic Nesting Tab gE The Automatic Nesting tab allows you to set the automatic nesting options for the software See Nesting Jobs page 279 for details Working with Jobs Jobs can be added deleted or have their properties changed while they are in the Production Manager queue Adding New Jobs Jobs can be sent to the software in a number of different ways Adding Jobs from a File To add a file as a new job 1 Select the setup you want to use to print the file 2 From the File menu select Add Job 3 Select the file to be added and click Open See Appendix A for the list of supporte
110. age file it is recommended for color printing PostScript files often contain an optional preview graphic When you link or embed a PostScript file the preview graphic will be displayed in your document If the PostScript file does not contain a preview a X will be displayed instead Document PostScript File With Preview Fmbedded PostScript Bitmap PostScript File Without Preview Embedded Linked Postscript PostScript Embedded PostScript files will automatically be converted into the equivalent drawing objects from the software at which point they can be displayed and edited like any other object Embedding Linked PostScript Files To read in and parse a linked PostScript file so that it becomes an embedded file 1 Select the preview of the linked PostScript file 2 Select the PostScript tab in DesignCentral 3 Click Parse Page 30 Working with Files Using OLE Objects Windows Only The OLE Object Linking and Embedding feature of Windows allows you to import objects that were created using other software installed on your computer such as spreadsheet and word processors Inserting OLE Objects 1 From the Edit menu select Insert New Object 2 Select the type of object you want to create Only programs that are installed on your computer that support OLE appear in the list 3 Select Create New option to create a new OLE object using the selected application Check Di
111. ailable font types and a styles The font style list will be disabled if the font has only one style available To change the fonts currently in use select Modify from the font list See Modifying the Fonts in Use page 141 for details TA 4 000cm Height of the selected text The height is the height of a reference character by default X See Text Preferences on page 138 about how to change the reference character A fow Width of the selected text The width can be displayed in units in cm mm or as a percentage of the original character width See Text Preferences on page 138 about how to change the display mode 24 pr Slant of the selected text AJ w Orientation of the selected text Click to rotate the characters 90 degrees ab 0 000cm Spacing between characters also known as Horizontal Text Tracking The tracking can be displayed in units in cm a tb o 000em z mm or as a percentage See Text Vertical Text Preferences on page 138 about how to change the display mode 0 000 is the default value for the units mode Wider spacing may be achieved by selecting positive values The default value for percentage is 100 Values above 100 will produce wider spacing Working with Text Page 121 rah i 2 000 m Amount of spacing between lines of text Horizontal Text Click the button on the right side of this field to ag s select between Automatic and Speci
112. al tab contains general General Ink Limit GCR Data Advanced info ation abo ut the ICC profi le Filename CMYK High Gloss Photo Normal icm and its creation Ink Media Author Comments v 4 Resolution 300 DPI Dither type FMXPress Number of swatches 79 Last modified 6 27 2003 3 16 PM Filename The filename for the linearization curve file Ink The type of inks used Media The media used Author The author of the ICC Profile Comments Any additional comments Ink Limit Tab CS The Ink Limit tab displays the General Ink Limit GCR Data Advanced multi ink limits that have been set for the ICC profile aR If desired edit the values in the aes 2x fields Yellow 2x 100 Click Restore Defaults to return Black 3x 100 the settings to their default values Restore Defaults Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 325 GCR Tab The GCR tab displays the Gray Component Replacement options In theory cyan magenta and yellow mixed together should produce black In practice mixing CMY together produces a muddy dark gray In addition CMY black tends to oversaturate the print medium because it requires coverage from all three inks The solution is to use the CMYK color model which adds a true black that replaces CMY The CMYK model reduces oversaturation produces better blacks and requires less ink General Ink Limit GCR Data Adva
113. al width o 600 000in Material height Position Settings The Position group box allows you to specify where on the media the job is output 0 000in Horizontal offset distance ra 0 000in Vertical offset distance Ea Interactive moves the cutter as you change the position of the job on the preview area o Show me draws a bounding box of the job without lowering the tool You can also positioning the job by clicking and dragging 1 Choose Select tool from the toolbar of Cut Plot dialog kl 2 Click and drag the preview to a new position i A 1s mee Cutting your Design Page 231 Size Settings The Size group box allows you to change the size of your output 20 200in Width of the output t 20862in Height of the output HA pooo Scale ratio Copies Settings The Copies group box allows you to set the number of copies and the spacing between them Ao f The number of copies qf 0 100in The amount of space between the copies Copy Spacing The copies are automatically positioned to optimize the media fy Git usage The Positioning tools allow you to rotate mirror or position the job Positioning Tools The job is placed at specified distances from ra the right edge and the leading edge of the media ro The job is centered on the leading edge of the d media z The job is centered in the length and
114. ally turned on whenever color separations are output Color swatches for each color of ink will be printed around the job Overlap marks will be printed indicating how the tiles of a tiled job should overlap Color swatches containing blended CMY colors and a gray scale will be printed around the job Marks will be printed at the corners of the job indicating its outside margins A border will be printed around the outside edge of the job Check to print lines on tiles indicating where the edge of each overlap is These can then be used to align the tiles If On both tiles is checked the overlap lines will appear on both tiles If not the overlap line will only appear on the second tile o EEEEEEEE Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Print color Check to print color bands at the bands positions selected i Color Adjustment alalla e S 2 Tab The Color Adjustment tab Channel Cyan Output 0 000 provides some basic tools to 100 manually adjust the output color CATETER g Each color channel is listed SESESSEEEE 2 separately as a linearization 70 curve that determines what ee 60 ji percentage of coverage will be ee used output for a specified percentage in the original image ttt tT Ta input TARTEETAN Aah tar ame Preview Check to see the changes in your color settings reflected i
115. and moving the wheel up and down zooms the view in and out Using Scroll bars Scroll bars are horizontal and vertical bars located in the bottom and right side of your design area Use them to scroll the design area Click the arrows on both sides to scroll the design area in small increments Click the blank area to move the design area in large increments Click and drag to scroll the design area Getting Started Page 13 Zooming and Panning The Zoom tools changes the magnification of items within the document to allow you to see more or less detail This does not change the output size Magnifies the center of the view to twice the size of current view Magnifies the center of the view to half the size of current view Adjust the view size to fit the design area size Switches the view to previous magnification Adjusts the view size to fit the selected objects When there are no objects selected this button is disabled Adjusts the view size to fit all existing objects When there are no objects in the design this button is disabled Select this tool and click and drag inside the design area to pan the view position Select this tool and Click to zoom in at twice the magnification of the current view The point you click on will become the center of the view Hold CTRL and click to zoom out to half the magnification of the current view The point you click on will become the center of the view Click and d
116. and set the overlap between the tiles Print tiled pages When this option is checked the output will be tiled Overlap Sets the overlap between the tiles ee es Original Design Tiled output Setting the Output Position The Position option allows you to center the image or to set the position Center on paper The output is centered on the page Offset X Y Sets the offset from the edge of the paper Other Printing Options Print border The border of the design area is printed Printing to a Desktop Printer Page 227 Print wireframe Include job info Print selection only Use device margins Ignore overprint PostScript data Optimized Printing The vector objects are printed without fill The Job Info is printed with the design This option is only available if Fit drawing to paper is selected in Scale option To customize the layout of the print see Using Templates on page 38 Only the selected portions of the design will be output The margin information from the printer driver is used Any overprinting that was set up in the design stage will be ignored This can be useful if you want to save the time and output media needed to do overprinting 3 If you check Ignore Overprint your output will automatically be changed so that it will not use features that depend on overprinting For instance output that had been set up to use color trapping will now output untra
117. aps There are several ways to include a bitmap into a document Page 164 Working with Bitmaps Importing Bitmaps You can open or import a bitmap files into your document 1 From the File menu select Open or Import 2 Select the bitmap file from the list and click Open or Import When importing a bitmap you can create a link between the original bitmap file and your document This link is an electronic connection between the files and every time that the document is open the linked bitmaps will be imported To create a link check the Link option in the import dialog box Exporting Bitmaps Any bitmap from your document can be exported into a file 1 Ifyou want to export only one bitmap from your document select it 2 From the File menu select Export 3 Select the file format from the list and type the file name 4 If you are exporting only a selected object be sure to check the Selection only option Checking Suppress Option will export the bitmap using the default settings for the bitmap file format 5 Click Export Scanning Bitmaps Scanning allows you to convert a printed image into an electronic image To scan an image you must have a scanner and a computer with your scanners TWAIN 32 driver installed TWAIN 32 is a cross platform interface for acquiring images captured by scanners and digital cameras The manufacturer of the scanner device must provide a proper driver for your device Instructions for se
118. art and end points over the path and the Direction Handles to adjust the shape of the curved segment Hold the SHIFT key while dragging the direction handles to constrain the dragging to the original direction of the handles Hold the TAB key to change which side of the path will be kept Click Apply YJ or double click anywhere inside the design area Converting Segment to Smooth Arc The Optimize by Smooth Arc tool creates an arc segment between two points in a path 1 2 3 4 op Select the Optimize by Smooth Arc tool amp Click the point where the arc will begin Click the point where the arc will end Drag the start and end points over the path and the center of the arc to adjust the shape of the arc You can also enter the Diameter value in DesignCentral Click the TAB key to change the arc position Press TAB to select the direction of Optimized path the arc Click Apply YJ or double click anywhere inside the design area Working with Paths Page 155 Converting Segment to 3 Point Arc The Optimize 3 Point Arc tool creates a semicircle between two points on a path 1 Select Optimize by 3 Point Arc tool Ga 2 Click the point where the arc will begin 3 Click the point where the arc will end 4 Drag the start end and the third control point in the arc to adjust the shape of the arc Press the TAB key to change the arc position 5 Click Apply or double click anywhere inside the design area po
119. atch table On the Label tab select the font that will be used for the labels Working with Color Page 95 Advanced Settings for Current Palette Swatch Tables Ooo O Color Label All Colors Salmon Pink S Munung S Wr E Rust Orange Manilla Yellow 8 PB Go B Yellow gt Select All Clear All Cancel On the Color tab toggle the icon to the left of the spot color listings to determine whether the color will show up in the swatch table z On the Label tab select the font that will be used for the labels The color will appear in the The color will not appear in the swatch table swatch table Page 96 Working with Color 9 Using Fill Stroke Editor Fill Stroke Editor shows information about how an object is filled and its stroke Displaying Fill Stroke Editor The Fill Stroke Editor Ti OO OE consists of two screens the amp gf Fill Tab and Stroke Tab soia ee To view the Fill Stroke Red A imn Editor from the View menu a A hoo select Fill Stroke Editor E A ica E Advanced Fill Stroke Editor Fill Tab M Transform Clea Fill Stroke Editor Stroke Tab Types of Fills Vector objects can have the following types of fill No Fill The object has no fill Solid Fill The object is filled with one solid color Pattern Fill The object is filled with multiple copies of a pattern Gradient Fill T
120. ate color will update the process colors based on the swatch chosen Modifying a Custom Color Mapping To modify a custom color mapping 1 Select the output device from the Printer Name list 2 Select the color mode associated with the color mapping from the Color Mode list 3 Click on the Modify button in the Custom Color Mapping toolbar 4 Adjust the color mapping as desired 5 When finished click on the OK button Importing the Custom Colors from a Print Job The software can import all of the custom colors specified in a PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript file To import the custom color definitions from a file 1 Click on the Import button in the Custom Mapping toolbar 2 Select the file to import from and click on the OK button Printing Custom Colors To print out a table of all the custom colors that have been specified for the selected color mode click on the Print Custom Colors button in the Custom Mapping toolbar vay Deleting a Custom Color Mapping To delete a custom color 1 Select the custom color from the list 2 Press the Delete key or click on the Delete button in the toolbar Using Global Color Mapping The Global Color Mapping module allows you to map the colors in your job using LAB color space a device independent color space Global color mapping obeys the following rules e Global color mapping will only be applied to jobs that are added directly to Production Manager Jobs sent
121. ault Using Manual Kerning Sometimes you only need to adjust the kerning between a single set of characters To change the kerning of all text 1 Select the text 2 Change the value of the Tracking field on the DesignCentral Character Tab To change the kerning between two characters 1 Click the Text tool between two characters 2 Adjust the kerning by changing the value of the Tracking field on DesignCentral Character Tab CTRL and right arrow left arrow keys narrows or widens the kerning Defining Kerning Instead of setting the kerning each time you create a design you can change the default kerning for a pair of characters for one font By setting up a table of kerning pairs for your frequently used fonts you can ensure that they will look right every time you use them The kerning specified here is used only by this program and will not affect or be used by other applications To define kerning for a specific set of characters 1 Select the text From the Text menu select Define Kerning Select where the kerning will be stored Selection only Kerning is used only for selected text In document Kerning is used for all text that is using this font and pair of characters for this file Working with Text Page 131 As default Kerning is used in all files In Define Kerning dialog box you can type a new pair of characters 4 Drag the character in Define Kerning dialog box or enter a value in Ke
122. b so that the job can be aligned in a cutter for virtual hybrid output Alignment marks will be printed along the lower horizontal edge of the job so that the job can be aligned in a cutter for virtual hybrid output Alignment marks will be printed outside the corners on the right hand vertical edge of the job so that the job can be aligned in a cutter for virtual hybrid output Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Horizontal Corner Mark Gerber Edge Gerber Edge Center Fargo Impressa Mimaki Mark OPOS Mark Crop Marks Alignment marks will be printed outside the corners on the lower horizontal edge of the job so that the job can be aligned in a cutter for virtual hybrid output Registration mark for virtual hybrid jobs using Gerber cutters Registration mark for virtual hybrid jobs using Gerber cutters Registration mark for hybrid jobs using Fargo Impressa cutters Registration mark for virtual hybrid jobs using Mimaki EX cutters Registration mark for virtual hybrid jobs using Summagraphics cutters Crop marks will be printed at the corners of the job to allow the job Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 313 Tile overlap lines Page 314 Standard Marks Swatch Overlap Marks Tonal Scale Margin Border Standard marks intended for aligning color separations Automatic
123. bjects Using DeSignEGitor cccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 Selecting ANOD ECIS o 57 Deselecting All OO CCIS annaa E 58 INVEHING SClOCHON 2mssi os aaciecekenc si eaten nhac 58 Arranging Objects wecssisceccsecceccecsacsseccdscedivocencvscececccteunvececees 59 RESIZING ODECI Sare a a a T el Gaeta 59 MOVING Objects cenn a ae a ea 60 Rotating Shearing and Mirroring Objects cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 DUPlIGATING OD CCS roiie e a EEO aR ES 63 Working with Auto Serialization cccccccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 67 Grouping ODICCIS irren a a S 68 Compounding ODJECE sirsie i a 69 Masking ODJECIS paseia a ES 70 HOCKING D COtS ina a EA 71 Changing Object Order ocer an a ened elie 72 Aligning ODJECtS noan a EE 73 Distributing OD CCS ss czcessceces ccacx severe sone s eeascsntanscess neqanseuineseomcancaaates 74 Snapping Objects cece ecccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeesssaeaeees 76 DGISTING OBEC zera Geeta cee aes O 77 Clear TiramStonm annone A e 78 Working with Color ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 79 Available Color Models nizina air 79 Working with Swatch Tables ccccccccccccsseseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeesaaees 80 Applying Colors Using the Color Mixer ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 84 Sampling Colors Using the Eyedroppet cccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 86 Defining Colors Using the Color Specs Dialog ccccccsseeee
124. ble when a bi directional communications protocol such as serial or USB is used a To indicate the position of the registration marks using Interactive alignment Press the arrows to move to the first point or enter the position of the first point and click OK Aa p 0 000inch E ba Y 0 000inch 4 Cancel i Use the arrow buttons to position the head of the cutting device over registration mark 1 and click OK Printing your Design Page 261 li Repeat for all additional registration marks b To indicate the position of the registration marks using Digital alignment Move tool to registration mark 1 Press ENTER on device when done P n Cancel i Use the front panel controls on the cutter to position the head of the cutting device over registration mark 1 Press Enter on the cutting device then click OK li Repeat for all additional registration marks Please put knife back in cutter and click OK to start cutting cne 5 Make sure the knife is loaded into the cutter then click OK to cut the contour portion of the design Page 262 Printing your Design 20 Setting up Production Manager Production Manager configures output devices such as cutters and printers controls the output of files and connects to the output device Production Manager automatically launches when you execute the Output command from your software You can also preview jobs in Production Manager and cha
125. button in DesignCentral to create a new path e To close the path place the cursor close to the starting point and click when the cursor shows a small circle underneath or press the Close Path button in DesignCentral e Press the DELETE key to delete the entire path Drawing Segments Using the Freehand Drawing Tool 1 Select Freehand Drawing tool ad 2 Adjust the Tolerance in DesignCentral The higher the tolerance value the smoother the path becomes aaa Tolerance 0 pixels Tolerance 10 pixels Tolerance 20 pixels 3 Click and drag to create the path Hold the SHIFT key to create a Straight line 4 While still creating the path if you press CTRL key and drag back and erase the path that you just created fs W i f 2 a ra A a 7 hi i Drawing a Freehand Path Erasing a Path 5 To close the path place the cursor close to the starting point and click Converting Objects into Paths Converts objects such as shapes and text into paths 1 Select the objects Page 146 Working with Paths 2 From the Arrange menu select Convert to Outlines If the objects have a stroke around it the resulting path will keep the stroke When text is converted to paths the resulting paths will be compounded To edit those paths you have to uncompound them first Converting Stroke to Paths From the Arrange menu select Convert Stroke to Outlines Selecting Points and Segments Selecting Segments 1 Choose the S
126. ccceeee 132 color libraries breaking paths 0 159 modifying cccceeeeeeees 93 brighten effect 0 203 color models 0088 79 brush Shapes 6cc0eee 178 COITECTING c ccseeeeeeeeeees 320 DUIl S CY eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 CICGLING wsescceRagsencesserccedeies 89 calculating percentages 21 deta ll eenn 92 calculating ratios 21 deleting cc cseeceeees 83 90 calculation in place 21 GUOLONG aine 79 California Braille 134 TIVO EEEE 91 callouts See labels merging from document 84 cancel selection 0 58 merging similar 0 83 CASO E E E 130 preventing output 231 Casfonts fonts 140 reordering cccceeeeeeeeeeees 90 Casmate tracing 339 SECAMCNING ccccsecesesseeeeeees 91 Cast Shadow cccccseeees 196 Selecting DY ccccccceeees 57 centerline tracing 184 separations cccceeeeees 316 change start point 157 showing all in palette 96 CIRCLES tae cn 107 00 EE et cee ene ee ene 79 editing ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 common effect 190 circular stripes 199 Communication 00005 273 Clear Preferences 5 compounding objects 69 clearing effects 189 constraining shapes 106 Cleaver point 00000 158 CONTOUF CUL
127. ce this point s position is fixed m 4 A rectangle sheared to an angle of 45 degrees To rotate an object 1 Select the objects After selecting an existing object the Size Rotate and Object Tabs are available 2 Select the point that will be fixed during the rotation e Clicking one point on Reference Grid in DesignCentral Rotate Tab Or e Click and drag the Reference Point to the desired position CTRL while dragging fixes the Reference Point to the settings on the Reference Grid 3 Change the angle of rotation by editing the values in the entry box or dragging the Rotation points Click the Rotate 90 degrees or Rotate 90 degrees bution to rotate the object 90 degrees counterclockwise or clockwise Using DesignCentral Page 45 ES Rotation te O Point ty 270 0 Rotation Angle amp W j O Reference r Fal Point Al Fal Shear Angle Reference amp Grid Shear Point DesignCentral Rotate Tab KEFE To shear an object 1 Select the objects After selecting an existing object the Size Rotate and Object tabs are available 2 Select the point that will be fixed during the shearing e Clicking one point on Reference Grid in DesignCentral Rotate Tab Or e Click and drag the Reference Point to the desired position CTRL key while dragging fixes the Reference Point to the settings on the Reference Grid 3 Change the shear angle by editing
128. ch tables for your printer to create your design Page 256 Printing your Design The software already comes with spot color libraries specific for printers that support spot color printing If a certain color is not listed in the color library you should create the color and define it as a spot color 2 From the File menu select RIP and Print 3 Select the Advanced Tab 4 Inthe Miscellaneous settings group check Print spot colors 5 Click the Spot color mapping button Aqua Aqua_GCS 176 Restore Defaults a Select the drawing color you want to change the mapping and select the Printer color from the map to list Select Print as process color if you want to print that color using process colors CMYK Select Skip to disable the color b Click OK 6 Set the appropriate options in the RIP and Print dialog and then click Send to print the job The printer or the Production Manager will prompt whenever you have to change the spot color ink in the printer Contour Cutting Contour cutting allows you to print and then cut a contour line around your design The output of a design with contour cut involves several Steps as follow 1 poe e D Create your design in your software and add a contour cut line See Using Contour Cut on page 209 for more details From the File menu select RIP and Print Select the Advanced tab in the RIP and Print dialog Click Contour Set the contour cut options Printing your
129. ck Apply v The dialog will close and the font will be applied Page 142 Working with Text 12 Working with Paths A path consists of one or more straight or curved segments and can be Open or Closed When you have more than one segment in one path the segments are separated by a Control Point The position of the Control Point determines the shape of the adjacent segments On curved segments each anchor point displays Direction Lines ending in Direction Handles Their angle and the size determine the shape of the curve A Control Point located between two segments can be Symmetric The direction handles point in opposite directions along the same line and they have the same size Smooth The direction handles point in opposite directions along the same line but are not the same size Cusp The direction handles are not in the same line Symmetric Control Points Smooth Control Points Cusp Control Points A double circle or square indicates the Starting Point of the path In an open path the starting point can be at either end of the path In a closed path the starting point can be anywhere on the path Control Points A straight segment is selected Working with Paths Page 143 fo Direction Handle 1 J Direction Line 1 f _ Control Point Fi Direction Line 2 Starting Point Direction Handle 2 A curved segment is selected Creating Paths You can create paths using the Bezier Path tool or
130. ck the Origin icon in the upper left hand corner of design area Or e From the View menu select Ruler and Grid The Ruler amp Grid dialog box consists of two Tabs Rulers and Grid To select a Tab click the tabs on the top of the dialog box You can adjust the following on the Ruler Tab Origin Enter the X Y coordinates of the new origin Orientation Click one of these buttons to change the orientation of the coordinates in the X Y rulers Getting Started Page 11 Units Select the unit system that will be used for length values from this list You can adjust the following on the Grid tab Spacing Horizontal and vertical space between adjacent dots Snap to Check this option to snap the objects to the grid while moving or grid resizing an object Guides Guides allow you to visually align design elements on your document To show or hide the guides from the View menu point to Show and then click Show Guides You can create a guide line by e Clicking and dragging one point on the ruler Horizontal or vertical guide lines are created depending on which ruler you dragged the point from N Click and drag om y Click and drag a point in the rule A new vertical guide is created e Select objects and from the Arrange menu point to Guides and click Make Guide Select Release Guide in the same menu to convert guides back to original objects To create a diagonal guide create a hori
131. cked each pattern tile will be proportionally resized when the object is resized Restore Defaults Restores the default settings for selected pattern Click OK to save your changes Adding a Pattern Fill to a Swatch Table To add a pattern fill you have created to a swatch table 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select the object with the pattern fill Click on the Advanced button in the Fill Stroke dialog Make any needed edits to the pattern fill Check Add to swatch table Type in a Pattern name Click OK Applying a Gradient Fill to an Object To apply a gradient fill to an object 1 2 Select the object In the Fill Stroke Editor select Gradient Fill Advanced If desired you can select one of the stock gradients from the Ea list To make your own gradient or edit one of the stock gradients a Select the type of gradient applied to the object from the l list The following types are available Linear Gradient Radial Gradient Conical Gradient Square Gradient Page 100 Using Fill Stroke Editor b Select the gradient color mode from the Al list The following modes are available oa RGB The colors in the gradient will all be defined using the RGB color model tal CMYK The colors in the gradient will all be defined using the CMYK color model J Single spot The gradient will blend between two or more color shades of a single spot color e Double The gradient will use two spot colors This t
132. color a Change the color of the substrate to the selected color Page 82 Working with Color Adding a New Color to a Swatch Table New colors can be added to swatch tables using the Eyedropper tool the Color Mixer or the Color Specs dialog e For details on using the Color Mixer see Applying Colors Using the Color Mixer page 84 e For details on using the Eyedropper tool see Applying Colors Using the Eyedropper page 86 e For details on using the Color Specs dialog see Defining Colors Using the Color Specs Dialog page 87 Copying a Color to Another Swatch Table To copy a color from one swatch table to another click on the color swatch and drag it into the other table Deleting Colors from a Swatch Table To delete undesired colors from a swatch table right click on the color swatch you want to delete and select Delete from the context menu The Transparent color cannot be deleted You can also delete colors from the swatch table using the Color Specs dialog box See Deleting Colors Using Color Specs on page 90 for more details Merging Similar Colors You can merge colors that have different names but the same color values as other colors in the table e From the View menu point to Color and then select Merge Similar Colors command Changing Color Order in a Swatch Table There are several ways to change the color position in the swatch table e Click and drag the color over
133. color into 2 Select Vendor and Type from the list Page 90 Working with Color 3 From the list on the right side select the color that will be added to the swatch table and click Add You can select multiple colors using SHIFT and CTRL keys To remove a color from a swatch table 1 Select the swatch table you want to delete from 2 Select the color from the list 3 Click Delete Color Specs Find Tab Color Library Find Swatch table Default Tolerance RITE Seecl Search v Swatch Table i Gray O ca 1 Shot White i jii ae Gi H 0 amp ccucut E Salmon Pin J Advantage Sign Supply E Burgundy rlon a Red x 0 amp Aslan H 0 LQ Aspire zl Add pete Replace Measure In the Color Specs Find Tab dialog box you can find a color in the color libraries that matches the color that you are using in your design 1 Select the swatch table that contains the color 2 Select the color that you want to search from the list on the left side of the screen You can also use your measuring device to measure one specific color To measure a color click the Measure button 3 Select the Vendors and the Types from the list Click at 0 located on the left side of the name to select it Clicking on H expands the list and show all the Types for the vendor Working with Color Page 91 H E 3M EO Ga 3m
134. columns Bitmaps are also known as raster images and the method used to create them is called rasterization LLLE AELE LLLLLLE ax ware aa a8 BERBERS e rer gt Sane SEES eee y EE SREB BERBER EEE SESE EES When a bitmap is edited the color values of its pixels are changed to form the new image The following color modes are supported Black and Each pixel is either black or white with no shades of gray White Grayscale Pixels are colored in 256 shades of gray ranging from solid black to solid white RGB The color values for each pixel are expressed as a combination of red green and blue values Up to 16 7 million different colors can be reproduced under this color model CMYK The color values for each pixel are expressed as a combination of cyan magenta yellow and black values This is the color mode most commonly used in color printing Indexed The color of each pixel is indicated by a reference to a separate swatch table containing 256 colors If a bitmap is magnified or printed at too low a resolution the individual pixels become visible This gives the image a jagged pixilated appearance see above Resolution is the number of pixels displayed per unit of printed length in an image usually measured in pixels per inch PPI or dots per inch DPI Working with Bitmaps Page 163 Using DesignCentral When a bitmap is selected DesignCentral shows the Bitmap and Profile Tabs Bit
135. command Or 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences 2 Select Tools Tab 3 Select Combine Options from the list on left side of the dialog box You can adjust the following options Keep cut objects Weld based on colors When this option is selected the object that you used to cut out another object is kept When you select this option the object remains Original Objects Keep cut objects ON Keep cut objects OFF Check this option to weld objects in groups based on their color Ose Original objects Ag based on colors Weld based on colors OFF Page 192 Working with Effects Using the Outline Effect Your software allows you to place inlines outlines or contour lines around any object Outline A closed path created around the outer edges of the selected object and inside holes such as the inside of closed letters a o etc Contour An outline without holes Inline A closed path created around the inner edge of the selected object Outline Contour Inline The term outline in this chapter refers to Inlines Outlines and Contours In an outline you can adjust the number of v Width a lines their width and the spacing between Ey em them A Outlines Effect 1 Select the objects that the effects will be applied to 2 From the Effect menu select Outline 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral or drag the control points 4 Click Apply x Adjusting Outlines Using Desi
136. consectetur 4 lf desired hit ENTER to move to the next line 5 Hit ESC or select a different tool to finish entering text Creating Horizontal Vertical Path Text 1 Select Horizontal Path Text or Vertical Path Text tool ca AB 2 Click on any existing path or shape in your design Page 118 Working with Text 3 Type the text sem P8up dolot 4 Hit ESC or select a different tool to finish entering text Creating Arc Text 1 Select Arc Text tool BB 2 Click and drag to define the radius and center of the circle the text will be positioned around The cursor will be placed at the point on the circumference that you clicked on when creating the circle Se Click and drag e Hold down the CTRL key while dragging to draw the circle from the center point The cursor will be placed at the point on the circumference that you clicked on when creating the circle Ce Click and drag e Holding down the SHIFT key while dragging restricts the Starting Angle to increments determined in Preferences see Preferences General Tab on page 22 for more details Type the text 4 lf desired hit ENTER to move to the next line 5 Hit ESC or select a different tool to finish entering text Working with Text Page 119 Changing Text Attributes Using DesignCentral While or after creating text you can adjust the text properties in DesignCentral In DesignCentral you can have two or more Tabs for each type
137. corresponding features under Windows Macintosh Shortcut Keys When keyboard shortcuts are listed use the following list to find the equivalent shortcut key on the Macintosh Windows System Macintosh System Right click the mouse Click the mouse while holding down the CONTROL key CTRL key COMMAND key apple clover ENTER key RETURN key BACKSPACE key DELETE key DELETE key DEL key You can access the context menu for the ruler and swatch table by clicking on them and holding the button down Macintosh Menus The following menu items are in different places on the Macintosh than they are under Windows Windows Menu gt Item Macintosh Menu gt Item File gt Exit Application gt Quit File gt Print Setup File gt Page Setup Recently viewed files bottom of File gt Open Recent File menu Edit gt Preferences Application gt Preferences Edit gt Paste Special No Macintosh equivalent Help gt About Application gt About Other Controls The following controls are found in a number of dialogs and are named differently on the Mac Windows Control Macintosh Control Browse button Choose button Getting Help From the Help menu point to Help Topics to view the full online documentation for the software The online help contains all of the information in this guide plus information on all the other commands in your software Getting Started Page 25 Exiting the Software To exi
138. ct Enhanced Corners 3 Adjust the tracing parameters You can adjust by dragging the sliders or entering a numeric value Tolerance Controls how close the traced paths stays to the original scanned image Smaller values will provide an accurate result that is very close to the scanned image but larger values will create smoother lines and fewer control points Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features Page 339 Noise Used to filter out some of the small garbage that is Suppression created during the scanning process If the image contains a lot of garbage try using the Reduce Noise bitmap filter prior to vectorizing Corner Sets the threshold for detecting what is and what isn t Detection a corner and how sharply the corners will be defined Reset Resets the tracing parameters to their default value 4 Click OK Using Centerline Vectorization This vectorization method is used for black and white or grayscale images which contain mostly lines rather than filled shapes It detects the center of the lines and creates a single line vector graphic Centerline vectorization is typically used in routing and engraving where you may want a single line path for the machine 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Vectorize and then select Centerline 3 Adjust the tracing parameters Pure Centerline The program will find the center of each line and create a single line contour Outline Thick The progra
139. ction or cell is called a Tile The Panel tab provides several tools to tile the job Panel Toolbar The tool bar provides tools to change the Panel mode and to automatically tile FH Locks the columns so that the tiles on a same column can be adjusted as a group Fd Locks the rows so that the tiles on a same row will can be adjusted as a group EH Locks both columns and rows so that the entire columns or rows can be adjusted as a group m i The job is automatically tiled based on the job size and the media size The job is automatically tiled based on the size of the drawing area and media size a Page 234 Cutting your Design Moving the Panel The panel defines the area of design that will be processed for output Elements of the design that are outside the bounds of the panel will not be cut Resizing the Panel You can resize the panel by dragging the panel border or using the Panel Size group to numerically enter the panel size Changing the panel size with the mouse 1 Move the cursor on top of the small red squares along the panel border 2 Click and drag to resize the panel Entering the panel size numerically H B466Gcm The width of the panel tO fb6 458em The height of the panel h 0 254cm a Margin around the panel Tiling the Job Using the Preview Area You can add new tiles to the panel 1 Move the mouse cursor on top of the panel border 2
140. ctor objects To centerline trace a bitmap 1 Select Centerline Trace tool 2 Adjust the tracing parameters in DesignCentral Page 184 Working with Bitmaps 3 You can trace the whole bitmap or parts of it e Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular bounding box Surround the objects that you want to trace on the bitmap Hold down the SHIFT key to create a square bounding box e Click the bitmap to trace just one object e Click with the CTRL key pressed to trace all of the bitmap Using PictureCut Tracing The PictureCut tool applies a striping effect to a bitmap The process slices the image with a series of horizontal or vertical stripes of varying widths The stripes will be joined into several groups each with their own tab in order to aid the weeding process Original Image i j i J4 Mh i f i Tu q t 1 i ll i Ni ii mM A i li ih I I j ii M Jiii Mh i l TA ri stripes created Horizontal stripes using PictureCut created using PictureCut DesignCentral has a PictureCut Tab with the following options Enhance Image Brightness Number of Stripes Resolution Cut Direction Reverse Image Color Applies an image enhancement filter before tracing the image Changes how dark the finished image outputs Number of stripes that will be created You can trace using the Full resolution on an image or 1 2 1 4 and 1
141. d Effect Welds selected objects into single objects removing overlapping Use this tool to eliminate extra lines in overlapping objects that will be cut 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Weld command Original Objects Objects after Weld effect Your software also has an Auto Weld feature this feature will automatically weld all overlapping objects with same color before outputting your job to a cutter For more information see Cut Plot Working with Effects Page 189 Dialog Advanced Tab on page 238 By default the objects with different colors will be weld using the topmost color to weld objects based on their colors see Combine Effect Options on page 192 Cut Out Effect Removes the selected overlapping areas from the bottom most object This effect will be always applied to the topmost objects If you want to apply the effect to other objects underneath group the top objects first 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Cut Out command Original Objects Objects after Cut Out effect Common Effect Deletes all of the selected objects except for the overlapping area This effect will be always applied to the topmost objects If you want to apply the effect to other objects underneath group the top objects first 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Combine and then select Common
142. d Radius method method Working With Shapes O Pagetii Oval For ovals you can drag the following control points tee L Height Holding down the SHIFT key while dragging the Height or Width control 3 Width points will make the resizing proportional Polygon For polygons you can drag the following control points and handles mA N Handle Bend Bend Handle p pe cs Original Polygon Size Polygon after dragging the Bend control point e Hold the CTRL key while dragging the Size control point to keep the polygon s position e Hold the CTRL key while dragging the Bend control point to restore the polygon to its original shape e Hold the SHIFT key while dragging the Bend handle to move the opposite handle in the same direction e Hold the CTRL key while dragging the Bend handle to keep the opposite handle stationary Page 112 Working With Shapes Starburst You can drag the following points on a Starburst Spike Twist Bend Handles WEEE Bend WS Size Original Starburst Starburst after dragging both Bend control points The Size and the Bend control points behave the same way as explained for the polygon in previous item Fan You can drag the following points on a Fan shape Outer Radius Rotate Sweep Angle Thickness wv Center Hold the SHIFT key while dragging the Sweep Angle or Rotate control points to constrain the angle Working With Shapes
143. d can be found on the hardware key a Select the product and language to be installed and then click OK Read the Software License Agreement and click Accept 7 Check that your hardware and operating system meet the RIP Requirements and click Next 8 Select the Install Location and click Install 9 Click Continue to close down all other apps 10 The software installs Click Stop to halt installation 11 Click Yes to clear the preferences or No to retain old preferences 12 Enter your passphrase for the Rainbow Key installer and click OK 13 Enter your passphrase for the Hasp Key installer and click OK 14 Click Continue 15 Click Quit 16 Click OK 17 Click Restart Follow these steps to install ICC color profiles for your printers 1 Insert the ICC Profile CD 2 Double click on the installer for your language Installing the Software Page 3 3 Select the folder the software was installed into and click Choose 4 Select the printers you want to install color profiles for then click OK Uninstalling the Software Macintosh 1 Exit your software by selecting Quit from File menu 2 Drag the alias for your software from the desktop to the Trash 3 Drag the folder where your software was installed to the Trash Using a Hardware Key Over a Local Area Network It is possible to run the software on a different computer than the one the hardware key is installed on However you cannot run more than one c
144. d file types Dragging a File into Production Manager To specify the setup to be used drag the file onto the appropriate setup icon in the setup area The job will be assigned a status of Holding Selecting Jobs To select a job click on its listing Multiple jobs can be selected using the standard Windows CTRL and SHIFT methods e Hold the CTRL key to select multiple individual jobs e Hold the SHIFT key to select a range of jobs by clicking on the first and last jobs in the range To select all the jobs from the Edit menu select Select All Saving Jobs Jobs can be saved as a native file or original format To save a job Page 276 Using Production Manager 1 Select the job file you want to save in the Production Manager window 2 From the File menu select Save as or click on the Save as command button 3 Enter the file name and select the file format Native or Original and click Save Deleting Jobs To delete a job do one of the following e Press the Delete or Backspace key on your keyboard e Select the job and from the Edit menu select Delete e Select the job then click on the Delete button in the toolbar e Right click the job then select Delete from the context menu Setting Job Properties The Job Properties dialog allows you to edit a large number of settings that control how a job will be output See Setting Job Properties in Production Manager page 297 for details Processing Job
145. d the Point Tab The information on each tab differs if a point or a segment is selected DesignCentral When a Segment is Selected When a segment is selected the following information is available in DesignCentral Direction a SG N Points in path 2 gal x 11 499in Y 119 075in Aln f 3 108 2 e lsin H Ans Fair 0 000 00n H Selection Point O Sf jad e Path Tab Point Tab Attributes in Path Tab Fi fe Type of selected segment line or curve You can convert one type to another by clicking these buttons ir 26 052cm Length of selected segment In a curve segment this value is the length of a straight line joining the two ends of the segment as shown on above illustration i 17 6 Inclination of selected segment In a curve segment this value is the angle of a straight line joining the two ends of the segment as shown on above illustration Attributes in Point Tab Page 148 Working with Paths ee 20 027cm Yoh fcm Oo ao 13 930cm wt isl o ot 12522cm gt por X Y coordinates of the selection point the point where the segment was clicked Length and angle of the Direction Handle marked with a square Length and angle of the Direction Handle marked with a circle DesignCentral When a Control Point is Selected When a Control Point is selected DesignCentral shows all information about the selected point Depending on the ty
146. d then select how the distribution will be done In a Left Edge to Page distribution the leftmost object is moved to a position that touches the left margin the rightmost object is moved to the right margin and all objects between them are spread keeping the distance between Left Edges equal Page 74 Arranging Objects ere Objects to Page Aight Edge to Bottom Edge to Vertical Center fo Page Page Page Spacing Objects The Spacing command allows you to distribute objects separated by an exact value 1 Select the objects If you select the objects by dragging a bounding box the first object in the order stack is used as the Stationary Object If you select the objects by clicking them with SHIFT key pressed the first selected object is used as Stationary Object 2 From the Arrange menu select Spacing command 3 Adjust the following values in DesignCentral a 24cm Space between adjacent objects Defines if selected objects will be distributed in a horizontal or vertical direction Distance will be measured from the right top side of one object to the left bottom side of the next object Distance will be measured from the left bottom side of one object to the left bottom side of the next object u Om End to Beginning mode Beginning to Beginning mode 4 Click Apply x Nesting Objects Nesting distributes objects over a specified area optimizing the
147. ded to the message as an attachment Sending a Job to EnRoute Windows Only If you have the EnRoute program installed on your computer the software allows you to transfer the current design directly to EnRoute To transfer the current design to EnRoute from the File menu select Send to EnRoute Closing Documents To close the current document 1 From the File menu select Close 2 If your document have been changed since the time it was last saved a dialog box is displayed asking if you want to save the current document e Click Yes to save the document before closing it e Click No to close the document without saving e Click Cancel to exit the closing procedure Working with Files Page 29 Linked and Embedded Files When importing bitmap EPS or PostScript files you can link or embed the file into your document A link is a connection between the document and the original file Embedded An embedded object is contained in your document Once a object file is embedded there is no longer a connection between it and the file from which it came Changes to the original file have no effect on the embedded object Linked When an object is linked only a reference to the image file is object stored in the document The image information remains in the original image file If the image file is changed those changes will also appear in your document Since linking to a picture preserves the original attributes of the im
148. der Windows 2000 XP and later operating systems Adobe Type 1 support is built into the operating system Consult your operating system documentation for details Under previous versions of Windows you must install Adobe Type Manager in order to use Adobe Type 1 fonts Consult the Adobe documentation for details Installing FSfonts To install FSfonts 1 Copy the font files to FSFonts folder 2 From the Edit menu select Preferences 3 Select Font Tab 4 Enter the path or click Browse to select the folder where the fonts are stored 5 Ifthe fonts are protected click Add and type the password 6 Click OK 7 Restart the software Installing URW and Casfonts To install URW and Casfonts 1 Copy the font files to URWFonts or Casfonts folder 2 Restart the software Casmate Engraving Fonts Casmate engraving fonts install in the same manner as other Casmate fonts with the following additional conditions e Ifthe filename of the font starts in ENG_ E_ or E E followed by a space the font is automatically loaded as an open path font Page 140 Working with Text e Fonts whose filenames begin with some other characters must be listed in a text file named casfopen I st in the Casfonts folder Once the filename is listed in the casfopen st file the software will automatically load the font as an open path font The format of the casfopen Ist file is as follows o The first line consists of the section header CA
149. dering objects 0 00 72 mirroring objects 46 61 62 orientation 133 modifying color libraries 93 outline effect eee 193 MOVING Objects 0 ccceee 60 Output position 8 227 Navigator ViCW ccccee 14 output SIZE eceeeeeeeeees 227 nesting JODS cccceeeeeeees 279 output size compensation 293 nesting objects c00 75 OV ONS ennaa a 108 network printers 0 271 CCILING nesta 112 new documents 27 overlap lines cceeeeeeees 314 SEI EE E rear 97 overlap MarkS 00088 314 number of copies 303 OVEFPIINtiNG seeeceeeeeeees 309 numbering objects 67 page layOUt cceceeeeeeee eee 43 objects page nesting 281 303 aligning ccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 73 page PFeVIEW cccceeeeeees 298 compounding 0008008 69 page range cccseeeeeeeeeeees 303 Index Page 351 page SPACING cceeeeeees 309 paintbrush shapes 178 paintbrush tool 0 173 palette swatch table c00 96 e a P E E E E T 14 panel SIZE cceeseeeeeeeeeees 282 parallel port settings 273 parametric shapes 110 pasle aoa n SE 64 paste OVE cceeeceseeeeeeeens 65 paste SpecCial cccceeee 65 PANTO n 117 Se e EE 143 adding points 0 157 aligning points 151 applyin
150. ding Each Color as a Different Job Check Send All Colors option to process each color separately When this option is checked you can select how each color will be processed Single Panel Single The job is sent as a single file and processed using Job the same panel size for all colors Single Panel Separate A separate job file is created for each color but they Jobs are still processed using the same panel size for all colors Separate Panels A separate job file is created for each color and you Separate Jobs can define the panel size for each color separately Cutting your Design Page 241 Page 242 Cutting your Design 19 Printing your Design Before you can print any design make sure you have established a connection from your design software to the Production Manager and created a setup for your output device as instructed in the section Setting up the Production Manager and Configuring Output Devices Follow the steps below to send the document to your cutting device 1 From the File menu select RIP and Print 2 Adjust the settings available in the dialog box as necessary and click Send Setting the RIP and Print Dialog The RIP and Print dialog box gives you complete control over how the job is produced This dialog box consists of four Tabs General Panel Advanced and Color Tabs The area on top of this dialog is common for all Tabs Current __ Trrinter 1 LPT z J
151. e Editing Advanced Settings for details Settings Editing Advanced Settings To edit the advanced settings for an ICC profile Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 327 Open the Advanced Settings dialog in one of the following ways e Click on the Advanced button during ICC profile creation e Edit the ICC profile and click on the Edit button on the Advanced tab Profile Settings Color Mapping Quality f Small LUT ie Medium LUT i Large LUT LUT smoothing No smoothing Optimize for CMYK images ICC tag options V Create perceptual LUT I Create saturation LUT Create preview tags W Save raw data Edit the settings on the Profile Settings tab Quality Specify whether you want a Small Medium or Large LUT Look Up Table Small LUT Profiles have a small file size but are coarsely sampled Large LUT Profiles have larger file sizes but have fine sampling LUT Choose whether you want no smoothing mild moderate Smoothing heavy or maximum smoothing This option will remove noise from the LUT Use smoothing if the print shows sudden transitions or banding Optimize for Check to use CIE76 instead of CIE94 when calculating CMYK color differences This will produce better colors when Images printing to a CMYkK only device Create This creates a different LUT specifically for the perceptual Perceptual rendering intent used for photographic images If create LUT
152. e The preset files contain the standard job property settings everything except job size page range and tiling plus the data from the ICC and linearization profiles currently in use Exporting Presets To export the current settings to a preset file 1 Create the presets you want to save 2 Close the Job Properties dialog 3 From the File menu select Export Preset Page 300 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Mutoh Graphics Falcon Outdoor Junior Presets ArlonD PF ral Fit to Media sml Irregular Paper Type 42 xml Light Box Job ml Export as Read Only Select All Clear All Ern Caneel 4 Select the Printer Model Select the presets you want to export Check Export as Read Only if desired If this box is checked the presets will be exported as read only When you import the presets back into the application the presets will be overwritten by the read only versions 7 Click Export Importing Presets To import settings that were previously saved to a preset file 1 From the File menu select Import Preset 2 Select the preset file and click Open If the preset file contains settings that would overwrite existing settings you will be prompted to confirm overwriting the existing settings Setting Default Job Properties To make the current job properties the default settings for all new jobs that are added to this setup click Set Default You will be asked to confi
153. e Character Select the font type and style where the new character will be added in DesignCentral Select the new character or character code in Character To size and position the character properly specify a reference character in Reference Character The baseline and the box of the new character will be placed relative to the bounding box in the same ratio as the reference character When the reference character is not specified the baseline is on the bottom of the object bounding box and the character is scaled to fit the ascent You can also click and drag the control points around the character to adjust the new character s position and size P age 136 Working with Text E this example F the new character will be aa defined as C in Character Arial Regular Character C font C Hex code i r Reference Character Character e Hex cod D Bounding box and Control Points 6 Click Apply v In the example below the character C in Arial font is replaced with a telephone symbol Every time you type C using the Arial font a telephone symbol will be used ABCDE AB DE Using standard Arial font The same text after the new character has been created The special character specified here is used only by this program and will not affect or be used by other applications Also the existing text in your document will not be affected To delete a cus
154. e ICC profile 3 You can only change the data by taking a new set of measurements Advanced Tab The Advanced tab contains the following settings General Ink Limit GCA Data Advanced Total number of measurements 79 Swatches CIE YZ illuminant D50 2 degrees observer 86 307 Y 89 286 2 76 826 59 911 Y 62 445 2 55 421 403 42 090 Y 44 218 2 39 695 04 28 246 Y 29 759 Z 27 322 4 05 4 59 862 Y 62 462 2 54 968 ADG xX 42 273 Y 44 441 2 39 530 AO 28 461 Y 30 059 2 27 572 408 BP X 19 232 Y 20 432 2 19 303 409 4 41 894 Y 44 047 2 39 044 410 BR X 27 456 Y 28 934 2 26 606 Ad General Ink Limit GCR Data Advanced Device identification number Co Manufacturer none ASCII C Hex Model number C Decimal Profile version Version 2 00 Your profile is up to date r Advanced profile settings fou can modify ICC building parameters and Edit color mapping a Device The device identification number of the printer or hybrid device Identification This data is stored in the ICC file using standard ICC tags Number Manufacturer The manufacturer Model number The model number ASCIl Hex Decimal Select the format of the Manufacturer and Model Number The information already in those fields will automatically be converted Profile The ICC profile version Version Advanced If desired click Edit to edit the advanced settings for the ICC Profile profile Se
155. e Trash layer contains the objects that were deleted from your document This layer allows you to recover objects that were accidentally deleted see Deleting Objects on page 77 for more details about how to recover deleted objects Layer 1 2 3 These layers contain the actual objects that were created in your document You can have as many layers as you like for each design The layer that is highlighted in the Layers tab is called the Active layer At any given time one of the layers must be active When a layer with a disabled Edit A property is Active most of editing tools ne er and commands will not be available bk TE EGOA f When you right click on any of the layers a menu is displayed and the following commands are available A new layer is created The new layer will be added New Layer above the active layer Delete Layer The active layer is deleted A copy of the active layer is created The new layer Duplicate Layer will be added above the active layer Rename Changes the active layers name Properties Shows the properties for the active layer You can also click the buttons on the top of the DesignEditor Layer Tab to perform some of the above commands C New Layer fil Delete Ti Duplicate Empty Layer Layer Trash Showing Layer Properties Each layer has the following properties Visible i Specifies if the layer is visible or not Always disabled for Trash Layer Editable ff Specifies if
156. e extent that this Agreement contains provisions which relate to Licensee s use of the Software the Coded Font Programs the Typefaces and the Trademarks licensed hereby Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Adobe and are enforceable by Adobe in addition to Licensor 10 The Adobe Postscript Interpreter includes an implementation of LZW licensed under U S Patent 4 558 302 The Adobe PostScript Interpreter also referred to as CPSI is provided on an as is basis Scanvec Amiable Inc is not responsible for any damages arising from the use of the program however caused and on any theory of liability Page x License Agreementinstalling the Software 1 Installing the Software Before you begin installing the software read the hardware requirements below For optimal performance we suggest that your system meet the recommended requirements As with all computer software systems with faster processors more RAM and greater amounts of storage space allow you to work with larger files and keep your processing time to a minimum Recommended System Requirements O waos O menon C helt Disk 4 Gbytes pace Operating Windows 98 ME OSX 10 2 or later Windows NT4 0 2000 XP Video 800x600 resolution monitor with 16 bit color 4x CD ROM or DVD Drive Free USB or LPT Port for Free USB Port for hardware key hardware key Available Port for Output Device Windows NT 4 0 requires Internet Explorer
157. e foot Plastic Sintra 3 mm 1 37 6 00 8 21 square foot Sign Preparation Design amp Layout 25 00 0 00 0 00 hour Sign Preparation Cut Time 1 00 0 00 0 00 minute Sign Preparation Weeding amp Application 12 00 0 00 0 00 hour Sign Preparation Preparing Sign Blank 12 00 0 00 0 00 hour Sign Preparation Installation 25 00 0 00 0 00 hour Add Item Delete Item Quantity fi Subtotal 9 04 3 j Z i eA T One time Tax rate 6 0 Tax 0 54 Total 9 58 One sample of Job Estimation Customizing Forms You can customize the existing forms to match your needs 1 From the Edit menu click Job Estimation 2 Select the Form type that will be changed 3 Change the form by clicking the buttons described below Working with Files Page 35 Add Item Adds a new item to the list Click this button and select the Category Item and Type in the dialog box that is displayed If the item is one that incurs only a one time cost for the entire run of finished pieces such as design time check One time Change Item Select one item in the list and click this button Then select the Category Item and Type The new item will replace the selected item Delete Item Select one item in the list and click this button The item is deleted from the list Delete Deletes the Form type from the list 4 After all changes are done click Save to save as a new form 5 Enter a name that will appear in the Form list 6 Click OK Customizin
158. e image to prevent the dark color from showing through Bady Shop Two types of underbases can be created A solid underbase is generally used with vector objects and text It consists of a solid coat of a single spot color typically white that follows the contour of the objects above The ink is always at 100 coverage A solid underbase can be the same size as the objects above or it can be choked down to fit inside the margins of the objects or bled out to extend outside the margins A variable underbase is used with bitmaps and gradients The density of the underbase varies to match that of the image above This allows the color of the medium to show through behind a transparent area of a picture for instance A variable underbase is always exactly the same size as the image above An underbase can only be output on a thermal transfer device or by using the Print as Separations feature Creating a Solid Underbase To create a solid underbase for one or more objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Underbase then Solid Underbase 3 In DesignCentral select either choke or bleed 1 4 Set the size of the choke or bleed in the g field Page 204 Working with Effects 5 Check With Holes to make holes in the underbase underneath holes in the selected objects above 6 Select the color of the underbase from the list 7 Click Apply x After creating the underbase the underbase and the obj
159. e object where the fill or effect will be applied 4 From the Edit menu point to Graphic Styles and then select Paste Style The fill stroke and the effects from the first object is applied to the second object H_twa Copy Style Apply Style Storing Style in Style List You can select which properties from the original object will be stored in a style For example if you have a green object with a shadow you can choose to save only the shadow as a style the shadow and the green fill or just the green fill To store the properties from an object as a style 1 Select the object 2 From the Edit menu point to Graphic Styles and then select Store Style 3 Enter the new style name and select the properties that will be stored in this style 4 Click Save Applying Style in Style List To apply one style from the style list 1 Select the object Page 208 Working with Effects 2 From the Edit menu point to Graphic Styles and then select Paste Style 3 Select the style from the style list 4 Click Apply v Editing Style from Style List Edit styles allows you to edit a stored style by renaming copying or deleting To rename or copy a style 1 From the Edit menu point to Graphic Style and then select Edit Style 2 Select the style from the list then click Copy or Rename 3 Enter the new style name 4 Click OK To delete a style 1 From the Edit menu
160. e tiles when assembling the final output Overlap is measured as the total amount two rows or columns overlap E Check to create an overlap on the vertical edges of tiles Horizontal Vertical Overla Overla m Check to create an overlap on the p j horizontal edges of tiles 0 200in The width of the overlap Cutting your Design Page 237 To specify a tile that will not be output double click or right click the tile The tile will be disabled Tile Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Panel Row 1 Panel Height Disabled Row2 Panel Width Page 238 Cutting your Design Cut Plot Dialog Advanced Tab The Advanced tab i of Cut Plot allows you to set several options specific to cutting jobs of x Hs 15 Plus COM1 i Properties S Passes fi General Panel Advanced Automatic registration marks F Send all colors Advance after plot F Cut page crossings Pause between colors Pause between pages Single panel single job Apply copy spacing between pages F Auto weld Weed lines Auto trap Weed border Choke bleed distance 0 125in Panel maram o100 i a V Optimize cutting order 10 000in Easy weed re TE vean ae onvert strokes to outlines Plot dimensions and labels Horizontal weed lines Vertical weed lines Total size 7 56in x 8 41in T Fill plot Pen width 0 100in Fill angle 0 000 Cutter Driver Options
161. each other If you want to use the automatic registration marks to align different colored objects to each other either the panel size must be identical for all layers or you must use Send All Colors with the single panel option enabled See Sending Each Color as a Different Job at page 241 Cuts a border with the specified Panel margin around all objects in the selected color Cuts a weeding border with the specified Weeding margin around each object in your design Adds weedlines between lines of text or objects Adds weedlines between characters or objects Removes intersections of overlapping objects of the same color Specifies the amount of overlap between objects of different colors When this option is not selected the objects are cut or plot in the order they were created When selected the software processes the objects within the specified section of length before moving to the next section Convert Selects whether the strokes will be cut separately as an object stroke to outlines Plot Selects whether the labels and dimensions created with dimensions measure tool will be cut or plot and labels Total size Displays the total size of the job Fill plot Allow you to define the angle and pen width for fill plot Page 240 Cutting your Design Cutter Driver Launches the Cutter Driver Options dialog See Cutter Driver Options Options at page 297 Sen
162. ect Determines the percentage of the image that is covered with stripes from 0 to 100 Changing this value changes the width of the stripes but not the number Vg XY y 7 x N N d Percentage 20 Percentage 50 Percentage 80 Working with Effects Page 199 Fy 0 08 Determines the distance from the center to the first gap Fi fi000 The distance from the center of the rings to the outermost ring is specified in this entry box If the object extends beyond the last ring the remainder of the object is solid 56 0 Determines the degree of the gradient expressed as a percentage from 0 to 100 The point selected in this grid will be the center of the cee circular stripes Adjusting Circular Stripes Using Control Points You can also adjust some of the above fields dragging the control points e Click and drag the inside edge of each stripe to change the stripe gradient e Click and drag the outside edge of each stripe to change the stripe gap e Click and drag the center point to change where the stripe starts Using The Distort Effect Your software allows you to distort vector objects The following distortions are available in your software When a distortion effect is applied to a bitmap it will mask the bitmap using the distortion shape wll aa IE Slant Notch Corner Perspective Globe Wave Top Wave Arch Top Arch Squeeze Page 200 Working with Effects AD Dw oi pi Balloon
163. ect Tools Tab 3 Select Text tool from the list on left side of dialog box In Text Preferences the following options are available Font Size Select which option will be used to determine the font size used to fit a specified text height Use font The software sets the font size that so that height the height of the bounding box of the font matches the specified height Page 138 Working with Text Width tracking word spacing Smooth edges of screen fonts Use Chinese language kits Based on The software sets the font size so that the height of _ height of the letter you specify measured from the top of the letter to its baseline exactly matches the specified height By default sizes are based on the height of the letter X The benefit of using a reference letter is knowing the exact size of one particular letter 3 Using a reference letter does not make all characters the same size as that letter In the example below text was selected and the same size was set in DesignCentral A B C Xa A The height of letter X was set as a reference in Based on height of The height of letter X is exactly the size specified in DesignCentral because it is used as a reference All other letters like the a in the above example will be proportionally resized B The height of letter a was set as a reference in Based on height of The height of letter a is exactly the size
164. ection Line ength unchanged Hold the ALT key to change one Direction Line length and angle while keeping the other Direction Line length and angle unchanged Repeat step 3 to create more segments e Press the BACKSPACE key to delete the last segment e Press the ESC key or click the New Path button in DesignCentral to create a new path e Toclose the path place the cursor close to the starting point and click when the cursor shows a small circle underneath or press the Close Path button in DesignCentral e Press the DELETE key to delete the entire path Drawing Arcs Using the Bezier Path Tool l Select the Bezier Path tool pa Click where the arc will begin in the drawing area Hold the CTRL key and click to mark the endpoint of the arc then drag to describe the curvature of the arc The curvature will increase or decrease so that the arc always intersects the cursor E ii gt After releasing the mouse button you can still adjust the Direction Lines by dragging the Direction Handles Hold the SHIFT key to change one Direction Line length and angle while keeping the other Direction Line length unchanged Hold the CTRL key to Working with Paths Page 145 change one Direction Line length and angle while keeping the other Direction Line length and angle unchanged 5 Repeat step 4 to create additional segments e Press the BACKSPACE key to delete the last segment e Press the ESC key or click the New Path
165. ects are joined together into a compound object Creating a Variable Underbase To create a variable underbase for one or more objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Underbase then Variable Underbase 3 Select the Resolution that the underbase will be applied at This should match the resolution supported by your output device 4 Select the color of the underbase from the list 5 Click Apply x After creating the underbase the underbase and the objects are joined together into a compound object Removing an Underbase To remove an underbase 1 Select the compound object containing the object and its underbase 2 From the Effect menu select Clear Underbase The underbase is removed and the objects are normal objects again Separating an Underbase From the Objects It Was Based On To separate an underbase from the objects it was based on 1 Select the compound object containing the object and its underbase 2 From the Effect menu select Separate Underbase The underbase becomes a separate object and the objects it was based on become normal objects again Making a Vector Object into an Underbase To make a vector object into an underbase 1 Select the object 2 From the Arrange menu select Underbase then Make Underbase Working with Effects Page 205 Cancel 3 Select the color of the underbase from the list and click OK Releasing an Underbase Back to a Vector Object
166. ects contained in PostScript and other vector based files Gradient The rendering intent to use with vector based gradient objects contained in PostScript and other vector based files Gradients created in bitmap files will be rendered using the Bitmap rendering intent Different rendering intents can be specified for CMYK objects versus all other objects RGB grayscale LAB etc Page 220 Configuring the System for Color Printing The options set here are only used as a default setting for your output You can specify different rendering intents for each bitmap or color in your design Please see Profile Tab on page 164 and Color Specs Color Tab on page 88 for more details Choose from one of the following rendering intents Perceptual Saturation Relative Colorimetric Absolute Colorimetric Spot Color No color correction This intent is best for photographic images Colors outside of the output device s gamut are either clipped or compressed to fit the output device s color space This intent is best for graphic images such as vector art where vivid colors are more important than true color matching Colors outside of the output device s gamut are mapped to colors at the extent of the gamut s saturation Colors that fall within the gamut of the output device are shifted closer to the gamut s saturation extent This intent is best for images such as logos where the output needs to matc
167. ed size 7 Check Enable print size compensation or Enable cut size compensation to automatically scale all future output from this setup using the compensation factors derived from your measurements 8 Click OK You must set up Output Size Compensation separately for each output device setup Output size compensation does not affect the size of the job as it appears in the Job Properties dialog Using RIP Logs Each time a job is RlPed an entry for that job is added to the RIP Log for that output device The RIP Log entry lists the relevant details about the job where it came from its basic characteristics what job properties were set and the RIP time Viewing RIP Logs To view the rip log for a given output device Page 294 Using Production Manager 1 Select the setup icon for the output device 2 From the View menu select View RIP Log The RIP Log is formatted as an HTML file and displays in the default browser for the operating system Clearing RIP Logs To clear out the rip log for a given output device 1 Select the setup icon for the output device 2 From the View menu select Clear RIP Log Using Production Manager Page 295 Page 296 Using Production Manager 22 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager The Job Properties dialog allows you to edit a large number of settings that control how a job will be output Accessing the Job Properties Dialog To access the Job Properties dialo
168. ed to a swatch table 5 6 7 8 9 Select the object with the gradient Click on the Advanced button in the Fill Stroke dialog Make any needed edits to the gradient Check Add to swatch table Type in a Gradient name 10 Click OK Editing Gradients Using the Edit Bar In the Fill Stroke Editor Fill Tab and Advanced Settings dialog you can adjust the gradient using the Edit Bar Start l End Color Intermediate Color icons Golor icon icon s yawyay E O E Click any color icon in the Edit Bar to select it In Advanced Settings dialog you can change the color using the swatch on right side of the dialog In the Fill Stroke Editor Fill Tab you can change or create a new color in the gradient dragging the new color from the swatch table to an existing color or in a blank space between colors Click and drag the color icon to the left right to change its position in the gradient In Advanced Settings dialog you can change the position using the position field on right side of the dialog The Start and End Color icons cannot be dragged Click and drag the color icon above the gradient bar to delete it CTRL and dragging the color icon creates a copy of the dragged color Click a blank space between color icons to create a new color in the gradient Page 102 Using Fill Stroke Editor Editing Gradients Using the Edit Line When you click the Edit Gradient button in Fill Stroke Editor Fill Tab a G
169. ed will be brightened 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Lens and then select Brighten command The following options can be adjusted in DesignCentral Brightness Degree of brightness applied to object This value can range from 0 to 100 Hide Stroke Check this option to apply the effect to the object s stroke Wireframe Effect The vector objects under the object where the effect is applied are displayed without any fills 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Lens and then select Wireframe command The following options can be adjusted in DesignCentral Hide Stroke Check this option to apply the effect to the object s stroke Magnify Effect The objects under the object where the effect is applied are magnified Working with Effects Page 203 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Lens and then select Magnify command The following options can be adjusted in DesignCentral Zoom Degree of magnification applied to object Values above 100 will Scale magnify the objects values below 100 will reduce the objects Hide Check this option to apply the effect to the object s stroke Stroke Using the Underbase Effect The underbase feature is used to create a primer coat of base color that the actual image will be printed on top of When printing a light image onto a dark medium for instance it is useful to print a white underbase underneath th
170. edia ESM BlockOut Scrim Banner Print mode Standard C ststi i sS CMYKLcLm Sol 2 bit DPI FMxPress xl Smooth blends Enhanced bd V Perform color correction Output profile 3M16210 7HiQ20 1 440 LCM icc Properties Linearization table 3M16210 HiQ72081440 LCM tre Simulation None z Ink Limits V Use color mapping ICC profile not calibrated Preset Select a job properties preset to apply to the job Media Select the media type the output will be printed on Print mode Select the print quality for the output This setting will vary for each type of printer Color Mode Select the color mode that matches the inks set in the printer CMYK The image will be printed using CMY Grayscale CMYKLcLm a combination of cyan magenta yellow and black inks The image will be printed using cyan magenta and yellow inks All black will be CMY process black The image will be printed using black ink only producing a black and white image with shades of gray CMYK plus Light Cyan and Light Magenta inks This color mode provides smoother gradations between lighter shades of colors Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 305 CMYKOrGr CMYK plus Orange and Green inks This color mode provides truer orange and green colors than CMYK alone can produce CMYKLcLmOrGr CMYK plus Light Cyan Light Magenta Orange and Green inks CMYKLcLmMcMm CMYK plus Lig
171. eeceeeeeeeeenees 288 selecting a tile 285 tile overlap lines 314 tile overlap marks 314 uniform tiling c000 284 tiling PYEVIEW ceeeeee seers 298 tonal scales cceeeeeeeeees 314 tOO NIDS ec oct e parce toned 10 toolbars anken ainean 7 transparency 202 transparent bitmaps 168 TAD DING esasa 207 trimming jobs ccceeeeeees 287 TrueType fonts 008 140 TWAIN dr iver cccccseeeees 165 underbase effect 204 UNGO eee ener eer teenentr aa 19 undo multiple cceeeeeee 19 uniform tiling ccceeeeeeees 284 uninstalling sseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 3 MacintOSPie ean 4 unit conversion 0eeeeee 21 units of measurement 268 URW TONIS oiiire 140 vector rendering intent 220 view filter senses chiceds eerste sees 18 weld effect ceeeeeeeeeeeees 189 windows refreshing cccceeeeeeeeeees 17 wireframe effect 0 203 wireframe fill ccceeeeee ee 98 wireframe printing 228 WOrkSpaces cccccseeeeeeeeeees 20 ZOOM eeen a aa 14 Page 354 Index
172. eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeees 29 Sending a Job to EnRoute Windows Onlly esccceeeeeeeeeeeees 29 CIOSING Documents essri A ER 29 Linked and Embedded Files cccccssesececceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeseaas 30 Using OLE Objects Windows Only ccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 31 Working with Job Info ccscc coc dccdi set occcacscdcecaoeanedosceasadarteanescaeccacaees 33 RNARO FIG Sect cats ae Pe tea a a a ee 33 JOD ESTIMA OM e abie aae a Ea cm aendtuedesceeemaecoate 34 TEMPES reese ne ere ean gee ony eee 37 4 Using DESiGnGentlal sssini aia 43 Displaying Design Gentil xz ceiicvciccdecs cai tccensice ben ttihc nestor beenttiveecd 43 DesiqnGenttal TaD ceee a ee es eee 43 5 USING DESIGNEGINON aeaea aa 49 Displaying DESIQGNEGItOL ccsccecsseeeceeeeecceeeeecseeeeeseaseeeseneeeees 49 DesignEditor Layers TaD sasssa ETa a 49 DesignEditor Objects TaD ae a 52 6 Selecting ObDIeCCtS acon ia 55 Selecting Objects Using the Select TOol cccccccceesssseeeeeeeeeees 55 Selecting Objects Within an Effect ccccecccceeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 Selecting Objects Using the TAB Key cccccccecssssseeeeeeeeeeeeesees 56 Selecting Similar Objects s ren a a eaa E ENSK 56 Selecting Objects With The Same Colol cccccecccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 57 Selecting Object Based on Attributes cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 57 Contents Page i 10 11 Selecting O
173. eeeeeeeeees 43 feed calibration 309 dongle See hardware key file formats xesitiscewrtnseisataanwere 333 drop shadow 060008 196 files dy Eas 309 ClO SING keea a 29 duplicating objects 65 OXPOMTING cccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 28 edit baf ccceeeeceeseseeeeeeeees 102 Anel ae EAEE ET 33 edit line 20 eeeceeeeeeeeee eens 103 IMPOFtiNnG cccceseeeeeeeees 28 editing dimension lines 217 linking and embedding 30 Index Page 349 OPENING reprise 27 setting output profiles 307 SAVING saccoasuntinesectncsaamcedes 28 importing bitmaps 165 MOOR ersa 175 importing color profiles 292 TIN WW DES anieri 97 Importing files ccceeeeeees 28 fill SHOWING cccceeeeeeee ees 15 MK SPINE rana a 318 Fill Stroke Editor 97 input profiles ccceeeeees 219 filtering Insert Symbol 0 136 DY COlOK esaa ecto 18 installation ccceceeeeeeeeeee ees 1 MrS nn n 179 Macintosh cc sceceeeeeeeees 3 find and replace 129 installed files ccccce 331 finding COIOMS cccseeeeeee eee 91 installing fonts c cce 140 HNANOG THES acrocar 33 intersection See common effect finisher effect 206 intersection removal 157 TIE TO palai 117 invert selection 58 171 flip HoriZontal cceee 303 job estimation
174. ees 300 IMO MING cerere gecete 301 renaming 0eceeeeeeeeeeees 300 preventing output of tiles 286 preview OUtpUt 00 223 preview pane cccceeeeees 298 previewing bitmaps 16 price estimation 0 34 print GireCtion ccceeeee 309 print MALKS cccseeeeeeeeeeees 312 COON erena 311 WO ees 311 DMAT OPUONS ssis 309 print preview ccceceeeeees 223 print to desktop printer 223 print while RIPing 269 printer s marks See print marks printing a tile Map 286 printing color separations 316 Production Managet 267 NEW SEtUP ceeeeeeee eee 2 0 SAVING JODS 00ccceeeees 276 SOLU D cass e tests setdade 263 setup on a network 264 pure hue settings 221 radiant stripe s 068 197 random diffusion 306 FASTELIZE ccceeeeeceseeeeeeeeees 166 ratio calculation 000 21 FECTANGIES cccseeeeeeeeeees 107 Seilg a Renee ieee eee mere 111 redirecting jobs 00 277 ROG Oras ae can eee ae 19 redo multiple 20 redraw ecccccsseeeeceseeeeeeeseeeees 17 reduce POINIS eee 156 refreshing the view 17 Page 352 registration marks 109 select by attributes 57 relative colorimetric rendiering select similar color 57 Mien esa 221 Select TOO ai 55 re
175. ees 87 Setting the Default Fill Stroke Color ccccccceceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 92 Setting the Background Foreground Color cccccsseeeeeeeeeeees 92 Modifying Existing Color Libraries ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 93 Creating Test SwWatChe ccccccccecccccceeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesesaaeeees 94 Using Fill Stroke EqitOr sccscwssistccssecciiesicitasewenevtiecsdersiecs ceed 97 Displaying Fill StrOke EG OM sicecaccies ceiccceesceceecnccecedyeess ceassbesteevecceeeees 97 Types of a opereeee eet ner entree mete ee ar rine tet ome sere in errr nar entire eet mae Crete 97 Applying No Fill to An Object zsiressiireraroieieear aset 97 Applying a Solid Fill to an Object eee cccccccccsseseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 98 Applying a Pattern Fill to an Object cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Applying a Gradient Fill to an Object cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 100 Editing Stroke Properties Of AN ODjeCt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 103 Working With Shapes ccccccssssssseeeseeessseeeeeensseeesees 105 Creating SMADES ainina Acadian ccaicaa asshole ick 105 Editing Shapes Using DesignCenitral sseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 107 Editing Shapes Using Control Points ccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 111 Converting Objects to Shapes ccecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 115 NV OFKING WNA TEX sssini 117 Creating NEW LEX
176. elect Point tool 2 Click a control point or a segment When a straight segment is selected a filled square is displayed When a curved segment is selected the Direction Handles and Lines for the segment is displayed along with a filled circle m Straight segment selected Curved segment selected When a control point is selected it displays a square when the previous segment is a straight segment and a circle when the previous segment is curved Press the TAB key to move to the next point 3 Hold the SHIFT key and click other segments to select multiple segments or points Selecting Control Points by Enclosing 1 Choose Select Point tool 2 Click and drag to create a rectangular bounding box i Multiple points selected Another way to select multiple control points is by using an inclined bounding box This method is useful when the points to be selected are placed in a way that a rectangular bounding box can not select them Working with Paths Page 147 To select points using an inclined bounding box 1 Choose Select Point tool 2 Hold the CTRL key and click and drag to define one edge of the bounding box 3 Release the CTRL key and drag the cursor in a perpendicular direction to define the adjacent edge of the bounding box 4 Release the mouse button Using DesignCentral to Edit Points and Segments When a segment or point is selected DesignCentral displays two tabs The Path Tab an
177. elect the menu command a second time to hide the toolbar a mae was es PF SOS Bitmap Edit toolbar Some tools will not be available for some color modes Working with Bitmaps Page 169 Defining Marquees Marquees select part of the image and allow only that part to be edited The marquee can have any shape and its border is marked by a flashing dotted line Bitmap with a marquee Selecting the Entire Bitmap To define the entire bitmap as a marquee 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu select Marquee Select All Using the Marquee Tool The Marquee tool selects rectangular portions of the bitmap 1 Select the Marquee tool a 2 Click and drag the cursor over the bitmap 3 After creating one marquee you can add or subtract areas a Hold the SHIFT key while dragging to add additional sections of the bitmap to the selection marquee b Hold the CTRL key while dragging to subtract sections of the bitmap from the selection marquee 4 Once drawn click inside the marquee and drag it to move the marquee to the desired position r T Fr Original bitmap with a Dragging pressing SHIFT Final marquee marquee Original bitmap with a Dragging pressing CTRL Final marquee marquee key Using the Lasso Tool The Lasso tool allows you to select a marquee by tracing its outline on Page 170 Working with Bitmaps the bitmap 1 Select the Lasso tool ca 2 Click and drag the curs
178. elected Colors Active Color Background Color While color tracing an image you can specify the number of colors that will be in the Number of Posterized Colors list lf a Background color was found it will be placed on the far left side of the color palette The background color will not be traced as indicated by the folded corner Traced parts of the bitmap with an Untraced color will not be displayed in the preview and will not be traced You can skip any color in the palette untraced SHIFT clicking it The color with a triangle underneath is the Active color The active color is used when merging colors To make one color active click the Space underneath the color You can Select colors by clicking them To deselect the color click Working with Bitmaps Page 187 again You can select multiple colors Selecting an invisible color will make it visible When you have two or more colors that you want to trace with the same color you can merge them 1 Make the destination color Active 2 Select the colors that will be merged 3 Click Merge into Active button You can undo the operation by clicking the Undo button Only the last merge can be undone You can also merge two colors together by clicking and dragging the source color over the destination color button Bolly oo a a Posterized Bitmap Posterized bitmap after merging colors zilia To change the order of the colors in the palette click
179. ement System Linearization Look in Sample Graphics gt e c E File name I Files of type ficc Files icm icc Cancel Select the ICC profile and click Open Clicking the Properties button will launch the Profile Properties dialog which contains information pertaining to the ICC output profile that has been chosen under Output profile and also UCR GCR settings See Editing ICC Profile Properties page 324 for details This setting determines the color management system that will be used to output the job If you are using ICC profiles from PPS 3 that contain light or medium inks ex CMYKLcLm you can use either color management system If you use Microsoft ICM the light and medium channels will not be read from the ICC and will be computed based on formulas If you are using ICC profiles from PPS 3 that contain orange and green inks you need to use the Scanvec Amiable CMS Automatic The software will choose one which color management system to use Microsoft ICM The software will use the Microsoft Image 2 0 Color Management 2 0 API Scanvec The software will use the Scanvec Amiable CMS Amiable Color Management System Click to launch the Linearization dialog Magenta Yellow Black Cancel Page 254 Printing your Design Print substrate color Print dimensions and labels Print as separations Color Keys Print spot colors Print marks Print Color
180. en created Template objects can be masked colored and have an effect applied to them Working with Files Page 39 Editing Existing Templates You can modify an existing template 1 From the File menu point to Templates and then click Open Template 2 Select the template in the list 3 Adjust the placeholder s attributes in DesignCentral Template Tab 4 From the File menu point to Templates and then click Save Template or Save as Template The Save Template command will save the current template Save as Template will save the template in a new file Changing Placeholders Attributes in DesignCentral Each placeholder will have different fields in the DesignCentral Template Tab For Drawing placeholder FS 20528cm Width of the drawing placeholder T i 3 649 Hr Height of the drawing placeholder Auto Orientation Check to automatically change the orientation of the drawing to match the original file For Used Color placeholder 20528cm Width of the Used Color placeholder T i 3 649 m Height of the Used Color placeholder Font and style used in the color description Regular tA 25 400mm Size of the font used in color description it ii Number of colors per line ay fe ane t Shape of the color swatch used in color description For Used Fonts placeholder h 0 528cm Width of the Used Fonts placeholder T i 3 6490 m Height of the Used Fonts placeholder F Arial F
181. enu select Paste command or press CTRL V l l BW r MM o o l l l l l l l l l l l l Copy the object And Paste Page 64 Arranging Objects Duplicating Objects Using Paste Special In Windows you can use the Paste Special feature Paste Special allows you to select the format of pasted data To use the Paste Special 1 Copy the objects You can copy and paste objects from other programs 2 From the Edit menu select Paste Special 3 Select the format of pasted data 4 Click OK Duplicating Objects Using Paste Over The Paste Over command pastes an object on top of the selected objects The pasted object will be positioned in the center of the selected objects Duplicating Objects Using the Duplicate Command 1 Select the objects 2 From the Edit menu select Duplicate Duplicating Objects Using DesignEditor To copy objects using DesignEditor see Changing Objects Order on page 53 Duplicating Objects Using the Step and Repeat Command Use Step and Repeat command to create multiple copies of objects in a precise position and arrangement You have the following patterns to select from e Block pattern with all copies aligned in a specified set of rows and columns ae abide ys Spacing Copics TJ haa lt Ls Control Point aaa sts E 1 E N H Ak i f 2 Y n M i _ ZO N WO Ni A A Bounding Box ip a f f tt 6 i f A 7 A
182. er RIP time If you have selected the Angled Screen dither type you can edit the dithering options for each color from the Separations tab See Setting Dither Options for Angled Screens page 321 for details Adding New Media Types to a Device The software allows you to add new media types to the list of media types for a given make and model of output device The new media type will only appear for that make and model of device not for all devices To add a new media type 1 Select a setup for the device you want to create a new media type for 2 From the Setup menu select Default Job Properties Select the Color Management tab a 4 From the Media Type list select Add Media a eee Name ee Driver Options Cancel 5 Enter a Name for the new media type The name can be up to 32 characters long and may not contain any wild card characters or 6 If desired click Driver Options to set the default driver options that will be used with this media type 7 Click OK Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 317 Removing Media Types To remove a media type that has been added for a certain output device select it in the Default Job Properties dialog and click Remove The default media types defined by the software cannot be removed Setting Ink Split Options The Ink Split Curve dialog allows you to set the points at which light or medium colored inks will be used instead of normal
183. eraavetervaninioented tee 143 Creating PAS cornrne a ose cuatinedee ceeds 144 Selecting Points and SEQMent ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 147 Using DesignCentral to Edit Points and Segments 05 148 Path Directi n creson aon ane tnccasededaccndetansenasadachacerancedeeeaceee 150 Editing PaSa a a a ey ewan 150 13 Working With BitMapS ccccsesseeeseesseeeeeeseeseenseeeeenseeees 163 Using DesignGenital ecules eel ie 164 creating BIMAS o co teasectatet kite r E AE 164 Changing Bitmap Properties ccccccccssececcceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeees 166 Using the Bitmap Toolbar ccccccccccccssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeees 169 Defining MarqueesS nnnsennneenenseneesereesrrrrsrrrrssrrrrsrrrrsrrrrerrrennne 170 Editing BIMA DSen E E scanseeeassed te 172 USINO EIG aesa E E oa 179 Trac No SIMA DS sat eE A 182 14 Working with Effects aasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 189 COMMON Features aeee a S 189 Using Combine Elects eca aA ateseych earings 189 Using the Outline Efesas e E E 193 Using the Shadow Effect ccccccccccecccceeseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 195 Using the Stripes Effect cccceeccccccceesseeeseeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeeeeaas 196 Using The Distort Effect cccccecccceccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeesaeeeeees 200 Using the Blending EEC srei a 202 Usmothe Lens EtG ties iceseccdstecenc inie aiia 202 Using the Underbase Effect
184. erall performance If this option is selected the software will ignore any overprint settings that may exist in PDF files it outputs If this option is selected the software will allow Send Now and Interactive operation from a remote design station lf Automatic tile flip is checked every other tile that is printed will be rotated 180 so that adjacent vertical edges are always printed with the same side of the print head This helps them match up cleanly Ho die Working with Setups Setups provide the link between the software and your output devices Each setup contains the following information e The type of output device being used Using Production Manager Page 269 e The method used to communicate with the device e Details of how incoming print jobs will be processed e The default job properties that will be applied to a new job Production Manager allows for multiple setups to be in use at the same time It is possible to have more than one setup for each output device This is useful because it allows you to configure each setup for a different purpose You can have one setup for printing proofs and another for final output for instance You can also have different setups for different output media Adding New Setups To add new setups 1 From the Setup menu select Change Setup or Add Setup ee Click the manufacturer and model of your setup Manufacturer Model name Asbru Sherpa 43 Brady
185. errosa a A 118 Changing Text Attributes Using DesignCentral cceee 120 Changing Text Attributes Using Control Points cccceee 123 Page ii Contents Editing POX sasse e 126 Editing Tex ccena asa iuecas ate senabaaceasucteestomedsamncace 127 EIS CHING OK eea Ge cosiceaceveect bcs siahuarn side deactacegeeee reseaeees 127 Changing Text Attributes ccitc cc c0 cec iieiea iaie 128 Changing Default Text Settings cccccceeeeeccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 129 Finding and Replacing 3 ss2c censsteecccocecssesedevesedcodtcsnca neers einscuesetewons 129 SDEll GHECKING ce ces aacanadencdiedexsducecdssudiasesnaedecubueleeaiedsebdeRageteicesdian 130 Changni CASO ere ance te cet so R tata 130 Changing KErniNg sertesa a esses eaace cae O 130 Breaking and Joining Text tice tAssncisinddisnealiciaeugcietak 132 Changing Text Orientation cccccccccceseseseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 133 Adjusting Text BIOCK SIZE ceinion oasian uhinei tes 133 Working With Braille Text ccccceccecsseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeseeeesseeeeesaees 133 Working With Barcodes ccccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeceeseaaeeeeeeeaaees 134 Working With Special Characters cccccccccceesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 136 Working With Text Styles cccccccccsssseeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeees 137 TOXIPMETSICN CCS or E E cn AEE EEEE 138 Working WIth FONIS cassiane e aces 140 12 Working with PathS isasi coves cette
186. erties in Production Manager Page 303 Workflow Tab The Workflow tab displays settings related to the time and order that the job will be processed in After Output Send Comments Preset 6 a elam ole le Job name CutContourMonaLisa eps Path D Pictures Classics Setup Hybrid Device After output Send Print and contour i Priority Medium Print after Comments Sets what to do with the job after output Delete Hold Archive Removes jobs from the queue after output Places jobs in the Hold Queue after output or at the bottom of the queue Saves the job after output Sets what part of a combination print and contour job will be output This control will only appear for hybrid devices Print and contour Print only Contour only The job will be printed and then the contour will be cut Only the printed part of the job will be output Only the contour will be cut Use this space to enter comments about the job Select a preset set of job properties or save the current job properties as a preset See Working with Job Property Presets page 298 for details Page 304 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Color Management Tab The Color Management tab displays the settings related to the printing device The layout of this tab may differ depending on the output device 4 6 G e S e Preset Use Default Job Properties M
187. es Show layer All outlines are displayed using the layer color See color Changing the Layer Color on page 51 about how to change the layer s color Show fill color The outlines are displayed using the object s original fill color Show path The outlines are displayed using three colors Green direction for clockwise paths Magenta for counter clockwise paths and Gray for open paths Selected objects will still be displayed using the layer color es lee yy fe Show Fills Show Fills Show Fills Enabled Disabled Disabled Show Disabled Show Show fill color layer color path direction To change the way the outlines are displayed Double click the Fill Mode tool and select the Wireframe option Or 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences command Getting Started Page 15 2 Click Tools Tab 3 Select Show Fills in the list 4 Select the Wireframe option 5 Click OK Showing Path Directions The direction in which the path will be cut or plotted is determined by the path direction See Path Direction on page 150 about how to change the path direction You can visualize the path direction using Show path direction mode as described in previous item or show direction arrows in each path To show or hide the direction arrows 1 From the View menu select Show Path Direction 2 Select the object Paths with direction arrows Preview
188. etermines how the shadow is cut out by the original Working with Effects Page 195 The following relief modes are available for each shadow Block and Perspective shadows AAAAA None With backing Offset Surround Offset backing Surround Drop shadows AAAA None With backing Overlap Offset relief Offset backing Surround Cast shadows AI PAI AI AI None backing With backing Overlap Offset relief You can see the difference when backing is applied if you separate the shadow from its original object ANAL No backing With backing Adjusting Shadows Using Control Points Click and drag the shadow to adjust the height ratio and slant angle cast shadow horizontal and vertical offset other shadows or perspective ratio perspective shadow Using the Stripes Effect Use the Stripe effects to apply stripes to any vector objects There are three types of stripes that can be applied Radiant Stripes Circular Stripes Gradient Stripes Page 196 Working with Effects Applying Stripes to Objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu select Stripe 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral Adjusting Radiant Stripes Using DesignCentral When radiant stripes are applied to objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral E a Number of stripes on the object rid poog Determines the percentage of the image that is covered with stri
189. ettings The Copies group box allows you to set the number of copies and the spacing between them Ao f The number of copies Dp 0 100in The amount of space between the copies Printing your Design Page 245 Copy The copies are Spacing automatically positioned to optimize the media usage Automatic Tile Flip If Automatic tile flip is checked every other tile that is printed will be rotated 180 so that adjacent vertical edges are always printed with the same side of the print head This helps them match up cleanly i Se Positioning Tools The Positioning tools allow you to rotate mirror or position the job The job is placed at specified distances from a the right edge and the leading edge of the media The job is centered on the leading edge of the media E O4 F The job is centered in the length and width of a themedia T tO The job is placed at specified distances from the left edge and the leading edge of the media Page 246 Printing your Design Rotate the job in 90 degree increments F J Mirror the job vertically Viewing Tools The viewing tools allow you to manipulate the job on the preview area k Changes the position of the job on the media by clicking and dragging the job preview e Zooms in or out Hold the CTRL key to Zoom out B Return the preview area to the default view amp Zoom to fit all objects into the preview area
190. ew Name Part for the color or click Delete to remove the color from the Color Library You can also measure a new color using a measurement device and replace the selected color Working with Color Page 93 5 Click Save to save the changes If this button is unavailable click another color in the list Creating Test Swatches The software has the ability to automatically create the following sets of test swatches Duotone CMYK Current Palette This set of swatches shows all of the duotone colors that can be created using the i i i i F spot colors in the swatch tables you have t ee open keee e a j wi RE EEEES j n Sn eenee wets sien M te ee ee NN on BEERS 8 This set of swatches shows all of the CMY color combinations currently available plus the range of black values 4 M a a a CJ Y vr omy N H ui i ba F y om pa PPT a H a f j Shw This set of swatches lists of all the colors in Besom Mw os your current palette aee Mee Hmon tOn hd Moan il hecim Green E creen E miami Green Yebw ume armen E Pais Green D Runt Orange Manii Yoliow How E Saimon Pink Burro BR eek Mow Write To create a swatch table 1 From the View menu select Create Swatch then either Duotone CMYK or Current Palette 2 Adjust the following settings in DesignCentral 4 E ft I The size of each swatch The amount of space taken up by the labe
191. f the output medium Proportional When this option is selected the height and width of the job are increased or decreased together to keep the original proportions intact Position These settings change the position of the job on the media Page 302 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page Nesting FIR wj E i a a The distance between the job and the right and OH bottom margins of the printable area ge Places the job at the specified distances from the i lower and right edges of the printable area of the output medium Centers the job along the width of the printable area i Centers the job in the middle of the printable area a Only available for sheet material The number of copies to be output The amount of space that will exist between the various tiles copies and or nested jobs that will be output as part of the job If checked you can specify the range of pages that will be output for a multi page job Format is x y Also accepts to put in multiple ranges Ex 5 Prints page 5 2 5 Prints pages 2 3 4 and 5 3 5 10 Prints pages 3 5 6 7 8 9 and 10 If checked the pages tiles and color separations of the job will automatically be nested Flips the selected image on the vertical axis so that your image will be mirrored when printed Rotates image on the media in 90 degree increments Click the button until you achieve the desired orientation Setting Job Prop
192. files in Casfont format A On the Macintosh this folder is called CASMate Fonts Contains color printer drivers Contains the characters defined by user See page 136 Contains density adjustment files There are subfolders for each printer manufacturer and printer model Contains dictionary files used by spell checker See page 130 Contains file import filters Contains the forms used in Job estimation Contains font files in FSfont format E On the Macintosh this folder is called Flexi Fonts Contains Help manual and read me files Contains ICC Calibration files There are subfolders for each printer manufacturer and printer model Used by Production Manager to store Job files There are subfolders for each printer manufacturer and printer model Contains the CSM and DLL drivers for printers and plotters Contains DLL modules used by your software Not used Appendix B Installation Page 331 Profiles Contains the workspaces files used to define the user interface See page 20 Program Contains the main modules of your program Samples Contains the sample files in several formats as FS TIFF JPEG EPS etc Shapes Contains the definition files for parametric shapes See page 110 Styles Contains the text styles defined by user See page 138 Swatch Contains the swatch tables and color libraries Temp Contains temporary files created during processing Templates Contains templates URWFont
193. fy When a 6 0006 Specify is selected the Line Spacing field is Vertical Text enabled and you can specify the amount of space between lines This field is not available for Horizontal and Vertical Path Text The following attributes are available in DesignCentral Paragraph Tab Horizontal Text Vertical Text tui o ab cd ioy Horizontal Text 0 0 Vertical Text Edit Paragraph Tab Click these buttons to justify the selected horizontal text to the left center or right Click these buttons to fully justify the text by changing the character and word spacing Word spacing only Character width or Character size You can also specify the paragraph width and if this setting will be applied to the last line of each paragraph Click these buttons to justify the selected vertical text to the top center or bottom Click these buttons to arrange the horizontal text from left to right as in standard writing or from right to left Click these buttons to arrange the vertical text from top to bottom or from bottom to top Click these buttons to select the order the lines of selected horizontal text in the paragraph top to bottom or bottom to top Click these buttons to select the order the lines of selected vertical text in the paragraph right to left or left to right Amount of spacing between words in the text The word spacing can be displayed in units in cm mm or as a percenta
194. g select the job and do one of the following e Double click on the job e From the File menu select Job Properties e Right click on the job and select Job Properties from the context menu 2 6 a 7 e 12 m Media size eoon foon E 0 000 I foon Ey foon H m Job size i es E fi 2 570in a f 00 000 E EJ f 3 479in A 1 f 00 000 H f Fit to media Z Proportional Ss acc ne 10 000in ila ga ft 2 ap oon Page range a Page nesting Reset Set Defaut Send L ox Cancel The left side of the dialog contains the tabs on which the job properties can be set The right side contains a preview pane that displays the job as it will appear on the output medium Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 297 Setting the Preview Pane View Select one of the three available views from the list at the top of the preview pane Page Displays each page of the job scaled to fill preview the preview area If there is more than one page in the job a list of the page numbers will appear above the preview allowing you to select the page to display Selected automatically when the Workflow Color Management Printer Options Cut or Color Adjustment tab is selected Layout Displays the job as it will appear on the preview output medium The preview is scaled so that the output medium fills the preview area Selected automatically w
195. g length and angle sherawat 153 Dre aking onenei 159 change direction 150 change start point 157 Creatine erie 144 CUMING 42st Beets 158 direction cccccseeeeeeeeees 16 AitO ate sesrcccasnsarecicn ences 148 JON DAU ea 159 make AIC ccccceeeeeeees 156 make right angle 160 optimize by 3 point arc 156 optimize by curve 155 optimize by smooth arc 155 reduce points 0 156 remove tiny objects 160 removing points 157 removing self intersections E A E E EE 157 repeating 153 rounding corners 154 selecting 147 separating to open paths 158 sharpening corners 154 spacing points 152 Straightening 006 150 patern AM nei aseeimeesectetiee 98 pencil tOOl seeeeeeeeeees 174 percent calculation 21 perceptual rendering intent 221 perspective shadow 196 picturecut tracing 185 point reduction 06 156 points AGING sicescccwssestctvenstaanetes 157 DIC AKIN Ge ctciectectne teeters 159 FEMOVING 0eececeeeeeeeeees 157 DOIYQONS cccccseeeeeeeeeeees 108 editing oe sscecarseectectciacerceie 112 DONS moann EaR 2 3 positioning jobs 5 302 preferences cccceseeeeeeees 22 ClCQNING tint cseecehentsasca 5 presets COISING PPPE chee sssorerete 300 editing zorana 299 OXPOFTING cccseseeeeeee
196. g the Item List The Estimation Editor allows you to customize your prices to correspond to your normal charges Once you make a change using the Estimation Editor it is reflected every time you insert an item that uses the data you changed You can customize the items list to match your needs 1 From the Edit menu click Job Estimation 2 Select the Estimation Editor Tab 3 Select the Category type that will be changed The following types are available Built In ltems that are automatically computed based on the design information such as working time and number of colors Color Printing Items used in color printing Material Area Computes based on the size of the drawing objects Services Single item charges and non automatic items Substrate Computes based on drawing size Text Size Computes based on the number and size of each character 4 You can create a new category by clicking the New button Clicking Delete button will delete a category and all its types and items 5 Tocreate or delete an item or type inside the selected category click the buttons described below New Item Click this button and type the new item name to add a new item to the Item list Page 36 Working with Files ti Delete Item New Type Delete Type Select an item in the list and click this button The item is deleted from the list Click this button and type the new type name to adda new item to the Type list Select a type
197. ge See Text Preferences on page 138 about how to change the display mode Click this button to display a dialog box where you can retype the selected text The same dialog box will be displayed if the text is selected and you double click the text tool The following attributes are available for horizontal and vertical block text only f 1 856cm This field allows you to specify the width of the block Page 122 Working with Text where the horizontal text will be restricted E 28 498cm This field allows you to specify the height of the block where the vertical text will be restricted E oem S This field allows you to specify the indent for the first line Horizontal Text of the block text M fo 000cm Vertical Text The following attribute is available for horizontal and vertical path text only E Click this button to move the text to the opposite side of the path The following attributes are available on the DesignCentral Arc Tab and are available for Arc text only T j1573cm Defines the radius of the circle where the text will be placed A par Starting position of the text in the arc This starting angle is related to the Alignment position For example if you want the center of the text to be placed in the top of the circle select Align Center and enter a value of 90 degrees in this field ab ab ab Position of the first line of the text on the arc ab ab Starting position of
198. ges Preview When this option is checked you will see a preview while adjusting the parameters 4 Click Apply x Sharpen Filter This filter focuses blurry images by increasing the contrast of adjacent pixels 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Filters and then select Sharpen 3 Adjust the filter settings in DesignCentral Amount and Radius Higher values in these fields will produce more sharp images Preview When this option is checked you will see a preview while adjusting the parameters 4 Click Apply x Level Filter This filter shows a histogram that graphically represents the colors present in the image Peaks indicate color density By moving the sliders inwards it is possible to redefine the black and white points in the bitmap 1 Select the bitmap Page 180 Working with Bitmaps 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Filters and then select Levels 3 Adjust the filter settings in DesignCentral e Select RGB on the list to adjust all RGB channels at once If you want to adjust one specific color channel select Red Green or Blue e Click and drag the sliders under the histogram or enter the values in the numeric fields e Click the Auto button and the software will automatically define the black and white point in each channel and then redistribute the intermediate pixel values proportionately e Click the Reset button to restore the sliders to their original position e When
199. gnCentral When outlines are applied to objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral Contour Select the effect type between Contour Outline and Inline 00cm width of the outline jar Ocem Distance between outlines E Number of outlines O This option allows you to choose between using the same color for each outline generated or to create a gradient of colors for each outline created Working with Effects Page 193 Outlines with same color Gradient Outlines a Oo Allows you to select to create a backing behind the original object This option is only available when the distance between outlines is zero M The outline color ir mal t Select the appropriate Joint Type option to specify how corners are outlined AAA Round Joint Type Bevel Joint Type Miter Joint Type A 4 000 Controls the sharpness of the corners Select the appropriate Line Cap style option to specify how open paths are outlined Choose from Round Square or Butt cap styles Round Cap Style Square Cap Style Butt Cap Style Keep Original If checked the original object will remain along with the outline If cleared the original object will be deleted Adjusting Outlines Using Control Points When you apply an outline a reference line is displayed with control points You can adjust some of the attributes by dragging the control points Click and drag the Width Width
200. h the original image Colors that fall outside of the output device s gamut are clipped This method may reduce the total number of colors available The white point of Relative Colorimetric is always zero This intent is similar to Relative Colorimetric but has a different white point value Absolute Colorimetric represents colors relative to a fixed white point value of D50 For example the white of paper A will be simulated when printing on paper B This intent is best for color proofing This intent was created to supplement the Saturation intent Spot Color maps colors similarly to the Saturation rendering intent but Spot Color rendering intent produces the greatest saturation possible and should not be used with photographic images The object will be printed without any color correction Using Pure Hue Settings The Pure Hue buttons allow you to specify that certain color channels should not be mixed in with other colors when the job is rendered These settings can be different for each of the 4 types of object For instance if a job contains yellow text you could check the Pure Hue setting on the yellow color channel for text so that no other colors appear in the yellow text To adjust the Pure Hue settings for a type of object 1 Click the Pure Hue button next to the object s rendering intent Configuring the System for Color Printing Page 221 T Cyan Magenta T Yellow Black Red Green Blue White
201. h tiles I Print color bands g 4 F 4 Color Select the ink that will be used to print labels and marks Width Sets the width of the labels Print Labels This option must be checked to have access to label printing options Position Select where to print labels relative to the job Font and Size Allows you to select a font and font size Printer Name Prints your printer name on printout Resolution Prints the resolutions settings on printout Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 311 Print Marks Page 312 ICC output Profile Tile Number Overlap Job name size and type Dither type Starting time of RIP Page number Number of Copies Notes Allows you to select type of crop marks to be used on printout Prints the ICC output profile used on the printout Prints the tile row and column number Prints the overlap distance between tiles Prints the job name size and type on the printout Print the selected dither type on the printout Prints the time that the RIP process started on printout Prints the page number for a multiple page file Prints the number of copies made on printout Allows you to print a text note on printout 3 Only the crop mark supported by the output device will appear in the list None Vertical Mark Horizontal Mark Vertical Corner Mark No print marks Alignment marks will be printed along the right hand vertical edge of the jo
202. hapes ile i a E pe iT ee ee Arow Tx y o a Parametro Shape x o x J o o gt ConverttoShape x x x Working with Text TextBlock Size J x o x J J S x Barcode o do ox o S S o o a Pe ee Ss x x x nsert Symbol X X X x x x x Text Styles x x x x x x xX xX xX x x x x lt x at x lt lt X X x lt lt X X lt x lt lt Xx lt x lt lt Xx lt x lt lt Xx x lt x lt x lt i O O O Define Character C a a ees URW Font Support Working with Bitmaps ceann ee Ee Creating New Bitmaps x x xT J x Appendix D Features List Page 337 posae marr mao ane mono x i Resample xT Fitters xP Marquee xT X X X X X X X Working with Effects Fuse Separate Overlap Stripe Blend Lens Underbase W W ii Color Trapping Graphic Styles X X X X X X X i J Contour x Working with Measurements and Labels Dimensions Labels x x x J x Automatic Dimension x x x f x DimensiontoPage x L x x x Configuring the System for Color Printing Color Settings J o x Coo So S o o SoftProot do ox o S S o o o RiPandPrint xT Cutting your Design Cupit x Using Production Manager Nesting Tx i a e a e Output Size Compensation x PrintwhileRIPing x J xT CASmate Tracing Features BezierTracing xT Enhanced Curves Tracing x x x x x Enhanced Corners Tracing x x x x x
203. he Clear Transform function 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu click Clear Transform Page 78 Arranging Objects 8 Working with Color Your software provides you with an array of powerful tools for applying color In this section you ll learn how to apply color to an element in your design Each object in your design can have a Fill color and Stroke color Fill Color Red Stroke Color Black The Fill Color can be a Solid Color Pattern or Gradient gt a 2a 2 2 a a a a as a 2 Sl a gt a gt a 2 n a a a Solid Pattern l Gradient Available Color Models Colors can be defined using the following models RGB The color is expressed as a combination of red green and blue values This is the color model most commonly used for computer graphics CMYK The color is expressed as a combination of cyan magenta yellow and black values This is the color model most commonly used in color printing LAB The CIE LAB model is a device independent color model that expresses color using a luminance value and two chrominance values HSB The color is expressed using values for hue saturation and brightness Spot The color is selected from a number of lists of standard ink or ribbon colors provided by established suppliers Duotone Duotone colors are made by overlaying two spot colors The color that is printed first is called the base color and the color that is printed on t
204. he object and places it in the new location e Right clicking while dragging displays a menu with the following options fe fe fe fe Move and Insert Move and Replace Copy and Insert Copy and Replace 3 Release the mouse button when the object immediately under the object to be stacked is highlighted Renaming Objects To rename an object in DesignEditor Objects Tab 1 Click the object in DesignEditor Objects Tab 2 Click the same object again 3 Type the new name Using DesignEditor Page 53 Applying Effects When you move an object underneath an effect that effect is applied to the object This can be useful when you have applied a number of effects to a particular object and want to apply those same effects to another object To do this simply move the object within the hierarchy of the effect or group of effects that you want to apply When you apply effects in this way they are applied to the objects underneath them as a group It is not the same as individually selecting an object and re applying the same effects Layers Objects H E Master Page Page 1 E E Outline 45 1 Objects Click and a Drag H B Master Page El Ey Page 1 EG Layer 1 Outline 46 2 Objects E Rectangle 35 Page 54 Using DesignEditor 6 Selecting Objects There are several ways to select objects from the most basic point and click method to sophisticated selection criteria Selected objec
205. he object is filled with a gradient which is a combination of two or more colors so that one color blends smoothly with the next one in increments For more information about how to set the object s fill see Working with Color on page 79 E No Fill Solid Fill Pattern Fill Gradient Fill Applying No Fill to an Object To apply the No Fill fill type to an object 1 Select the object 2 Inthe Fill Stroke Editor select No Fill or click on the E swatch in the color palette Using Fill Stroke Editor Page 97 Applying a Solid Fill to an Object To apply a solid fill to an object 1 Select the object 2 Inthe Fill Stroke Editor select Solid Fill ES Soia fil Red L_ W wireframe Advanced Select the color of the fill from the list 4 If desired check Wireframe to make the object show up as an outline drawn in the color of the fill This setting will override the outline settings for the object sit O Solid Fill with Wireframe enabled 5 Click Advanced to edit the fill color using the Color Specs dialog For more information about the Color Spec dialog see Defining Colors Using the Color Specs Dialog on page 87 You can also apply a solid fill by selecting the object and clicking on a solid colored swatch in the color palette Applying a Pattern Fill to an Object To apply a pattern fill to an object 1 Select the object 2 Inthe Fill Stroke Ed
206. hed out it may be because the Soft Proof feature is on Soft Proof is Off Soft Proof is On To accurately preview the colors you have to set up the correct Color Profiles and Rendering Intents that will be used in printing See Configuring the System for Color Printing on page 219 for more details Getting Started Page 17 Filtering Objects by Color Objects may be filtered by their color in the design area For example you can show all objects using RGB color space or all green objects To filter objects using the Color Filter 1 From the View menu select View Filter 2 Select the colors that will be visible e Click the color space checkbox to select all colors from this color space e Click the specific color within one color space to select or unselect this color e Click Show All to select all colors from all color spaces e Click Show None to unselect all colors from all color spaces 3 Click OK Filtering settings will not be saved with your document The next time you open this file all objects will be visible You can also filter objects by color using the context menu in the Color Swatch table 1 Place the cursor over the color in the Swatch Table 2 Right click the Swatch Table A menu is displayed 3 From the View menu select the filtering option The following options are available Hide This Color Objects using this color will not be visible Show This Color Objects using this col
207. hem in your document Bitmap Parsed PostScript OLE object object object Creating New Documents To create a new document From the File menu select New Opening Files To open an existing file 1 2 From the File menu select Open Select the file format folder and the file that will be opened See Appendix C Supported File Formats at page 333 for all supported file formats Click Open If the file contains fonts that are not installed in your system a dialog box will appear allowing you to select a replacement font Working with Files Page 27 Double clicking the file icon in Windows Explorer or dragging the file icon to your software icon on desktop will start the application and open the file i Double click to open the file eeeeee very ee 2 30RNE TTT SES FFP ecsrs err es ees i 2 ees rE gt FTE az a amp i a r r TSE l gt b DUCOVEEP basaaseasassaas Importing Files To import an existing file into the current document 1 From the File menu select Import 2 Select the file format folder and the file that will be imported See Appendix C Supported File Formats at page 333 for all supported file formats 3 Click Import A bounding box will be displayed TAB key changes the position of the cursor on the bounding box ESC key stops the import operation 4 Click the design area and place the imported object If the file contains fonts that a
208. hen multiple jobs with the same priority are waiting in the queue the job that was received first will process first Aborting the Processing of a Job To abort the processing of a job while it is being RlPed or printed do one of the following e Select the job and from the File menu select Abort e Select the job then click on the Abort button in the toolbar e Right click the job then select Abort from the context menu e Drag the job back into the Hold Queue with the mouse If a job is aborted while being RIPed its status is set to Aborted It will need to be RIPed again before it can be printed If a job is aborted while being printed its print status freezes at 0 Outputting Test Jobs The software allows you to output print and or contour cut test jobs to appropriate output devices Outputting a Test Print Job To print a test job 1 Select the setup you want to send the test job to 2 From the Setup menu select Test Print Outputting a Test Cut Job To output a test cut job 1 Select the setup you want to send the test job to 2 From the Setup menu select Test Cut Page 278 Using Production Manager Nesting Jobs Production Manager has the ability to nest jobs together in order to minimize the amount of material needed to output the jobs Nesting reorganizes the jobs on the output medium so that they line up across the media width and are packed into as compact an area as possible Jobs must be i
209. hen the Layout Labels or Separations tab is selected Tiling Displays the job with the outlines of the tiles Preview that it will be broken up into superimposed over the image Selected automatically when the Tiling tab is selected Working with Job Property Presets Job property presets allow you to save all of the job property settings for a common type of job and reapply them in a single step The only settings that are not saved are those that pertain to job size width height scale width amp height page range and tiling Presets are created and applied using the Presets list on the Color Management tab of the Job Properties dialog You can save up to 30 different presets Page 298 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Read Only Presets It is possible to create presets that cannot be edited by the user This prevents the presets from being accidentally changed These presets are called read only presets Read only presets appear with square brackets around their name like this Read Only Preset To make a preset read only export it to a file using the Export as Read Only option then import the preset back into the application While Read only presets cannot be edited they can be deleted except for the Use Default Job Properties preset Creating Presets To save the current job properties as a new preset 1 From the Preset list select Save as Iv Layout Iv Work flow OK I C
210. ht Cyan Light Magenta Medium Cyan and Medium Magenta inks CMYKMcMmoOrGr CMYK plus Medium Cyan Medium Magenta Orange and Green inks Pig Pigment based ink Dye Dye based ink 2Bit Indicates degrees of variable 8Bit dot size variable dot DPI Select the output resolution A higher DPI value improves the resolution of the job but slows down the output Dither type Select the dithering for the output Dither Type is the pattern in which the individual dots that make an image are applied to the media Each dither type has advantages in terms of quality and RIP speed The default dither type is usually the best setting for your machine The software offers several dithering options to optimize your output Usually quality and speed are in tradeoff with KF Diffusion offering the highest quality and the LX Diffusion or FMxXPress offering the fastest processing times The available patterns in descending order of quality are KF Diffusion This is an enhanced version of the error diffusion method While it takes longer to RIP 5 6 times more than FMXPress it provides the highest detail and contrast for most inkjet printers Error This method produces high quality images Diffusion The enhanced image quality requires intensive processing 3 4 times more than FMXPress and the time it takes to RIP a file using this method is the second longest of the available options Random A balance between image quality and
211. i F i JAn Preview H 10 250in bali x Original Object Arranging Objects Page 65 e Diagonal pattern with all copies aligned in a diagonal line Spacing Copies ee E Control Point ma a aa aee dale hk ated bi ade Bo j 7 z Bounding Box f a A N Preview Hi 0250n H in ZN T iSi Original Object or eee Seer eee rte ett te eee eee e Circular pattern with all copies aligned over an arc A Fi l 5 n 1 1 Ae A fe fj a N s S 7 NS Are or Circle soe r n be po EN LN i e A ai fi A for Original _ i gt Preview Object E gt 30 0 1 A x A f2500in 4 i al Pan Y Tl Rotate objects wv N x xi 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu select Step and Repeat command 3 Select the proper Tab in DesignCentral 4 The following values can be adjusted in DesignCentral a Number of horizontal copies Number of vertical copies a s Number of diagonal copies a e Number of circular copies H 11 426cm HS Horizontal spacing T fi0ag6cm Vertical spacing Dp When this option is selected the distance is measured from the right top side of one object to the left bottom side of the next object op When this option is selected the distance is measured from the left bottom side of one object Page 66 Arranging Objects to the left bottom side of the next object amp
212. iEXPERT FlexiSIGN FlexiLETTER FlexiDESIGNER FlexiCUT FlexiENGRAVE PhotoPRINT Server PhotoPRINT PhotoPRINT SE EnRoute Pro EnRoute Plus EnRoute EnRoute Machine Shop and or other Scanvec Amiable products referenced herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Scanvec Amiable Inc Illustrator is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated FreeHand is a registered trademark of Aldus Corporation CorelDRAW is a trademark of Corel Systems Corporation AppleTalk ImageWriter LaserWriter and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective owners Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its Page viii License Agreementinstalling the Software subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated or its subsidiaries and may be registered in certain jurisdictions Scanvec Amiable Inc International Plaza Two Suite 625 Philadelphia PA 19113 1518 License Agreement for Users of Adobe Configurable PostScript Interpreter and Coded Font Programs 1 Licensor grants to Licensee a nonexclusive sublicense subject to Paragraph 7 below and the other provisions hereof a to use the CPSI Application Object Software solely for Licensee s
213. iable Amiable CMS Color Management System Select the linearization table to use Two printer simulation allows you to simulate the output of one printer on another printer You can simulate the output of an expensive printer on a less expensive printer for instance or simulate a large format job on a small format printer Select a printer to simulate the output of Select None to disable printer simulation In order to appear in the list a printer must meet the following conditions e t must have an output device setup in Production Manager e It must have color correction turned on in the default job properties e An ICC profile must be present and selected Printer simulation does not support the spot color rendering intent If you try and output an object that has been assigned the spot color rendering intent while using printer simulation an error message will be displayed Click to set the ink limits for the output device Ink limits Cyan J Light Cyan wns Magenta Light Magenta fi oa fellow Black Ink Spit ok Cancel Set the ink limit for each color of ink to the maximum percent coverage that the device can output without causing bleeding or drying issues then click OK Click Ink Split to determine when a light or medium colored ink will be used instead of the normal ink This feature is only present for output devices that use light or medium colored inks See Setting
214. ield A Percentage 20 Percentage 50 Percentage 80 ZAI Angle 45 degrees Angle 90 degrees Angle of the stripes D Q D Q Q Q dp Determines the degree of the gradient expressed as a percentage from 0 to 100 This value is disabled when Even Stripes and Gap is selected in Gap mode field Even Stripes The stripes and gap width is constant and Gap Vary Stripes The stripe and gap width has a gradient and Gaps effect Vary Stripes The stripe width changes producing a gradient effect the gap width is constant Page 198 Working with Effects Vary Stripes mode Even Stripes and Vary Stripes and Gap Gaps Adjusting Gradiant Stripes Using Control Points You can also adjust some of the above fields dragging the control points e When Even Stripes and Gap mode is selected click and drag point 1 or 2 to change the stripe gap e When Vary Stripes and Gaps mode is selected click and drag point 1 or 2 to change the stripe gradient e When Vary Stripes mode is selected click and drag point 1 to change the stripe gap Click and drag point 2 to change the stripe gradient e Click and drag point 3 to change the stripe angle Hold down the SHIFT key to constrain the angle Adjusting Circular Stripes Using DesignCentral When circular stripes are applied to objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral E a a a Number of stripes on the obj
215. in the design area You can undock a toolbar making it a floating toolbar and then place it at any location in the design area Macintosh toolbars are always floating To undock a toolbar e Drag the toolbar from its docked position Do not drag buttons Or Double click the toolbar Do not double click buttons Dragging or double clicking the buttons will not undock or dock the toolbar IN 4 G G k T Ss g E C Double click or drag to undock the toolbar 2 2 A dia Docked Toolbars Undocked View Toolbar The shape of a floating toolbar can be adjusted by dragging its borders aoa Dakar rm amp BBMo Ha ww t3 i3 Ed A Q A Standard toolbar in different shapes The shape of a floating toolbar can be adjusted by dragging its borders When a button has a small triangle on upper right corner is an indication that this button is a part of a tear off palette To use the tools in a tear off palette 1 Click once on the button and drag it slightly to display the full palette 2 Once itis displayed you can either select the desired tool and release the mouse button displaying the new tool or you can drag the entire palette away from the original palette and release the mouse to drop it on the drawing area Page 8 Getting Started ay 4 4 6 8 T 4 4 6 8 T 4 4 6 8 m Te T poy froi A 2 a HEELE OELE a 7 a Original palette Dragging the tear off The new tool is palette and
216. in the list and click this button The type is deleted from the list To change one type select the type and item from the list and change the following fields Cost Markup Minimum One Time Unit Allows you to enter a new default cost per unit for the selected type Percentage of the items cost to include as markup for profit margin and to cover the cost of wasted materials Allows you to enter a new minimum charge for the selected type To remove the minimum charge enter zero 0 00 Use this option when a particular item will be charged only one time independently from the value set in Quantity field This is the unit of measure by which the row is calculated such as inches square foot or per hour day week or month You can print a list with all categories and their item and types clicking Print button Click OK Templates Templates allow you to Make multiple copies of your document using a pre defined layout e Create documents such as invoices based on Job Information Cr eating nanmanna INVOICE copies of a Z am document A The copies toe Sore are created e ii using the following ee pattern Gigo Taa 2 4 0 x 5 0 inches naaa j 025x35 mme inches 4 20x25 l inches Invoice created using the template feature THANK YOU FOR YOUR BUSINESS Working with Files Page 37 If necessary the original document will automatically be rotated t
217. ing Bitmaps You can display or hide bitmap images To show or hide the bitmap from the View menu select Preview Bitmaps Preview Bitmaps Enabled Preview Bitmaps Disabled Page 16 Getting Started Showing Preview When Show Preview is on a copy of the object as it is being edited or moved is displayed When this option is off a rectangle representing the bounding of the object is displayed Performing memory intensive operations in complex objects may slow the system performance when Show Preview is on To show or hide the preview from the View menu select Show Preview Previous Location be wemmweweeeewewewe see eeeeeeeen Moving an object with Show Preview Moving an object with Show Preview off on Redrawing the Design Area Occasionally when you edit your design those changes are not reflected accurately To make sure that the design area is fully updated select Redraw command from the View menu This forces a redrawing of the design area Previewing Objects in CMYK If you are going to print your document you can preview how your output will look by using the CMYK soft preview This feature will alter the colors in your document to show how they will look when printed The colors outside the CMYK gamut will be adjusted to the nearest possible CMYK color value To preview the colors in CMYK mode from the View menu select Soft Proof If objects in your document and the swatch table appear was
218. int where the label will end 5 Edit the label text in DesignCentral and press the ENTER key After creating the label you can adjust the following attributes in DesignCentral Font and style used Reeular TA 25 400mm Size of the font used a gt Arrow type used in the label line Advanced Click this button to access the advanced options You can adjust the following options using the Advanced Options dialog box Border Text When this option is on a box displays around the label text p p 50mm Arrow size 4 2 000mm Page 216 Working with Measurements and Labels Editing Dimension Lines After creating the dimension line you can adjust the following attributes in DesignCentral Font and style Regular LA 25 400mm al a EJee Arrow type used in both ends of the dimension EE line ea atk Linked When this option is checked if you resize the object that this dimension line is measuring the dimension value will automatically reflect the resizing Once you unlink this option you cannot revert it back to link again Size of the font When unlocked you can edit the dimension text in the field just above the padlock Arrow position The arrows can be inside or outside the sidelines Advanced Click this button to access the advanced options You can adjust the following options using the Advanced Options dialog box Prefix This text will be placed before the dimensio
219. intosh the Driver Options dialog is a separate tab in the RIP and Print Dialog There is no Driver Options button on the Macintosh RIP and Print Dialog Driver Tab The Driver tab is only present on the Macintosh Its contents are identical to the Driver Options dialog under Windows or the Print Options tab in the Job Properties dialog of Production Manager See Print Options Tab page 309 for details RIP and Print Dialog Color Tab The Color tab allows you to __ StHETPROWexscsi0 ex Job adjust the color PEIN General Panel Advanced Color A slider represents 1 0 0 0 1 0 each color channel Cyan iy Le of your output pE Io Magenta a E device Increase or 7 54 decrease the wast a ee density of ink for Black kaa any given channel Light Cyan en eee 0 00 by adjusting the eae ee T f Light Magenta sliders You can gt a also enter the E 7 aa values numerically Contrast in the edit boxes Falala Ce J oe All Allows you to quickly adjust all color channels as a group Contrast Adjusts the contrast of the image Reset Clicking this button will restore the settings to their original state Printing with Spot Colors Some printers support spot color inks Spot colors are used to reproduce colors that are difficult to produce using standard inks If your printer supports spot colors you can use the following steps to print them 1 Use the spot color swat
220. irectly over the target layer to indicate that the layer will be merged 3 Release the mouse button Changing the Layer Color Each layer is associated with a color For the Guide and Grid layers this color is used to show its objects For the Layers 1 2 3 this color is used to e Ifthe option Show Layer Color in Show Fill preferences see Showing Object s Fill on page 15 for more details is selected all objects are displayed using this color in wireframe mode Using DesignEditor Page 51 e The border of selected objects is displayed in this color e If the Show Preview option is off see Showing Preview on page 17 the preview for that layer is displayed in this color To change the color of a layer do one of the following e Drag any color from the Color Swatch and drop it directly onto the color icon on the DesignEditor Layer Tab dialog box e Open the Layer Properties dialog box and click the swatch then select a color from the list DesignEditor Objects Tab Every time you draw a shape create text or add any element to your design information about that element is stored in the Objects Tab of the DesignEditor e Each object is assigned a number to distinguish it from other objects of the same type e g Rectangle 1 2 3 e Objects are stacked in the order they are created with new objects being placed on top of older objects e Effects such as shadows stripes and outli
221. ished your password should appear in list in the optional password field Page 6 Installing the Software 2 Getting Started The illustration below shows some of the basic elements of your software EEX Main fie Edit View Arange Text Effects Bitmap Window Help l x Menu JOsaer ms DBoh sy EEEE AE a LRU 10 20 3 40 50 60 70 80 centimeters Di a i T y ed Rulers Standard Main Toolbar ca Borders 7 Toolbar 2 z 8 Design Area J View Toolbar Be Z T Scroll Bars a Swatch Table a rl ales Sea SC EAE El em Bc ee Os e CMI med Status aua 11900 Stroke J Fill 7 Bar Cursor Position Default Colors Basic Elements of your Software Toolbars Toolbars are a set of commands grouped according to their function r D hagati Ss Bere AF aak aa A M Standard toolbar To show or hide a toolbar 1 From the View menu select Toolbars 2 Check or uncheck the toolbars that you want to show or hide Or in Windows 3 Right click the area around the design area where the toolbars are docked 4 Inthe menu select or unselect the toolbar that you want to show or hide You can also hide a toolbar by clicking the Close button on the upper right side of the toolbar In Windows toolbars are docked or floating Docked toolbars are placed Getting Started Page 7 at fixed positions around the design area Floating toolbars can be placed anywhere
222. itor select Pattern Fill ES Patter fil Advanced 3 Select the pattern to be used from the ES list Page 98 Using Fill Stroke Editor 4 Select the background color from the L list Using Pattern Fill Advanced Settings When the Advanced button is clicked in Fill Stroke Editor Fill Tab for Pattern Fill the Advanced Settings dialog will be displayed Pattern name Tile size e in l t on 4 0 000 4 0 000in First tile offset a 0 000in qf 0 000in Tadd to swatch table Restore Defauits I Transform with object I I Proportional f Row Column Offset 0 0 Cancel The following parameters of the pattern can be adjusted in this dialog Pattern Name Name of the pattern The background color Ey 1500n Width of each pattern Ji 1 5000 Eoin Height of each pattern Proportional Check this option to assure that the pattern will be resized proportionally Offset E00 Amount of offset applied to each column or row wae lo 00n 4 a Space between rows lo niiin Space between columns i 0 0cm Horizontal offset applied to the first tile vie iem Vertical offset applied to the first tile Add to Swatch Table When this option is checked the edited pattern will be added to the swatch table as a new pattern Using Fill Stroke Editor Page 99 Transform with Object When this option is che
223. jects You can rotate or mirror objects by using the following methods Rotating Shearing and Mirroring Using DesignCentral Use DesignCentral to rotate objects to a precise numeric value 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu select Rotate command 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral E or New angle of selected objects 00 Shear angle that will applied to the selected objects eF F Rotates selected objects 90 degrees counter clockwise or clockwise Fa Mirrors selected objects horizontally or vertically we A copy of original object will be kept after rotatin peg nga or a A j 9 The point selected will be used as stationary j point 4 Click Apply v Rotating may also be done using DesignCentral but some of the above options may not be available Rotating and Shearing Dragging Control Points You can drag the Rotate and Shear control points around an object or a group of objects to rotate or shear them 1 Select the objects Arranging Objects Page 61 2 Click Rotate Tab in DesignCentral 3 Adjust the stationary point either by selecting one point in DesignCentral point grid or clicking and dragging the stationary point Holding the CTRL key while dragging the stationary point moves to a point of the point grid te o Rotate Control Shear Control i Point Point aor afl Fy Pia Point Grid 4 Position the cursor on a Rotate or Shear control point 5
224. justed in DesignCentral Rectangle For rectangles you can adjust the Height Width Corner type Regular Rounded Inverted or Clipped Corner radius and Inner Border Width The Corner radius is only available when the Rounded Inverted or Clipped type is selected O Oj i f 5 000cm fio lt a Regular with Inner Rounded without Inner Rounded Border Border A 0 000em Inner border 0 508 DesignCentral for Inverted without Inner Clipped with Inner Border Rectangle Border Circles For Circles you have the following modes and for each of them you have different parameters that you can adjust Working With Shapes Page 107 Center Radius You can adjust the X Y coordinates of the center and the radius that determine the circle s shape Two Point You can adjust X Y coordinates of the two points that determine the circle s shape Three Point You can adjust X Y coordinates of the three points that determine the circle s shape E al ES a a Ed ese WE ej ej Q Center Radius Two Point Three Paint x1 B5 000em 24 x1 45 000em 24 x1 45 000cm 24 v1 35 000cm f yi 35 000cm 24 yi 35 000cm 4 x2 e0 000em 24 x2 e0 000em 24 Oy 11 180em H ya 25 000em 4 ya 25 000em H aa 57 5000m 3 37 500cm DesignCentral for Circle Ovals For Ovals you can adjust the Height and Width Polygons For Polygons you can adjust the Height Width and the number of sides Starburst F
225. l Rectanele Selecting steps to Undo Cancel The Undo list after Undo Getting Started Page 19 After undoing multiple steps if you decide that you didn t want to undo those actions 1 From the Edit menu select Redo Multiple A list with undo steps is displayed 2 Click and drag to select the steps that you want to cancel the undo starting from the top The design area dynamically shows a preview 3 Click OK The number of undo and redo operations that is allowed can be adjusted For example if you set the number of steps to 50 after performing the 50 step the 1 step will be discarded and the 51 step will be placed at the top of the list To adjust the number of steps stored in undo list 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences 2 In General Tab enter the number of steps in Maximum undo redo 3 Click OK Repeating the Last Step To repeat the last step select Repeat from the Edit menu The name of the last operation will be displayed after the Repeat command Only the following commands can be repeated e Moving objects e Duplicating objects e Scaling objects e Applying effects Using Workspaces Workspace stores how and where the menus buttons commands and keyboard shortcuts are defined By changing the Workspace feature you can rearrange the software s interface to look more like the design software that you are more comfortable with To change the workspace from the File menu point
226. lor Mixer When multiple objects are selected the Color Mixer displays the color of the first object Use the list in the upper right corner of the mixer to specify a color model RGB CMYK LAB HSV Spot or Duotone Once you specify a color model to use there are several ways to specify a color in the mixer e Enter the numerical values or click the up down arrows on the right side of the numerical field e Click and drag the channel sliders Page 84 Working with Color LL R a e Click and drag the mouse over the color picker located at the bottom of the Color Mixer When you locate the color you want release the mouse button Using the Color Mixer it s possible to specify colors that are beyond the boundaries of the selected color space When you do this a warning icon is displayed next to the color swatch along with a small swatch that is actually a functional button Clicking the gamut correction button adjusts the color so that it fits within the target gamut After you click the button the color is redefined and both the icon and the gamut correction button disappear The warning icon only appears when Sarit you re viewing objects in RGB HSV or Correction LAB color space The software checks to Button see if the color you specified can be Warning reproduced in CMYK color space Icon accurately based on the currently active New Color Printer profile that you selected in the Color Settings dialog box f
227. lowing e From the View menu select Color then New Table e Right click on the default swatch table or any other open swatch table and select New Table If you create a new swatch table then try to exit the application without saving it you will be prompted to save the table to a file Saving a Swatch table to a File To save a swatch table to a file 1 Open the Save As dialog using one of the following methods e Right click on the table and select Save Table As e From the View menu select Color then Save Table As Select the table you want to save and click OK 2 Select the folder you want to save the table in 3 Enter a filename for the table and click OK Docked or Free Floating Swatch tables By default swatch tables are docked just above the status bar in the lower part of the screen To make a swatch table free floating click and drag it out of its position To return a table to the docked position drag it back down onto the status bar You can also double click on the title bar to dock a swatch table On the Macintosh all swatch tables are free floating and cannot be docked Changing the View of a Swatch table Each swatch table has two different views that it can display e Palette view displays all of the colors in the table as color swatches Swatch Table Gerber 230 Scotchcal Trns SSC Ce eee i Se CEA Se _ SSGEEES_B_e_See COLL a i I e List view displays a list of all of the colo
228. ls above and to the left of the swatch table The horizontal spacing between swatches The vertical spacing between swatches The number of swatches or sets of swatches per row Default The swatch table to list the colors from Current Palette only 3 Click Advanced to set advanced settings 4 Click Apply v The swatch table will appear in the lower left corner of the page Page 94 Working with Color Advanced Settings for Duotone Swatch Tables ee Color Label Top colors Base colors B Midnight Blue B E Reflex Blue S J Godi B Silver s Ei Forest Green Select All Clear All PM Midnight Blue B G amp Reflex Blue PP Godi Silver Ei Forest Green On the Color tab toggle the icon to the left of the spot color listings to determine whether the color will show up in the swatch table You can exclude colors from either the set of top colors or the set of base colors The color will appear in the swatch table The color will not appear in the swatch table On the Label tab select the font that will be used for the labels Advanced Settings for CMYK Swatch Tables cmyk Label On the cmyk tab enter the following settings Step The change in ink values between one swatch and the next Start End The lower boundary of the range of color values in the swatch table The upper boundary of the range of color values in the sw
229. ly the original changes to the bitmap returning it to its original state To erase a bitmap Erase to original 1 Select the bitmap 2 Select the Eraser tool E 3 Click and drag inside the marquee Use the Undo feature to remove bitmap editing errors Using the Paintbrush Tool The Paintbrush tool paints brush strokes on a bitmap The following options are available in DesignCentral In the Brush Tab you can select the shape and the size of the brush For more details see Changing the Brush on page 178 In the Paintbrush Options Tab the Opacity ICT determines the percentage of each stroke that willbe Z added to the bitmap image Lower numbers will Opacity create transparent strokes 100 S gt S 75 S gt S co 50 S m Paintbrush tab 25 p gt Working with Bitmaps Page 173 To draw a stroke using the Paintbrush tool 1 Select the bitmap 2 Select the Paintbrush tool J 3 Select the foreground color you want to paint in 4 Click and drag Using the Pencil Tool The Pencil tool will create freehand lines on a bitmap using the foreground color Following options are available in DesignCentral In the Brush Tab you can select the shape and the size of the pencil point For more details see Changing the Brush on page 178 In the Pencil Options Tab the Opacity determines EEEMEEEEE I the percentage of each stroke that will be added to w the bitmap image
230. m will centerline contours that are smaller Areas than the Line Width value and outline areas that are larger than this value Shortest This option is the minimum distance between segment length junctions The larger the parameter value is the more perfect the junctions will be However if you are working with an image that may have a lot of close lines you will want to keep the value small Shortest This option only applies when using Outline Thick centerline Areas It controls the centerline leftovers at the ends section of the outlines Joining Paths When creating a centerline you can select how you want the contours created The results of the centerline will look the same no matter which option is selected aia This option will create open contours that are made up None of small segments This option will create as many closed contours as Loops possible These contours can be filled later if necessary Page 340 Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features This option will generate the longest possible contours This is the most popular option because it minimizes the amount of up down movements that a router or engraver will have to make Long Paths Automatic This option will let your software determine what should be centerlined and what should be outlined The Outline Thick Areas option defaults to the Automatic setting Manual When this option is selected the Line Width value can be e
231. mance of the LPT port If checked the software will use the standard Windows LPT driver instead Performance will be diminished but reliability may be enhanced The following settings are enabled when the custom driver is in use Using Production Manager Page 273 TCP IP USB USBPIA USBSerial FireWire LPR FTP Page 274 Mode Use ECP Enhanced Capabilities Mode for the fastest possible transmission speed EPP Enhanced Parallel Port is not as fast but may be more compatible ECP Using DMA with ECP can uses increase the maximum bit rate DMA from 2 mbps to 4 mbps Yield if If checked the software will device release the extra system is busy resources used by the custom driver while the printer is busy This may aid overall performance Use this port if your output device supports network connection TCP IP The TCP IP address of the output address device required Port Number The port number used for printing to the output device Select from the list or enter a custom number USB drivers are provided with output devices that support them Please make sure the proper drivers are installed when using these ports Use this port if you are connecting to the parallel port of a device using a USB to Parallel adapter Use this port if you are connecting to the parallel port of a device using a USB to Serial adapter Please make sure the proper drivers are installed when using this port
232. many colors you want but you actually pick these colors in the image When you choose the Manual method the cursor changes to a pipette tool Click the colors in the image you want in the final results Any color you click on is added to the color list in the dialog box If you picked a color by mistake you can select this color in the dialog and press the DELETE key to remove it from the list After you posterize the image you may want to get rid of some colors For example an area in the image which looked Orange may become a mixture or pattern of yellow and red after posterization In this case you can merge these two colors in order to get one solid color for the whole area To merge colors 1 From the list of colors in the dialog select the colors you want to merge together Use SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple colors The color you want to be the result of the Merge must be selected last The result of the merge will be displayed in the lower right corner of the dialog Page 342 Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features 2 Click Merge All pixels in the image which have the selected color will be converted to the desired color Vectorize Once you are satisfied with the colors in the posterized image click the Vectorize button to vectorize the image into multiple color vector objects Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features Page 343 Page 344 Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features Appendix F
233. map Tab The Bitmap Tab will show some attributes of selected bitmaps On this tab you can change the resolution of the bitmap Changing the resolution will automatically change the bitmap s size Uncheck the Proportional option to set different resolutions for horizontal and vertical direction Profile Tab On this screen you can specify the Input profile and the Rendering intent that will be used as a settings to print this particular bitmap You can have independent settings for each bitmap For more information about Input profile and Rendering intent see Configuring the System for Color Printing on page 219 110 jet teag el Image Size eee pvc ee OE ee rs ee amp e Color Mode IV Color management File Size 1 MB Input profile Original ae aie ae 24 bity Color Depth Color Setting Default Resolution en Rendering intent Embedded File Location foo e x foo pE Resolution IV Proportional g Bitmap Tab Profile Tab Embedded ICC Profiles If the selected bitmap contains an embedded ICC MEMM profile it will be listed on the Profile tab of ju ajge ef e ETA V Color management To use the embedded ICC profile as the input Lia ei Use embedded ICC profile select Use Embedded ICC Profile from the Input profile list Embedded GER Embedded profiles are currently supported for TIFF Rendering intent and JPEG file formats Color zetting default Creating Bitm
234. mbly of the finished job See Tilemap Printing a Tile Map page 286 for details Reset The reset button will restore the original values and settings Dividing a Job Into Tiles The job starts as a single large tile that covers the entire job This tile is selected by default To divide the job into multiple tiles reduce the width and or height of the first tile using the 4 and tf fields in the Selected Tile section New tiles will automatically be created to cover the exposed areas of the job For instance to divide a 30x25 job into two vertical tiles set the 4 field to 15 reducing the size of the first tile to 15x25 A second 15x25 tile will automatically be created Using Production Manager Page 283 Dividing a Job into Uniform Rows and Columns of Tiles To divide the job into a specified number of uniform rows and columns of tiles 1 Check 1 or H to tile the job vertically or horizontally Enter the number of columns of tiles in the field Enter the number of rows of tiles in the H field a Set the amount of overlap between the tiles in the field Dividing a Job into Uniform Tiles of a Specified Size To divide the job into uniform tiles of a specified size Check and to set all tiles in the job to be of the specified size Set the and fields to the width and height desired for the tiles a s N 3 Set the amount of overlap between the tiles in the H field
235. mension tool allows you to create dimensioning lines between two points in your design The dimension lines can be horizontal 101 6 mm vertical or diagonal When you are creating a dimension label the Snap to Point feature is automatically enabled Sideline Trailing Arrow Zeros Sidal p Arrow g laeline Suffix Unit Dimension Value Prefix To create a dimension line 1 Select the Dimension tool 2 Click the point where the dimension line will start Either click the point where the dimension line will end or drag from the start point to the ending point As you move the cursor a line displays the direction you are moving 4 Click a third time to set the distance between the dimension line and the starting and ending points When you are creating a diagonal dimension line e Hold SHIFT to constrain the line angle to increments of 45 degrees e Hold CTRL to constrain the dimension lines to be perpendicular to the object Page 214 Working with Measurements and Labels Changing the Text Position of a Dimension Line The dimension text can appear either inside the dimension line or to either side depending on whether the third click was made below the dimension line or to one side 4 in lt 4 in gt 4 in To change the position of the dimension text double click the dimension line and select the circle next to the dimension text You can then drag the text around 8 ne a mp a Aut
236. ment the settings will be applied only for that particular document These settings are known as document preferences To change the program preferences from the Edit menu select Preferences Preferences General Tab In this dialog box you can set the general attributes of your software Maximum Determines the number of operations stored in the undo Undo Redo redo list Smaller values in this field use less memory Selection Determines how close the cursor must be from the Tolerance object to select it Setting a larger value makes it easier to select points Constrain Sets the constrain angle when you rotate an object with Angle the SHIFT key pressed The rotation will be performed in increments defined by this field Save Open documents will be periodically saved You can Documents specify the time period between saves Every Trash Capacity Number of objects that can be saved in the trash layer Page 22 Getting Started Precision Number of decimals in numeric fields Restore Click this button to restore the default settings for above Defaults fields Preferences File Path Tab In this dialog box you can set the default folders used in your software Document The default folder used to store your documents Temporary The default folder used to create temporary files If you Files have multiple hard disks select a folder in the hard disk with more free space available Adobe Plug If you have the Adobe
237. mentation 6 General If you are a U S Government end user this License of the Software conveys only RESTRICTED RIGHTS and its use disclosure and duplication are subject to Federal Acquisition Regulations 52 227 7013 c 1 ii This License will be construed under the laws of the State of Pennsylvania except for that body of law dealing with conflicts of law if obtained in the U S or the laws of jurisdiction where obtained if obtained outside the U S If any provision of this License is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law that provision of this License will remain in full force and effect Copyright 2002 by Scanvec Amiable Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopy recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the publisher Printed in the United States of America The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Scanvec Amiable Inc Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions PostScript software Copyright 1984 1998 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Flexi FlexiFAMILY FlexiSIGN Pro FlexiSIGN Plus Flex
238. mmand Masking Objects Masking is the process of clipping objects vector or bitmap objects to a shape of a vector object A mask can be described as a window that you look through to see the objects beneath it Everything outside the mask will be hidden The topmost object is the mask If you want to use more than one object as a mask you must group them first A bitmap object that has been masked cannot be traced Before tracing the bitmap it must be unmasked To create a mask Page 70 Arranging Objects 1 Select the objects The topmost object will be used as a mask 2 From the Arrange menu point to Mask and then select Mask command The Mask ABC and the that will be masked e bitmap The masked image Unmasking objects will return the objects to its original shape and size To unmask objects 1 Select the masked object 2 From the Arrange menu point to Mask and then select Unmask command Locking Objects You can lock some objects Locked objects can be selected but cannot be edited moved or resized 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Lock and then select Lock command A padlock displays on the object m o In some cases the padlock is placed in a corner and when you select the object the Control Point will overlap the Padlock In a path you can change the padlock s position by changing the starting point of the path See Changing Starting Point
239. more details on each command Add Job Adds a job to the selected output device Save As Saves the selected job to a file RIP Job RIPs the selected job and leaves it in the RIP queue ig Print Job Prints the selected job to the specified output device RIPing it if necessary Using Production Manager Page 267 Nest Nests the selected print jobs together so as to use the minimum amount of the output media Unnest Unnests the selected set of nested jobs Abort Stops selected file from RIPing or printing Delete Deletes the selected job or jobs Changing Preferences To set the application preferences for Production Manager from the Edit menu select Preferences Units Inches he l Precision 0 000 v l Archive Path C Program Files FlexiSIGN P Browse Format Native job File paths Jobs C Program Files FlexiSIGN P Browse Temporary files C Program Files FlexiSIGN P Browse RIP RIP band height Auto l Rows Maximum number of RIP threads 3 Print while RIPing V Ignore overprint in PDF Allow remote Send Now Interactive Automatic tile flip The following settings are available Units The units of measurement displayed Precision The degree of precision to use with measurements Archive Path The folder where archived jobs are saved Archive The format that archived jobs will be stored in Format Original Archives the image
240. mote interactive operation select within c cceece 56 PI PETER EE EENE AE 269 selecting similar objects 56 remote Send Now operation selecting with DesignEditor 52 E E E ETT 269 selection modes D5 reMOVe point eeeee sees 157 sending to EnRoute 29 remove tiny objects 160 separate overlap effect 191 removing self intersections 157 separating effects 189 removing tiliNg 600 288 separation between jobs 303 rendering intent 321 serial port settings 275 rendering intents 220 setting default job properties reordering objects Tee _ Ss _ Wisineauaptiey Stemauas watteedauhceepunueerte 301 repeating paths 153 setting job properties 297 repeating the last step 20 setups KESAIMDIC cesan 167 ACTIVATING carana 271 resizing Objects 00 59 deleting ccccsseeeeeeeeees 271 FESO ON cennera 306 desktop printers 271 RIP and print cccee 243 editing aeann 272 advanced options 252 selecting cccceeeeeeeeeees 271 GOIO Katie eo 256 shadow effect 0008 195 paneling eccceeeeeeeees 248 shapes RIP band height 269 CKEALING ccccceeeeeeeeeeees 105 RIP TOOS oea 294 editing secesecoxcscesecrsessacexetes 107 RIPing sharp Corer crossi 154 numbe
241. n the preview pane Channel Select the color channel that you want to edit Output The value for the point that is currently selected on the linearization curve e Click on the curve to select a different point to edit You can also select a point by clicking on the input axis label e To change the value at given point on the curve edit the value in the Output field or click and drag the point up or down The curve should not contain any points that fall below a previous value If such a point is measured edit the curve so that the point is above the previous point on the curve Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 315 Save Load Apply to All Delete Reset a ce C nia eae VA pee Ee E E E ca ee eS Acceptable Click to save the current settings for all color channels to an XML file Click to load new settings for all color channels from a previously saved XML file Click to apply the values for the current color channel to all color channels Click to delete the selected point from the linearization curve Click to restore the values and settings for all color settings to their original states Separations Tab 4e BIN B 2 The Separations tab contains a number of options related to Print as separations Print separations in color printing color separations Channel Printas _ Angle Frequ Cyan Cyan 105 0 55 000 Magenta Magenta 75 000
242. n mode 5 Click OK Selecting Objects Within an Effect To select an object within an effect an object with an outline for example 1 Choose Select Within tool K 2 Click the object that you want to select Or 1 Choose Select tool Li 2 CTRL key and double click the object that you want to select Rectangle selected within an Outline effect Selecting Objects Using the TAB Key Pressing the TAB key selects the next object The selection order follows the order that the objects were created e e 9 e o oC ma man Selecting Similar Objects This feature selects all objects with similar shape to the currently selected object 1 Select an object 2 From the Edit menu point to Select and then click Select Similar Objects command Page 56 Selecting Objects Selecting Objects With The Same Color This feature selects all objects with a similar color to the currently selected object 1 Select an object 2 From the Edit menu point to Select and then click Select Similar Color command Selecting Object Based on Attributes You can specify objects to select based on a object s type fill and effects For example you can select all blue rectangles or all text To select objects based on attributes 1 From the Edit menu point to Select and then click Select by Attributes command 2 Select which attribute Object Fill or Effect Tab will be used in the selection Object Fill
243. n select a Tab by clicking on its indicator in DesignCentral or double clicking the object Each double click will move to the next available Tab DesignCentral Document Tab Use the Document tab to specify the size of the drawing area and the color of the substrate the background color A number of standard document sizes are included You can specify a custom drawing area size by entering new horizontal and vertical values To show the Document tab do one of the following e Open DesignCentral and then click an empty area in the document e From the File menu select Document Setup DesignCentral Margin Tab Use the Margin tab to specify the margins around a drawing area Using DesignCentral Page 43 These margins are used when objects are aligned distributed and also are useful for laying out elements symmetrically See Aligning Objects on page 73 for more details al ES PE DD BO Al Click here to fi 50cm psim A Add a new document size fi5tcm Delete an existing document size ai Set a default document size E Hide the design area borders C f1 50cm E 59 40cm a Click here to specify the color of the substrate DesignCentral Document Tab Scns al Margin a DesignCentral Size Tab The Size Tab of DesignCentral allows you to change the size and position of selected objects You can change objects by dragging the control points or by changing the numerical values in DesignCent
244. n the same queue in order to be nested together and must share the same output device and resolution Nesting Jobs Manually To nest jobs 1 Select the jobs 2 From the File menu select Nest Jobs cl If a single job is selected its pages will be nested Un Nesting Jobs To separate a set of nested jobs into its component jobs 1 Select the set of nested jobs 2 From the File menu select Unnest Jobs EI Using Automatic Nesting Production Manager can be set to automatically nest jobs as they are added to the Hold Queue To set up automatic nesting from the Setup menu select Setup Properties then select the Automatic Nesting tab Using Production Manager Page 279 sis A V Automatic job nesting I Number of jobs M Number of minutes Percent coverage T Daily at V Automatic rotate image when nesting Job Defaults Apply Cancel Automatic job nesting Automatic rotate image when nesting Automatically nests jobs using one or more of the criteria specified below This allows you to work more efficiently by grouping their jobs for output You can add several jobs into the queue and nest them into one job Number of jobs Number of minutes Percent coverage Daily at Select this option to automatically nest jobs once the specified number of jobs has accumulated in the queue Select this option to automatically nest jobs once the specified number of minutes has passed
245. n value Suffix This text will be placed after the dimension value Scale Scale used to show the dimension value A scale of 50 will display half of the actual value in dimension value Unit Precision Trailing Zeros Supress unit Border text EA bed bed Pe Working with Measurements and Labels Unit used to show the dimension value Number of decimal places in dimension value When this option is off no decimals will be displayed When this option is on no unit will be displayed after the dimension value When this option is on a box will appear around the dimension text The dimension text can be above over or under the dimension line lt fixes the position of the dimension on the line When a diagonal dimension is created the dimension text can aligned with diagonal line or be Page 217 always is horizontal position Using this buttons you can show only the sideline no sideline no arrow or show all p 2 850 mm Arrow size A 000mm Page 218 Working with Measurements and Labels 16 Configuring the System for Color Printing You should configure your system before printing Color Settings dialog provides the default settings that are applied to files that are imported into your software and to emulate the output color on the monitor To open the Color Settings dialog box and to configure your software for color printing from the Edit menu select Color Settings
246. nced GCR option Medium ig Total ink limit 370 4 Black ink start 20x 4 Black ink limit 100 lt 2 m Black generation The GCR settings determine when and to what extent CMY will be replaced by black K The higher the GCR is set the more CMY black is replaced with K Minimum CMY black will be replaced with true black Light according to the curve shown on the right Most settings do 100 replacement of CMY with black at high coverage levels but progressively less at Heavy lower levels of coverage The Maximum setting Maximum eplaces CMY with black whenever possible Pictures generated with higher GCR will tend to show more contrast and detail but slightly less This is a sum of the ink limit values for C M Y and K Each color can have an ink limit of up to 100 the total ink limit is a maximum of 300 Increasing total ink limit may improve This determines at which percentage of gray the black K Set Black Ink Start to a minimum of 20 to avoid black This determines the maximum percentage of gray that the black black GCR Option The available settings are No black All blacks will be CMY black Medium color Total Ink Limit contrast of the print Black Ink Start channel begins to replace CMY dots in skin tones Black Ink Limit K channel will replace CMY Page 326 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Data Tab The Data tab displays the data measured for th
247. ne line in order to change the text height Working With Braille Text You can convert normal text into Braille Grade 1 or Braille Grade 2 Grade 1 is in full spelling and consists of the letters of the alphabet punctuation numbers and a number of composition signs that are special to Braille Duxbury Systems conversion is used for Grade 2 support that gives the highest quality Braille available Braille can be spell checked and even converted back to normal text to be edited There is an option to omit the caps indicator and keep Braille in all lowercase that makes for more concise Braille Dot Size can be specified to make Braille Photo Polymer compatible Converting Text to Braille 1 Select the text Working with Text Page 133 2 From the Text menu point to Braille then select Grade 1 or Grade 2 from the menu Once converted to Braille the text can not be resized Arc and Path text can not be converted to Braille Converting Braille to Text 1 Select the Braille text From the Text menu point to Braille then select Braille to Text To Braille e e ee 6 Se o a 5 6 omen Normal Text ion i E Braille Tab in DesignCentral When Braille text is selected DesignCentral displays the Braille Tab with the following attributes and commands Grade 1 Changes the Braille coding Grade 2 Lowercase Check to remove caps indicators Only Show Check to show all the empty dots in your text when it is
248. nes always appear higher in the stack than the object to which they are applied The Objects Tab is an excellent way to view the structure of your document You can see the elements in each layer of your document as well as the various effects and other changes that you ve applied to each element Selecting Objects Using the Object Tab The DesignEditor Objects Tab allows you to quickly locate and select specific objects This is useful when your design is complex and selecting individual objects in the conventional way pointing and clicking has become difficult To select an object select the object s name in the DesignEditor Objects Tab SHIFT or CTRL keys selects multiple objects You can even select individual objects among compounded or grouped objects When you select an object in the design area the corresponding item is automatically highlighted on the DesignEditor Objects Tab Page 52 Using DesignEditor Changing Objects Order You can change the order of an object by clicking and dragging an object to a new location in the stack You can change the stack order of objects within a particular layer or you can move objects from one layer to another 1 Click on the object that you would like to move reorder in the Objects Tab 2 Drag the object to the desired location e SHIFT key while you drag replaces the highlighted object with the one you re moving e CTRL key while dragging duplicates t
249. ng 157 step and repeat 000 65 stripes effect eee 196 stroke properties 103 Styles QFAPNIC ceeeceeeeeeeeeees 208 TOM A E A A E 137 supported file formats 333 swatch table cccccceeees 82 swatch tables Greal eseo rne 94 reordering cccseeeeeeees 83 system requirements 1 TCP IP SettingS 006 274 templates ccccseeeeeee eee 37 temporary files 0 269 LESH JOOS lt sice eles iee sere 278 LOM uaaa 117 barcodes ccceseeeeeees 134 block block size ceee eens 133 Brallle ccccccseeeeeeeeeeees 133 breaking ccceeseeeeeees 132 changing attributes 120 changing case 130 changing orientation 133 creating serie asim ee 118 define character 136 EUNA cesiune 127 find amp replace n 129 JOIO ireren 132 KENING eaer eter eter 130 labels cect tavastencce etenl cake 216 preferences 138 selecting 127 special characters 136 spell checking 0 130 SE Srana 137 text block size eee 133 text preferences n 138 text rendering intent 220 text styles 0 0 ceeeeeeee sees 137 tile map 283 286 tiling 227 234 248 282 editing tileS ccee 285 preventing output of tiles 286 DIOVICW cceececceeeeeeeeees 298 printing a tile map 286 FEMOVING 0
250. ng placeholders are available Et The Active Drawing placeholder is replaced by the original document The Used Colors placeholder is Black Deep Red replaced by a list with all colors Purple Red used in the original document Dark Brown Yellow Satin Gold Cocoa Bi zy The Used Fonts placeholder is Aria Regular Bl replaced by a list with all fonts used Aria Bold in the original document Anatltalic Century Regular Courier New Regular The Job Info placeholder is Job Number 12345 replaced by a value from job info Price 6493 16 and other information from the Order Taken By John Doe original document Order Number 12345 Job Info shows information Order Date 12 25 2001 from Job info Job Delivery Date 12 27 2001 Tab Customer shows information Info from Job info Customer Tab Other shows other information from the original document such as number of colors fonts and characters used Creating New Templates You can create your own custom templates 1 Open anew document 2 Select the placeholder from the Template toolbar 3 Click and drag the cursor on design area 4 Adjust the placeholder s attributes in DesignCentral Template Tab 5 You can add other objects other than placeholders Every object available in your software like bitmap text and shapes can be used in a template 6 From the File menu point to Templates and then click Save as Template The template has be
251. nge your jobs properties before sending to your output device Understanding Setups A Setup consists of an output device and its associated properties Setup information includes the type of output device the media being used the size of the media and any settings specific to the output device Creating Your First Setup Before you can output your design your software must establish a connection with the Production Manager and an output device must be configured Follow the steps below to create a setup for your output device 1 From your software select RIP and Print or Cut Plot from the File menu 2 Select On this computer Local and then click OK 3 Select the type of device manufacturer and the model of your Output device and then click Next 4 Select the appropriated port and click Finish Adding New Setups You can add more setups directly from the Production Manager See Adding New Setups on page 269 for more details Configuring a Setup Once you have created a setup you can change its properties Most of the settings available in Setup Properties are also available in the RIP and Print or Cut Plot dialog The settings from the Setup Properties are applied to files that are added directly to Production Manager using the Add Job command To display the Setup Properties Setting up Production Manager Page 263 1 From your software select RIP and Print or Cut Plot from the File menu 2
252. nn LT am N if Drag to a the arc shape P YS vey 5 D G Converting Segment to Arc The Make Arc tool converts one segment of the path into a semicircle 1 Select the Make Arc tool gt 2 Click and drag one segment of the path Hold the SHIFT key while dragging to constrain the arc into a half circle 3 Release the mouse button _ __ Click and drag to create an Arc Eliminating Extra Points Many paths that have been auto traced have a number of extra points that should be removed 1 Use Select tool to select a path and all its points or the Select Point tool to select specific points in a path 2 Select the Reduce Points tool AJ 3 Adjust the Tolerance value in DesignCentral Lower values of tolerance will follow the original path more closely higher values will eliminate more points Page 156 Working with Paths 4 Click Apply x or double click anywhere inside the design area F d g a Path before reducing the extra Path after reducing the unecessary points points Removing One Point You can remove one specific point from the path using the Remove Point tool 1 Select the Remove Point tool Ss 2 Click over the points to be removed You can also remove points by selecting them with Select Point tool and pressing DELETE key Adding One Point You can add one specific point from the path using the Add Point tool 1 Select the Add Point tool
253. nnn mnnn nnn 229 Setting the Cut Plot Dialog ccceeeccccecesesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 229 Cut Plot Dialog General TaDiseiia Terrissa a ep 230 Cut Plot Dialog Panel Tab cccccccccesseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 234 Cut Plot Dialog Advanced Tab 0 cceeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 239 Printing your Design cccssesseessesseeseeeseeeeeenseeeeenseesennees 243 Setting the RIP and Print Dialog cccccceecececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 RIP and Print Dialog General Tab cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 244 RIP and Print Dialog Panel Tab cccseccccsseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 248 RIP and Print Dialog Advanced Tab ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 252 RIP and Print Dialog Driver Tab cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 256 RIP and Print Dialog Color Tab cccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 256 Printing with Spot Colors ccccccccccsssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeess 256 COntO Ur Cutina veut eaecce e T 257 Setting up Production Managet sscccssssssssseeeees 263 Understanding SCUIDS siceraria 263 Creating Your First S tup s nen ien e O RE 263 Adding New SOUS siccbes ccicccdessece sense sene aE E 263 COMMOUKING lt a Sete seets ote eee a gules 263 Setting up Production Manager on a Network 0 ccceseeeees 264 Using Production Managet cccsssssseeesssessseesseeeees 267 The Prod
254. no o ee HH S P i A lt ASP N et 3 B i d OAS NT 5 FASENE AAN 4 fare LAN E The job is automatically tiled based on the job size and the media size T The job is automatically tiled based on the size of the drawing area and media size Resizing the Panel The panel defines the area of design that will be processed for output Elements of the design that are outside the bounds of the panel will not be printed You can resize the panel by dragging the panel border or using the Panel Size group to numerically enter the panel size Changing the panel size with the mouse 1 Move the cursor on top of the small red squares along the panel border 2 Click and drag to resize the panel Entering the panel size numerically Ah z C4 4 666cm The width of the panel 56 458em The height of the panel E 254cm Margin around the panel Printing your Design Page 249 Tiling the Job Using the Preview Area You can add new tiles to the panel 1 Move the mouse cursor on top of the panel border 2 Click and drag towards the center of the panel to add a new panel Click and drag the panel border to add a new tile To resize existing tiles 1 Move the mouse cursor on top of the tile border 2 Click and drag to resize the tile Click and drag the tile border to resize the tile Tiling the Job Using the Tile Group Box The Tile group allows you to specify the tiles nume
255. nstalled and then click Next Click Next to continue Read the Software License Agreement and click Yes to accept Click Next to continue Click Yes to view the readme file The readme file contains last minute issues and information that are not included in this documentation You may change the default destination folder here Click Next Select the type of installation to install Typical is recommended Click Next Select the folder where the software will be included If you accept the default folder a new folder will be created for the product Click Next Click Yes to clear the preferences or No to retain old preferences Select the printers you want to install color profiles for then click Next Select Yes and click OK to restart your computer Page 2 Installing the Software Uninstalling the Software Windows 1 Exit your software by selecting Exit from File menu 2 Inthe Windows Control Panel double click the Add Remove Programs icon 3 Select your software from the list and click the Change Remove button 4 Click OK when finished 5 Go into the drive containing the directory where the software was installed Delete this folder Installing the Software Macintosh Follow these steps to install the software 1 Insert the Installation CD 2 Double click the Installer icon 3 Select a language and then click OK 4 Enter your User ID and Password and then click OK The user ID and passwor
256. ntal line Arc Text The text is placed over a circle Horizontal Path Text The horizontal text is placed over a path Horizontal Block Text The text is restricted to the width of a block When the text is wider then the block it will automatically move to the next line o S 36 ot Vertical Text The text Vertical Path Text Vertical Block Text follows a straight vertical The vertical text is The vertical text is the line placed over a path height of a block When the text is higher then the block it will automatically move to the next line Working with Text Page 117 Creating New Text You create text by using the tools located on the Text toolbar Creating Horizontal Vertical Text 1 Select Horizontal Text or Vertical Text tool T T 2 Click anywhere in the design area 3 Type the text Lorem ipsum dolor 4 If desired hit ENTER to move to the next line Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetur 5 Hit ESC or select a different tool to finish entering text Creating Horizontal Vertical Block Text 1 Select Horizontal Text or Vertical Text tool T T 2 Click and drag to create a block where the text will be confined 3 Type the text The text will automatically wrap when it reaches the opposite end of the text block The text block will expand to accommodate additional lines of text Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet
257. ntered Line Width This field tells the program to centerline anything smaller than this value and outline anything larger Enhancement When using Outline Thick Areas you can tell the program what vectorization method to use on the outlines See Tracing Bitmaps on page 182 about Bezier Corners or Curves tracings Options This button is only available when Corners is selected in Enhancement field See Using Enhanced Corners Tracing on page 339 about the tracing properties of Corner Enhancement tracing Reset Resets the tracing parameters to their default value 4 Click OK Using Color Vectorization Color vectorization is used to convert color raster images into vector graphics Before vectorization the image must be posterized in order to reduce the number of colors The Color Vectorization process is divided into 3 steps Posterization Merging colors and Vectorization Posterize Posterization is the process of reducing the number of colors to a manageable level so the image can be vectorized To posterized an image 1 Choose the posterization method you want 2 Choose the number of colors 3 Click Posterize The bitmap is posterized the image and display the resulting colors in the color list in the dialog box Your software provides three methods of posterization Appendix E CASmate Tracing Features Page 341 Fast Posterization Smart Posterization Manual Posterization Merge Colors
258. o fit into the space proved by the picture placeholders in the template Applying Templates To apply a template to your document 1 Open an existing document or create a new one 2 From the File menu point to Templates and then click Apply Template 3 Choose the template from the list The templates are named following the convention 2 4 x 5 2 2 5 x 3 5 4 2x 2 5 Number of copies Size inches 4 Choose Select A new document will be created using the template and the original document When a template is applied to a document any dimensions or registration marks contained in the document are converted into outlines Setting the Default Template To select the template that will be selected by default in the Select Template dialog 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences 2 Select the Tools tab of the Preferences dialog 3 Select Apply Template from the list of tools 4 Select the template you want to make the default from the Default Template list 5 Click OK Templates Toolbar To display the Template toolbar from the File menu point to Templates and then click Template Toolbar The Templates toolbar will be used to create and modify existing templates This toolbar contains buttons that represents the placeholders Placeholders are fields that will be replaced by objects images or information from the original document when a template is used Page 38 Working with Files The followi
259. o other parties 3 Licensee will not make or have made or permit to be made any copies of the Software or Coded Font Programs or portions thereof except as necessary for its use with a single Computer System hereunder Licensee agrees that any such copies shall contain the same proprietary notices which appear on or in the Software or the Coded Font Programs 4 Except as stated above this Agreement does not grant Licensee any rights to patents copyrights trade secrets trade names trademarks whether registered or unregistered or any other rights franchises or licenses in respect of the Software Coded Font Programs Typefaces or Trademarks Licensee will not adapt or use any trademark or trade name which is likely to be similar to or confusing with that of Licensor or any of its suppliers or take any other action which impairs or reduces the trademark rights of Licensor or its suppliers The Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Coded Font Programs At the reasonable request of Licensor Licensee must supply samples of any Typeface identified by a Trademark 5 Licensee agrees that it will not attempt to alter disassemble decrypt or reverse engineer the Software or Coded Font Programs 6 Licensee acknowledges that the laws and regulations of the United States Licence Agreement Page ix restrict the export and re export of commodities and technical data of United States origin including the
260. objects within the specified section of length before moving to the next section Removes intersections of overlapping objects of the same color Printing your Design Page 259 Weed border Cuts a border around all objects in the selected color Send Specify how the job will be sent to the output device As hybrid Sends both printing and cutting data job as a single job This option is available for hybrid printer cutter devices As Sends printing and cutting data as separate separate jobs This option is jobs available if you use different devices for cutting and printing This is also known as virtual hybrid output Print job Sends only the printing job only Contour Sends only the cutting job job only Cutter Driver Options Click to edit the cutter driver options See Setting Cutter Driver Options page 323 for details When finished click Done to return to the Advanced tab of the RIP and Print dialog Cutting the Contour on a Hybrid Device If you are using a hybrid device the contour will be cut automatically after printing Cutting the Contour As a Separate Job If you send the print and cut data as separate jobs the software will output the print job first The cut job will be put in the queue of the selected cutting device and it status will be set to Holding You can then load the output medium from the printer into the cutting device and send the cut job to the device In order for the c
261. of a path 1 Select the Round Corner tool When the cursor is over a sharp corner click to select 3 Click and drag the center of the circle to adjust the corner or enter the Diameter value in DesignCentral 4 Click Apply Y or double click anywhere inside the design area To round multiple corners in a path 1 Use the Select tool to select a path and all its sharp corners or the Select Point tool to select specific corners in a path Select the Round Corner tool 3 Click and drag the center of a circle to adjust the corners or enter the Diameter value in DesignCentral 4 Click Apply Y or double click anywhere inside the design area C Nn y Sharpening Corners The Sharpen Corner tool converts a round corner into a sharp corner 1 Select the Sharp Corner tool ea 2 Click the point where the sharp corner will begin 3 Click the point where the sharp corner will end Page 154 Working with Paths Drag the start and end points over the path to adjust the position of the corner TAB key joins the start and end points using a straight line Click Apply x or double click anywhere inside the design area c Converting Segment into a Curve The Optimize by Curve tool creates a curved segment between two points on a path 1 2 3 4 J Select the Optimize by Curve tool EA Click the point where the curve will begin Click the point where the curve will end Drag the st
262. olor management V Printer options Cancel I Color adjustment V Labels and marks Select All V Separation 2 Check the settings that you want to be included in the preset 3 Click OK 4 Enter a name for the new preset 5 Click OK Updating Presets To update the currently selected preset with the currently selected job properties from the Preset list select Save The Defaults preset can only be changed by editing the default job properties for the setup See Setting Default Job Properties page 298 for details Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 299 Applying a Preset To apply the job properties saved in a preset to the current job select the preset from the Preset list at the top of the Job Properties dialog Renaming a Preset To rename a preset 1 Select the preset you want to rename from the Preset list 2 Select the Rename command from the Preset list 3 Type in the new name and press OK The Job Defaults preset cannot be renamed Deleting a Preset To delete a preset 1 Select the preset you want to delete from the Preset list 2 Select the Delete command from the Preset list Do you really want to delete this preset 3 Click Yes The Use Default Job Properties preset cannot be deleted Importing and Exporting Presets Presets can be exported to XML files so that they can be exchanged with other users installations or backed up in case of a hard disk failur
263. olorimetric rendering MIEN aoaaa 221 accurate screens 323 active SETUP ccceeeeee eee 271 adding POINt ccceee 157 adding setups 00 270 Adobe Type 1 fonts 140 advance after printing 309 advanced borders 109 SOMING eea 114 Align Points sezcveceud ise cncbces 151 aligning objects 000 73 angled screen dithering 307 angled screen options 321 apply length and angle 153 applying entered values 22 AIC CODY tax cemasuenecaaueVerecieten 66 ANC teiman 117 119 archive format 0008 268 archive path cccsseeee 268 archiving printed jobs 304 d OSa p sede teoaie 155 make arc wececeet erie 156 arithmetic operations 21 arrays of objects 0 65 AOW Sit cities tess ercsnatacia 109 editing cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 114 ASCIl COd x iiss 329 attributes selecting Dy cccce 57 auto serialization 06 67 automatic application of entered values 0 22 automatic calculation 21 automatic dimensioning 215 automatic job nesting 280 automatic job tiling 282 automatic kerning 131 automatic page nesting 281 303 automatic percent calculation FREE eee er ne onan nee 21 automatic ratio calculation 21 automatic unit conversion 21 autotrace s 183 background Color
264. omatically Dimensioning Objects The Automatic Dimension tool allows you to automatically create horizontal and vertical dimension lines around an object These dimensions lines are not linked to the object and will not be automatically updated if the object changes size To automatically create a horizontal and vertical dimension line in an object 1 Select the objects 2 Select the Automatic Dimension tool l Dimensioning to Page The Dimension to Page tool allows you to automatically create horizontal and vertical dimension lines that measure the position of the object to the lower left corner of the design area These dimensions lines are linked to the object and will be updated if the objects change position Text objects are measured from the baseline of the text Working with Measurements and Labels Page 215 To create dimension to page lines 1 Select the objects 2 Select the Dimension to Page tool A Creating Labels Use the label tools to draw an arrow with a text attached to it There are two types of label ABCDE ABCDE One segment label Two segment label To create a label 1 Select the label tool EE 2 Click the point where the label line will start As you move the cursor a line shows the direction in which you are moving 3 If you are creating a two segment label click to define the point where the first segment ends and the second segment begins 4 Click the po
265. on file name or any of the parameters of Job Information To search for one file 1 From the File menu select Find File Working with Files Page 33 2 Click Browse and select the folder where the search will be performed If you want to search all sub folders check the Include subfolders option 3 Enter the search condition e If you want to search a file by its name enter the file name in Named field e f you want to search a file using any of the job information select the job info field from the list provided and enter the search text in the contains field For example to search for all jobs where the order was taken by John Doe you would select Order Taken by and type John Doe into the contains field 4 Click Search button 5 A list with all files matching the search condition will be displayed 6 Select the file in list and e Click Job Info button to show the job information e Click Open button or double click the file in the list to open the file e Click Cancel button to end the search Job Estimation Job Estimation is a tool for producing price estimates of your job The Job Estimation stores accounting information for each job calculates price automatically and gives a price estimate The information can always be changed or customized to reflect your costs and needs This feature is intended to be a guideline and therefore all results should be thoroughly reviewed before basing any business or
266. on printing tile printable again e Double click or right click the tile again to toggle it back on e Select the tile in the Selected Tile section of the Tile tab and check the Print checkbox One tile in each job must always remain printable If you try to set all tiles to non printing one of the tiles will become printable again Printing a Tile Map The software can print out a map showing how the job will be broken up into tiles Each tile has the tile number printed within its outline To print a tile map 1 Click the Print Tile Map button on the Tile tab Page 286 Using Production Manager Send Tilernap Acrobat Distiller cancel _ 2 Select the printer you want to use to print the tile map If you would like to send the tile map to a desktop or network printer first create a setup for that printer then select that setup here 3 Click OK Cropping a Job To crop out part of a job so that it will not be output _ 1 Open the Job Properties dialog for the job 2 Select the Tiling Preview view of the job 3 Drag the red cropping handles so that the unwanted parts of the job are cropped out Cropped out areas of the job will not be output Cropping Handles Dragging cropping handle Cropped Out Area You can also crop a job by reducing the panel size using the 4 t0 and ko fields in the Panel Size section of the Tile tab Using Production Manager
267. oncurrent instance of the software using the same hardware key To run the software using a hardware key installed on a different computer 1 Onthe computer with the hardware key make sure the software is not running Run Production Manager on the computer with the hardware key 3 On the computer you want to run the software on make sure the software is installed using the user number assigned to the hardware key When you run the software on the second computer it will recognize the hardware key from the first computer and run Page 4 Installing the Software Using Preference Manager Available preferences Factory Defaults Standard Setups Preference Manager is a utility that allows you to save all of the settings in the software to a file including all output device setups setup properties default job properties and all application preferences You cannot load a set of preferences while either the design software or Production Manager is running You can save preferences at any time Saving a Set of Preferences To save the current set of preferences to a file 1 Run Preference Manager 2 Click Save 3 Type the name for the set of preferences in the field and click OK Loading a Set of Preferences To reload a previously saved set of preferences 1 Exit the software 2 Run Preference Manager 3 Select the set of preferences you want to load 4 Click Load Restoring the Software to it
268. ont and style used in the font description Regular Poe iA 25 400mm Size of the font used in font description Page 40 Working with Files x i Number of font descriptions per line For Job Info placeholder Other File Hame Reeular TA 25 400 mm Label Source of the information Job info customer info or Other Information type Font and style used in the job info description Size of the font used in job info description Check this option to place a label before the information text Edit the label text in the field right of this option Working with Files Page 41 Page 42 Working with Files 4 Using DesignCentral DesignCentral displays an object s properties It displays tabs and options appropriate for the selected object For example when a rectangle is selected DesignCentral displays the width height corner style and other properties appropriate to a rectangle When text is selected it displays the font font style character height and width and other settings Displaying DesignCentral To view DesignCentral e From the View menu select Mm DesignCentral ta Paton J 2511cm Wedom Tabs w 148 94cm I Proportional DesignCentral DesignCentral Tab DesignCentral consists of several windows known as Tabs The number of Tabs and the content vary according to the objects that you have selected in your document You ca
269. ontour to line up properly on the print job you must align the cut job to the printed output using either automatic alignment or manual alignment Cutting the Contour on a Cutter with Automatic Alignment 1 RIP and print the job 2 Remove the output medium from the printer and load it into the cutter 3 Output the cut job in the Hold Queue as you would a normal print job Page 260 Printing your Design Please detect the registration marks From the device Click OK to continue 4 Align the cutting head over the first automatic registration mark lower right if not marked using the controls on the front panel of the cutter 5 Click OK to cut the contour Cutting the Contour on a Manually Aligned Cutter 1 RIP and print the job 2 Remove the output medium from the printer and load it into the cutter Make sure the output medium is straight and align the registration marks to the origin for the cutter 3 Output the cut job in the Hold Queue as you would a normal print job Interactive alignment Manual Digitize Alignment Bomb Sight Cancel 4 Select the method to be used to position the cut head over the registration marks and click OK Interactive You will position the cut head over the registration marks alignment using software controls Digitize You will position the cut head over the registration marks alignment using the controls on the face of the cutter This option is only availa
270. op of the base is called the top color Working with Color Page 79 Working with Swatch Tables In Flexi every line of ink film or foil that a manufacturer makes is represented by a separate swatch table which lists all of the colors available for that line The swatches in the swatch tables change appearance based on the color mode in use Spot colors have a small dot on the right side of the swatch Duotone colors have two dots on the right side of the swatch Process Color Spot Color E Duotone Color E Opening a Swatch table In order to use a color of foil in your design you must first open the swatch table for that type of foil To open a swatch table 1 Access the Open dialog using one of the following methods e From the View menu select Color then Open Table e Right click on the default swatch table or any other open swatch table and select Open Table 2 Browse to the Swatch Library subfolder of the software installation folder 3 Select the manufacturer of the foil type such as Gerber Scientific Products and click Open 4 Select the swatch library for the desired type of foil and click Open The selected swatch table will appear below the default swatch table D IQI ml piin JE Page 80 Working with Color Closing a Swatch table To close a swatch table right click on the table and select Close Creating New Swatch tables To create a new empty swatch table do one of the fol
271. or CTRL While Creating Polygons e Hold the SHIFT key down to create an irregular polygon within a rectangle determined by the dragging position e Hold the CTRL key down to create a regular polygon with a horizontal base Dragging while holding the SHIFT key key Holding SHIFT or CTRL While Creating Starbursts e Hold the SHIFT key down to create an irregular starburst within a rectangle determined by the dragging position e Hold the CTRL key down to constrain the starburst to a vertical position S oe l g S Se SS l Dragging while holding the SHIFT key Page 106 Working With Shapes Holding SHIFT or CTRL While Creating Fans and Arrows e Hold the SHIFT key down to constrain the fan or arrow angle to certain values The constrain angles can be set using the Preferences See Preferences General Tab on page 22 for more information e Hold the CTRL key down to create a fan or arrow from its center Holding CTRL While Creating Advanced Borders and Parametric Shapes Hold the CTRL key down while dragging to draw a shape from its center Editing Shapes Using DesignCentral You can edit a shape using DesignCentral The parameters in DesignCentral can be adjusted before during or after the shape is created For more details about how to resize rotate or mirror a shape see Arranging Objects on page 59 For each shape you have different parameters that can be ad
272. or Starbursts you can adjust the Inner and Outer radius the number of spikes and spike twist angle a 0x Sr g n G zx j i 5 000em 5 14 1420m 4 3 820cm CE 5 000cm cot 14 142cm lt t 10 000cm lt gt 5 gt 5 apo a DesignCentral for Ovals DesignCentral for DesignCentral for Polygons Starbursts Fan For Fan shape you can adjust the Outer radius Thickness Rotation angle and the Sweep angle Page 108 Working With Shapes Arrow For Arrows you can adjust the Arrow Length Angle Tail Length and Width Cap Length and Wing angle Registration Marks For Registration Marks you can adjust the Size and the registration mark type Diamond or Round a WE a E ED t fa iazem 34 gifs opra H Peo H Rpr a hlemm A soo efa Alor afar a DesignCentral for Fan DesignCentral for Arrow DesignCentral for Registration Mark Advanced Borders For Advanced Borders you can adjust the Border Type Height or Width and Inner Border Width Click the button on left hand side of the Add button to show a list with all available border types Click the Proportional check box to keep the border width and height ratio constant D fioooem 4 Afos I Inner border Proportional DesignCentral for Advanced Border Types Border You can create your own borders and then add them to the border list 1 Create the border and save the file 2 Select
273. or more details see Configuring the System for Color Printing on page 219 If you do not correct the gamut the color that you selected will not print accurately Adding Colors from the Color Mixer to a Swatch table 1 From the View menu select Color Mixer 2 Create the new color that will be Drag added 3 Click the color patch and drag to the swatch table You can place the color at any location in the table 2C S OS eo Creating Duotone Colors with the Color Mixer 4 From the View menu select Color Mixer Working with Color Page 85 Color Mixer___ IE Color Mixer Top GOIEN Base Intense Red z T I a 100 0 6 Select the Top and Base colors You will only be able to select colors from the swatch tables that are currently open 7 Select the percent coverage This will apply to both top and base colors 8 Drag the color from the upper left box in the Color Mixer down into a swatch table ESS SSS A Ef Roe R 255 G aa 145 5 Drag B _ s 0d aS OSes 9 Save the swatch table Sampling Colors Using the Eyedropper The eyedropper tool sets the fill options of the selected objects to match the color pattern or gradient fill of whatever it clicks on If you click on a bitmap the eyedropper will return a solid color that matches the pixel you clicked on To use the eyedropper 1 Select the objects whose color you want to change
274. or over the bitmap to create a closed shape You can add or subtract areas from an existing marquee by pressing SHIFT and CTRL key 3 Click inside the marquee and drag it to move the marquee to the desired position Using the Magic Wand Tool The Magic Wand tool lets you select an area of a bitmap based on the color You can specify the color range or tolerance for the magic wand tool s selection 1 Select the Magic Wand tool al 2 Adjust the Tolerance in DesignCentral If DesignCentral is not visible double click the Magic Wand tool button Enter a low value to select colors very similar to the pixel you click or a higher value to select a broader range of colors Click the cursor over the bitmap 4 SHIFT and CTRL keys add or subtract areas from existing marquees ED Tolerance 150 Marquee created with Magic Wand tool Clearing Marquee 1 Select the bitmap with a marquee 2 From the Bitmap menu select Clear Marquee Inverting Marquee 1 Select the bitmap with a marquee 2 From the Bitmap menu select Invert Selection Working with Bitmaps Page 171 Converting Objects to Marquees You can convert vector objects into marquees 1 Place the vector object over the bitmap 2 Select the bitmap and the vector object 3 From the Bitmap menu select Convert Shape to Marquee Converting Marquees to Objects You can convert marquees into vector objects 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bi
275. or will be visible Show All Except Only the objects using this color will not be visible This Color Hide All Except This Only the objects using this color will be visible Color Show all colors All objects will be visible wo wo oJ os T_T pio mam Tenan Cursor over the Swatch Table After selecting Hide This Color Page 18 Getting Started Tracking your Steps Your software contains several tracking tools to retrace your steps making it easier to recover from operation mistakes Undoing and Redoing the Last Step To undo the last operation from the Edit menu select Undo The name of the last operation is displayed after the Undo command To redo a step that you have just undone from the Edit menu select Redo Undoing and Redoing Multiple Steps Instead of undoing just the last operation you can undo a sequence of multiple steps 1 From the Edit menu select Undo Multiple A list with all recent steps is displayed The steps are shown in order with the most recent step appearing on the top of the list 2 Click to select the steps that you want to undo starting from the top The design area dynamically shows a preview of the undoing process 3 Click OK to confirm and apply the undo The selected steps are undone and placed in a redo list Set Fin Rectang Cancel icat t Duplicate Rectangle The Redo list after Moye i A enren Set Fill Rectangle Set Fill Rectangle Set Fil
276. ors Spot Color Mappin Total size 11 84in x 45 67in Total size 22 78in x 22 78in aleja Malela Advanced Tab with automatic EATI Advanced Tab standard selection Setting the Print Quality The Output Settings group and the Driver Options define all the settings related to the quality of the output Color If this setting is not checked incoming jobs are assumed to correction already have color correction Color Clicking this button will launch the Color Settings dialog See settings Configuring the System for Color Printing on page 219 for more details Ignore Check to ignore any overprinting that was set up in the design Overprint stage This can be useful if you want to save the time and output media needed to do overprinting If you check Ignore Overprint your output will automatically be changed so that it will not use features that depend on overprinting For instance output that had been set up to use color trapping will now output untrapped Page 252 Printing your Design Presets Media Print mode Color mode Resolution Dither type Screen Smooth blends Output profile Click to load settings from a preset Load II Grayscale Avem 1005EZ HiS peed Dane lregular Paper Type 42 Light Bos Job Select the preset and click Load to load the settings relevant to the Advanced tab from the preset Only the settings relevant to the Advanced tab media
277. orted Linear and radial gradient are supported for both spot and process Supported Choose Apply print order during import to use the job print order Supported Both import as overprint but heat setting can be changed in driver options Supported Supported In order to see the substrate color use Open It is skipped when using Import Supported If the fill and stroke have different primer overprint or if the stroke is behind the fill then they will be imported as two objects one with fill only the other with stroke only Page 336 Appendix C Supported File Formats Appendix D Features List resono reee reson reenen renes Getting Started Navigore f e T T Tk Repeat o xe a d o a Working with Files Job Estimation J x o x o S So o Templates o x x o o o Using DesignEditor DesignEditor x x x x Selecting Objects Select Similar Objects E a a a Select by Attribute x Lo x d d x Arranging Objects Same Width Same Height x J Jo o To o So o Auto Serialize x x Mask Unmask J x o x o f S gt Distribute o oo oo o xe Clear Transtorm x Coo o S o o o Working with Color Eyearopper J x x x xe Modify Color Libraries x o o Measure Cobor Jo ox Coo o S o o o Create Duotone Swatch x J o o ST o S o o Create CMYK Swan x 0O To o T o Create Current Palette Using Fill Stroke Editor Pattems x o S xe Gradients do ox doo ox o o S d a Working with S
278. own internal business purposes in a single central processing unit CPU optional associated display with a resolution of less than one hundred fifty dots per inch and optionally connected to a single or multiple output device the Computer System b to use the digitally encoded machine readable outline programs Font Programs provided by Licensor in a special encrypted format Coded Font Programs and identified herewith to reproduce and display designs styles weights and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces solely for Licensee s own customary business or personal purposes on the Computer System and c to use the trademarks used by Licensor to identify the Coded Font Programs and Typefaces reproduced therefrom Trademarks Licensee may assign its rights under this Agreement to a licensee of all of Licensee s right title and interest to such Software and Coded Font Programs provided the licensee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement 2 Licensee acknowledges that the Software Coded Font Programs Typefaces and Trademarks are proprietary to Licensor and its suppliers Licensee agrees to hold the Software and Coded Font Programs in confidence disclosing the Software and Coded Font Programs only to authorized employees having a need to use the Software and Coded Font Programs as permitted by this Agreement and to take all reasonable precautions to prevent disclosure t
279. ox width This option is only available for Block text 7 Center Drag this point to adjust the position of the circle SHIFT key while dragging limits the circle s position to specific positions Working with Text Page 125 When the Arc Tab is selected you will see an extra set of control points that can be dragged a Center Drag this point to adjust the position of the center of the circle and also to change its radius b Inner Radius Drag this point to change the radius of the circle while keeping the center and top positions unchanged This causes a distortion of the text CTRL key while dragging will not distort the text c Outer Radius Drag this point to change the radius of the circle while keeping the center and bottom positions unchanged This causes a distortion of the text CTRL key while dragging will not distort the text d Rotate Drag this point to change the position of the arc text on the circle SHIFT key while dragging constrains the position See Preferences General Tab on page 22 about how to set the constrain angles e Sweep Angle Drag this point to change the sweep angle of the arc text on the circle It changes each character width and the spacing between them SHIFT key while dragging constrains the sweep angle See Preferences General Tab on page 22 about how to set the constrain angle CTRL key while dragging both sides of the text moves
280. p menu under Presets E Print Printer deskjet 9600 Presets Standard KA FlexiSIGN PRO Ea Scale Fit drawing to paper Fit border to paper O Scale Tiling v Print tiled pages Overlap 0 000in Position Center Offset X r thee r Options M Print border Print wireframe Include job info _ Print selection only Use device margins Data Binary ascii v Optimized Printing Q Preview Save As PDF Fax Cancel Print Page 226 Printing to a Desktop Printer Adjusting the Output Size Scale allows you to adjust the output size to either fit the paper or fit the desired size Fit drawing Resizes the output to fit the entire design into the paper to paper Fit border to _Resizes the output to fit the entire drawing area into the paper paper Scale Enter the scale in percentage to resize the output You can use the Tiling option to print images that are bigger than the paper size that your printer can handle If you want to print a scale of 1 inch 1 feet enter the value 1 12 in this field iti Wy wily gt Output on a letter Output on a letter Output on a letter Original Design size paper with size paper with size paper with 16 x 7 inches Fit drawing to Fit border to Scale set to paper option paper option 25 checked checked Tiling the Output Using the Tiling option you can select to tile the output
281. pe of the point some of the information below may not available Direction Handle Selected Point Direction Handle SB rs Vol Points selected 1 s amp 111 708in Z im The ea E Alsi H s n H Aher f fo 0 A l2sn H x Oj a8 71 8 B Path Tab Point Tab Attributes in Path Tab EARS EE A Meyr Type of segment prior to the selected point You can convert one type to another by clicking these buttons Type of selected point You can convert one type to another by clicking these buttons But in order to convert a Cusp point to Symmetric or Smooth the two adjacent segments to this point must be curved segments Angle between two Direction Handles Attributes in Point Tab Mm 29 243c ml Y SS 859c m Oo go 2 608em a hass o J Bom foo J X Y coordinates of the selected point Length and angle of the Direction Handle marked with a square Length and angle of the Direction Handle marked with a circle Working with Paths Page 149 Path Direction Every path has an direction associated with it This direction is used when cutting To see the path s direction see Showing Path Direction on page 16 To change the direction of a path 1 Select the path 2 From Arrange menu point to Path Direction and then select the new direction Automatic The direction of inside paths holes in an object are clockwise and the outside paths are counterclockwi
282. pes from 0 to 100 Changing this value changes the width of the stripes but not the number IS AS 1S Radiant Radiant Radiant Percentage 20 Percentage Percentage 50 80 o 135 297cm XY Coordinates of the point from which the stripes radiate w fe 900cm The point selected in this grid will be the point from which cee the stripes radiate Bika Bottom left corner Middle right point Center 4 jo Initial angle of the stripes yr Angle 0 degrees Angle 30 degrees Angle 45 degrees Working with Effects Page 197 Adjusting Radiant Stripes Using Control Points You can also adjust some of the above fields by dragging the control points e Click and drag the right bottom edge of each stripe to change the stripe angle SHIFT key constrains the angle e Click and drag the left top edge of each stripe to change the stripe gap SHIFT key constrains the angle e Click and drag the center point to change where the stripe starts Adjusting Gradient Stripes Using DesignCentral When gradient stripes are applied to objects the following attributes can be adjusted in DesignCentral E a Number of stripes on the object aE pony Determines the percentage of the image that is covered with x her E50 Gap Mode stripes from 0 to 100 Changing this value changes the width of the stripes but not the number This value is disabled when Vary stripes and gap is selected in the Gap mode f
283. ply v VV NIV Points spaced horizontally Repeating Paths You can create several copies of an open path creating a closed path 1 Select the points with the Select Point Tool 2 From the Arrange menu select Step and Repeat 3 Click Apply x A Original path After Step and Repeat Acquiring and Applying Length and Angle Use this tool to copy on segment angle and length and apply it to another segment 1 Select Apply Length and Angle tool Al 2 Enter the angle and length values in DesignCentral or press CTRL key and click over the segment from where the angle and length will be copied Apply Length Check this field to apply the length Apply Angle Check this field to apply the angle Segment Length The length that will be applied to the segment Click the button on right side to select a set of predefined factors Segment Angle The angle that will be applied to the segment Click the button on the right side to select a set of predefined angles or apply the opposite angle 3 Click the cursor over the segment where the angle and length will be applied Press the SHIFT key to change the point that is used as a reference Working with Paths Page 153 Ctrl Click Shift Click Click Acquiring the length and Click to apply the length and Shift click to apply the angle angle length and angle Rounding Corners The Round Corner tool converts corners into rounded corners To round one corner
284. ppear Units Inches g Skip frozen layer OF Cancel if Set Units to the desired units imperial or metric Check Skip frozen layer to ignore all layers that are marked as frozen hidden and non editable in the DXF file When finished click OK Appendix C Supported File Formats Page 335 Gerber File Format Supported Features The following features of the Gerber file formats are supported Preview Paths Groups Bitmap Text Foil Color Vinyl Color Gradients Job print order Overlap Overprint Primer Substrate color Stroke Color Supported Preview is shown in the Open and Import dialogs Supported All objects are automatically grouped after import Supported If the original bitmap is missing you will be prompted to locate the file Text is usually imported as outlines but in some cases they will be detected as text and you will be prompted for font substitution if there are any missing fonts Supported Spot Spectratone Duotone RGB and CMYK are all supported Supported but if the job contains both both vinyl and foil colors then the following message will appear V Apply print order Import vinyl data as contour cut Cancel Check Import vinyl data as contour cut and click OK to import vinyl color objects as contour cut paths If the Import vinyl data as contour cut box is cleared vinyl objects will be imported as standard vector objects Supp
285. pped When Binary is selected the data is compressed using a binary encoding and then sent to the printer If this box is checked default the software sends job information to the printer in the most efficient method possible in order to minimize print time It is possible that some printers will have problems with data that is organized in this fashion however If the Optimized Printing box is cleared data is sent using a less efficient method that works for more printers but is slower Page 228 Printing to a Desktop Printer 18 Cutting your Design Before you can cut any design make sure you have established a connection from your design software to the Production Manager and created a setup for your output device as instructed in the section Setting up Production Manager on page 263 Follow the steps below to send the document to your cutting device 1 From the File menu select Cut Plot If you have any object selected only these selected objects are cut To cut all objects in the document click the Selection Only button 2 Adjust the settings available in the dialog box as necessary and click Send Setting the Cut Plot Dialog The Cut Plot dialog box gives you complete control over how the job is produced This dialog box consists of three Tabs General Panel and Advanced Tabs The area on top of this dialog is common for all Tabs Re 1x _ a 1 COM1 Current fo aual job Holding
286. profile that matches the combination of ink media resolution and dither type of your output device To add an ICC output profile from another source select Add from the list of available profiles Clicking the Properties button will launch the Profile Properties dialog which contains information pertaining to the ICC output profile that has been chosen under Output profile and also UCR GCR settings See Editing ICC Profile Properties page 324 for details Click to set advanced color correction properties See Setting Advanced Color Correction Properties page 320 This setting determines the color management system that will be used to output the job If you are using ICC profiles from PPS 3 that contain light or medium inks ex CMYKLcLm you can use either color management system If you use Microsoft ICM the light and medium channels will not be read from the ICC and will be computed based on formulas If you are using ICC profiles from PPS 3 that contain orange and green inks you need to use the Scanvec Amiable CMS A The Microsoft ICM is not available on the Macintosh Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 307 Linearization Table Simulation Ink Limits Use Color Mapping Automatic The software will choose one which color management system to use Microsoft ICM The software will use the Microsoft Image 2 0 Color Management 2 0 API Scanvec The software will use the Scanvec Am
287. put device is inactive or the Production Manager is on another computer on the network and the option Allow remote Send Now Interactive is not enabled in the Production Manager Preferences See Changing the Preferences on page 268 for more details Color Palette Select the color to display in the preview area Only the color displayed will be processed You will not be able to select individual colors if the option Send all colors in the Advanced tab is checked Click and drag the colors to change the output order Page 230 Cutting your Design Setting the Visibility of Colors Right clicking on a color in the color palette allows you to toggle the Visible setting on and off for that color A color that is set to invisible will not be output If you want to output all colors except one check Send All Colors on the Advanced tab and then turn off the Visible setting on the color you do not want to output Material Settings The Material group box allows you to specify the size of the media used in your output device and entering the Media Width and Height The media size is used to panel your job if it is larger than the media 51 000 600 0 Select your media size from the list or specify a custom 51 000 600 0 size by selecting User Defined ie Poll Size polls the size of the media loaded in the cutter This feature only works if the device and port support bi directional communications 51 000 Materi
288. r of threads 269 shearing objects 46 61 print while RIPing 269 SNOW er 15 RIP band height 269 SNOW PIeVICW cecceeeeeeeeees 17 RIP ING ODS ion 277 size of JODS ccc ecrcoriss ceccceeeer 302 rotate to fit media 272 size Of media c ceeeeees 302 rotating jobs cccceeeeeees 303 size Of panel ccceeeeeeeees 282 rotating objects 45 61 SIZING objects cccccseeeeees 44 Rotating Objects 45 46 SHAD noa ance ea ace 76 rounding Corners 154 SO POOT waste iene 17 rulers and grid 11 sold cei gets cree eae oom ts 98 SANG SIZ 6 eiii 60 Spacing between pages 309 saturation rendering intent 221 Spacing objects cc 75 Save tO file 230 special characters 136 saving documents 28 specifying degree of precision scanning bitmaps TOS Seki esacelsee T 268 Scanvec Amiable color spell Checking ccc0008 130 management system 254 spot color 308 rendering intent 221 SCISSONS ani 158 spot color mapping See custom Sree anaa 307 color mapping scroll Dars aisen 13 SDOUCOIONS osiinsa iine 256 search and replace 129 converting to process 317 searching colors 91 stamp tOOl ccceeeeeeeeees 177 Select all ccccccssseeseceeeees oF StarOuirSt cect nh 108 Index Page 353 dN erann 113 starting point changi
289. radient Editing Line will be displayed in the object where the gradient is applied The Gradient Editing Line can be placed outside the object Start Intermediate Color icons End Color o Color icon icon m a i E r Object where the gradient is applied e You can change or create a new color in the gradient dragging the new color from the swatch table to an existing color or in a blank space between colors e Click and drag the intermediate color icon to the left right to change its position in the gradient e Click and drag the start end color icon to change the gradient size and the gradient angle e CTRL and dragging the color icon creates a copy of the dragged color Editing Stroke Properties of an Object Fill Stroke Editor Stroke Tab displays the following vector object s stroke properties ty le Style of the stroke applied to the object A The color applied to the stroke F Dim 4 Stroke width i poo 9 Controls the sharpness of the corners H E Select the appropriate Join Type option to specify how corners are outlined J J J Select the appropriate Line Cap style option to specify how open paths are outlined Choose from Round Square or Butt cap styles When this option is checked the strokes will Transform be proportionally resized when the object is resized Using Fill Stroke Editor Page 103 Clear Click this button to
290. rag to magnify one particular portion of the design area Every time you click the Zoom or Pan tool the view is magnified or panned By default the cursor will return to the previous tool after using these tools You must reselect the tool to use the Zoom or Pan tool again If you want to use the Zoom or Pan tool without selecting it before each use do one of the following D Ge SRO eB e Double click the Zoom tool and uncheck the Resume previous tool after zooming once option Or 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences command 2 Click Tools Tab 3 Select Zoom in the list 4 Uncheck Resume previous tool after Zooming once option 5 Click OK Using Navigator View Navigator View allows you to view your entire document and specify which portion to display To show the Navigator View from the View menu select Navigator View Page 14 Getting Started Design Area Navigator View To change the view e Click and drag a point inside the View Area to pan the portion displayed in the design area e Click and drag a control point around the View Area to resize it Causing a zoom in or zoom out in the design area Showing an Object s Fill When the Show Fill option is enabled every vector object is displayed with its fill When disabled only the outline will be visible To show or hide the fill from the View menu select Show Fills When Show Fills is disabled the outlines can be displayed using the following mod
291. ral To change the size of an object 1 Select the objects After selecting an existing object the Size Rotate and Object Tabs are available 2 Change the size of an object by editing the values in the entry box at Size Tab or dragging the control points of the selected object Checking Proportional ensures that the object will be scaled proportionally in both the width and height To change the position of an object 1 Select the objects 2 Change the position by editing the values in the entry box or dragging the object The X Y coordinates displayed in DesignCentral are the position of the reference point measured from the origin See Rulers and Grid on page 11 about how to change the origin You can change the reference point by using the Reference Grid Each button in the grid corresponds to a point on the selected object If you want to position the center of an object click the center point in the point selection grid Page 44 Using DesignCentral te jalo Size w 48 94cn Position mHz al Proportional Reference Grid DesignCentral Size Tab Reference Grid and Resize Points DesignCentral Rotate Tab The Rotate Tab of DesignCentral allows you to rotate shear or mirror selected objects You can change them either by dragging the object s control points or by changing the numerical values in DesignCentral Shear is the process that distorts one object by an angle using one point as a referen
292. re not installed in your system a dialog box will appear allowing you to select a replacement font If the Auto place on paste and import option in Paste preferences is enabled the file will be imported immediately after clicking the Import button in step 3 Saving Documents To save the current document 1 From the File menu select Save or Save as 2 If you have selected the Save as command or your are saving the document for the first time a dialog box is displayed Enter the name and the location that will be used to save the document 3 Click Save Exporting to Files To export the current document or part of it into a file 1 Ifyou are exporting only part of your document select the objects that will be exported 2 From the File menu select Export Page 28 Working with Files 3 Select the file format folder and the file name See Appendix C Supported File Formats at page 333 for all supported file formats The following options are available Selection Check this option to export only the selected objects only Suppress Some file formats will show an option dialog box before options exporting to a file Check this option to bypass the options dialog box 4 Click Export Emailing a Job Windows Only To send the current job to someone as an email attachment from the File menu select Send A new email message will be created in your default email program and the current job will be ad
293. re pixels will fit into each square inch Decreasing the resolution will cause the bitmap to cover a larger area Resampling A Bitmap Resampling changes the resolution of an image without changing the area it covers It does this by increasing or decreasing the number of pixels used to represent the image At the same time the software changes the resolution to compensate for the change in pixel count so that the bitmap remains the same size T A Black and white bitmap resampled to lower resolution Resampling an image will degrade it to some extent Resampling to a lower resolution makes the image blocky and jagged Resampling to a higher resolution may blur the image If you resample an image and are not pleased with the results use the Undo feature to return it to its previous state rather than resampling it again Working with Bitmaps Page 167 To resample a bitmap 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu select Resample 3 Adjust the values in Resample dialog box Width and Height New size in pixels of the bitmap The actual size in inches or cm of the bitmap will not be changed only the resolution of the bitmap will be adjusted Proportional The bitmap is resized proportionally Nearest Neighbor This option is the fastest but least precise interpolation method Bilinear Select this option for a quality interpolation method Changing Bitmap Color Mode To change the color mode used by a bitmap
294. reference line appears Reference Line Alignment 3 Click and drag the either end of reference line to change the angle of the alignment reference line Click and drag the Alignment Center to change its position You can also adjust the alignment reference line using the numeric fields in DesignCentral Working with Paths Page 151 Move Direction Alignment Center Location Alignment Angle Move Entire Path AY ww A Selected Points When Closest is selected the point moves to the alignment reference line using the shortest path When Horizontal is selected the point moves horizontally to the reference line and when Vertical is selected the points moves vertically X and Y Coordinates of the Alignment Center the circle located in the alignment reference line Angle of alignment reference line This option is only enabled if the selected points are in different paths When this option is enabled the entire path moves to the reference line Move Entire Path Disabled Move Entire Path Enabled 4 Click Apply x or double click anywhere inside the design area gt Aligning points using vertical move direction Spacing Points You can space points evenly horizontally or vertically 1 Select the points 2 From the Arrange menu select Spacing Page 152 Working with Paths 3 In DesignCentral enter the distance between points and the direction that they will be spaced 4 Click Ap
295. remove the stroke Page 104 Using Fill Stroke Editor 10 Working With Shapes Shapes are closed objects such as the rectangles starobursts and polygons You can create a shape freehand or by specifying the size The following standard shapes are available in your software m Rectangle tool t Arrow tool Oval tool al Advanced Border tool 6 Polygon tool He Parametric Shape tool Starburst tool Registration Mark tool a Fan tool Circle tool Creating Shapes All of the shapes may be drawn freehand 1 Select the desired shape tool 2 Click and drag the cursor in the design area The rectangle and the arrow are only for illustrative purposes and are not actually 7 displayed while you and Create a shape drag For some shapes holding the SHIFT and CTRL keys during dragging affects the shape creation For more details see the description below about each shape Release the mouse button Adjust the shape s properties from DesignCentral 5 If you want to add another shape with the same size click again in the design area Working With Shapes Page 105 Holding SHIFT or CTRL While Creating Rectangles and Ovals e Hold the SHIFT key down while dragging to constrain the rectangle or oval to a square or circle e Hold the CTRL key down while dragging to draw a rectangle or oval from its center l Dragging while holding the SHIFT Dragging while holding the CTRL key key Holding SHIFT
296. rically To specifying the size of each tile numerically 1 Select the tile you want to resize in the preview area 2 Enter the new size Eh fb4666cm The width of the selected tile tO fb6458cm The height of the selected tile To tile the job evenly check the tiling option you want to perform and enter the desired number or the size of rows and columns Iw E E Divides the job into a specified number of evenly sized columns m HH E Divides the job into a specified number of evenly sized rows Page 250 Printing your Design Even Columns Even Rows lw 5 000ir Divides the job into a specified size of columns starting from the left side Iv 3 000ir Divides the job into a specified size of rows starting l from the bottom Specifying Overlap Between Tiles You can specify the amount of overlap between rows and columns By overlapping you can eliminate any gaps between the tiles when assembling the final output Overlap is measured as the total amount two rows or columns overlap E Check to create an overlap on the vertical edges of tiles Horizontal Vertical Overla Overla m Check to create an overlap on the j j horizontal edges of tiles 0 200in The width of the overlap Printing your Design Page 251 RIP and Print Dialog Advanced Tab The Advanced tab of RIP and Print allows you to set several options specific to color printing jobs The Advanced tab has two la
297. right notice and any other proprietary legends on the original copy supplied by Scanvec Amiable Inc b Transfer the Software and all rights under this License to another party together with a copy of this License and all written materials accompanying the Software provided you give Scanvec Amiable Inc written notice of the transfer and the other party reads and agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License c Use this Software on a single computer only but may transfer it to another computer as long as it is used on only one computer at a time In Use constitutes being loaded onto either temporary i e RAM or permanent memory e g hard disk CD ROM or other storage device of a computer 2 Restrictions You may NOT distribute copies of the Software to others or electronically transfer the Software from one computer to another over a network You may not de compile reverse engineer disassemble or otherwise reduce the Software to a human perceivable form You may not modify adapt transfer rent lease loan resell for profit distribute network or create derivative works based upon the software or any part thereof 3 Termination This License is effective until terminated This License will terminate immediately if you fail to comply with any of its provisions Upon termination you must return the Software and all copies thereof to Scanvec Amiable Inc and you may terminate this License at any time
298. rm the change in the default settings Setting Job Properties Different tabs within the Job Properties dialog let you set layout options tiling paneling options color calibration options color adjustment Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 301 options and labels The exact number of tabs and the settings on those tabs will vary depending on the type of job and output device selected as well as the version of the software in use Layout Tab H 4 8 81 817 e 1818 Media size The Layout tab controls how the job will be positioned on the output medium what size it will E f5s56on E fis00 000in be and the layout of the output Opon A mpo a Job size Fitto media V Proportional Position Ba Spoon Page nesting F l Reset Media The size of the media loaded into your output device Select from Size one of the preset sizes or specify unique dimensions below fe F The width and height of the media EF ITAIESIE The margins of the printable area When a set of unique dimensions is specified it is automatically added to the list of preset sizes Job Size Choosing one of these options allows you change the output size and orientation of the page feo F The job s width and height E The job s width and height as a percentage of a 1 6 the original Fit to Media Scales the job proportionally so that it is as large as possible while still fitting within the printable area o
299. rning field The kerning is defined in Em units An Em space is equal to the width of M in the selected font 5 Click OK Breaking and Joining Text You can break text with multiple lines in individual lines of text and also join several lines of text ABCD Break Apart p ABCD BEFGH JKL Join Together Text with multiple lines Text with individual lines To break text 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu select Break Apart When a single line is selected the text is separated into individual characters To join several lines 1 Select the text blocks you would like to join 2 From the Text menu select Join Together Page 132 Working with Text Changing Text Orientation Changes vertical text to horizontal and vice versa 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Text Orientation and then select Horizontal or Vertical from the menu To Horizontal Text oO o g o To Vertical Text o C Adjusting Text Block Size To specify the text height and width 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu select Text Spacing 3 Enter the desired text Width and Height e When Adjust word spacing only is checked only the spaces between words are increased or decreased If there are no spaces in the text the width will remain unchanged e When Proportional is checked changing a value automatically changes the other one keeping the size proportional Text must have more than o
300. rs along with their name vendor type and part number Working with Color Page 81 Name vendor Type Part Transparent _ matte Clear GCF 334 Gerber Foil 141 Brera Cotta GCS 024 Gerber Foil 140 Light Grey Gcs 681 Gerber Foil 139 WB intense Red GC5 663 Gerber Foil 138 imitation Gold GCS 105 Gerber Foil 137 Bak Grey GCS 641 Gerber Foil 136 Bak Green GCS 056 Gerber Foil 135 WB copper GCS 629 Gerber Foil 134 pesn Gold GCS 601 Gerber Foil 4 To switch between views right click on the swatch table and select Palette view or List view List view is only available when a swatch table is free floating Hiding and Displaying Swatch Tables To toggle the display of all swatch tables on and off from the View menu select Swatch Table This will also force hidden swatch tables to be displayed Applying Colors From a Swatch table To apply colors from a swatch table to a design element 1 Select the objects 2 Select the desired color in the swatch table Hold down the CTRL key to apply the color to the object s stroke You can also apply colors by clicking and dragging directly from the swatch table 44 EES EES When you click and drag the cursor into the object in the design area the cursor changes depending on its location ah Fill the object over which the cursor is positioned with the selected color if Change the color of the stroke over which the cursor is positioned with the selected
301. rward Backward Go to origin Deletes the selected command from the list you can only delete commands that were added using the save command Reverts all settings to its default settings any custom commands added by the user will be deleted Defines commands that will be sent before the job is processed Defines a series of settings for fast medium and slow cutting speeds Select None if you want to use all settings from the output device Defines the pressure of the knife Defines the traveling speed of the head Defines the tool when several tools are available or switch between cut and plot Defines commands that will be sent after the job is processed Specify if the media will be cut after cutting or plotting Allows you to execute common tasks that you are usually required to do from the cutter s control panel Initializes the output device Advances or rolls back the media Moves the head to the origin Make sure nobody is around the output device when sending the macros since the cutter may move and injure the operator Editing ICC Profile Properties To edit an ICC profile 1 Click the Create ICC Profile button in the main color profiler window Select the correct ICC Profile Name 2 3 Click Edit 4 Edit the settings on the various tabs 5 Click OK The settings on the tabs are as follows Page 324 Setting Job Properties in Production Manager General Tab EE The Gener
302. ry Object If you select the objects by clicking them with SHIFT key pressed the first selected object is used as Stationary Object 2 From the Arrange menu point to Align and select how the alignment will be done In the example below the green square is used as the Stationary Object for the alignment Original Objects Left Alignment Right Alignment Horizontal Centers Eek ex Both Centers Top Alignment Bottom Alignmeni Vertical Center To align objects to the design area 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Align and then select how the alignment will be done If you have a margin set the objects will be aligned to this margin Right Alignment Horizontal Centers Bead dees cece c ce Qeesecs se seeccecull Bottom Alignment Vertical Center Arranging Objects Page 73 Distributing Objects Your software allows you to adjust the spacing and position of the objects using the following methods e Distribute objects e Distribute objects to design area e Spacing e Nesting Distributing Objects To distribute objects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Distribute and select how the distribution will be done Left Edge Original Objects Bottom Edge Distributing Objects to the Design Area To distribute objects to the design area 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Distribute an
303. s Once the server receives a job it can be RIPed and printed Moving jobs to a Different Output Device To move a job to a different output device setup do one of the following e Select the job and select Move from the File menu then select the new setup and click OK e Click and drag the job onto the icon for the new output device s setup in the Setup Pane RIPing Jobs To RIP a job do one of the following e Select the job and from the File menu select RIP e Drag the job into the RIP Queue with the mouse Once a job is moved into the RIP Queue it will automatically be RIPed if it has not been RIPed previously e Right click the job and select RIP from the context menu Jobs in the RIP Queue will process in the order of the Job Priority setting in their Job Properties When multiple jobs with the same priority are waiting in the queue the job that was received first will process first Using Production Manager Page 277 Printing Jobs To print a job do one of the following e Select the job and from the File menu select Print e Right click the job and select Print from the context menu e Drag the job into the Print Queue with the mouse Once a job is moved into the Print Queue it will be automatically be RlPed if it has not been RlPed already It will then automatically be printed on the appropriate device Jobs in the Print Queue will process in the order of the Job Priority setting in their Job Properties W
304. s best for copying a large area over to another area of the bitmap Stamp tab If Nonaligned is selected the origin and destination points are only synced while the tool is drawing When the tool is not drawing the destination point can be moved without moving the origin point This setting is better for copying a smaller part of the bitmap to a number of different places To use the Stamp tool 1 2 Select the bitmap you want to edit Select the Stamp tool amp Adjust the parameters in DesignCentral Click the Stamp tool over the location from which you want to copy the origin Working with Bitmaps Page 177 5 Move the cursor over the area of the bitmap that you want to overwrite and then click and drag To change the stamp origin hold down the CTRL key and click on the new point you want to copy from Changing the Brush In the Brush Tab you can select the shape and the size of the brush Some brushes display a small number in the lower left corner This number is the size of the brush in pixels Double click to change the shape of an existing brush Click here to create a new brush Brush Tab You can add a new brush or change the shape and size of an existing brush Click the blank area in the Brush Tab to create a new brush or double click an existing brush button to change its properties You can enter or change the following brush properties Size Width and Height of the bru
305. s Contains font files in URW format Page 332 Appendix B Installation Appendix C Supported File Formats File Formats Supported in Design Application Desktop Color Separation DCS Digital Microprocessor Plotter Language DMPL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language HPGL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language II HPGL 2 Ikarus Inspire Joint Photograph Experts Group JPEG Kodak Flashpix Appendix C Supported File Formats Page 333 Portable Network Graphics PNG Portable Document Format PDF PostScript Targa Text txt Tag Image File Format TIFF tif Windows bitmap Bmp Zsoft PC Paintbrush pcx A Version number does not exist or not available B Not supported on Macintosh Page 334 Appendix C Supported File Formats File Formats Supported in Production Manager Faero Evenson impon Ewon Macano w ao mmm Deewing changes w wo mm errem w a mon co Hewlett Packard Graphics Language hpg hgl plt HPGL Joint Photograph Experts Group JPEG Tag Image File Format TIFF Image Tag Image File Format TIFF Format TIFF Portable Document Format Portable Document Format PDF E Se fib orn Windows bitmap o bitmap a Pamer STO Print Job Files Ce Wee eee Kodak PhotoCD ped AB A Version number does not exist or not available B Not supported on Macintosh AutoCAD DXF Import When DXF files are imported the following dialog will a
306. s Original State The default settings for the software are stored in the Default set of preferences Restoring the software to its default state may be particularly helpful when troubleshooting any problems you may encounter with your software Loading this set of preferences will remove all of the output device setups in Production Manager Installing the Software Page 5 To clear the preferences stored in your system 1 Exit the software 2 Run Preference Manager 3 Select Default 4 Click Load Exiting Preference Manager To exit Preference Manager click Exit Password Installer The Password installer is a utility that helos you manage the different passwords that come with the software After you have installed the basic program with your main password you should then launch the Password Installer to add any additional passwords you may have Application Password This is your main application password for software Option passwords If you have purchased additional options you may enter the option passwords to this field to upgrade your software Note Make sure that the software is not running when you add a new password To add additional passwords 1 Launch the Password Installer 2 Your main application password will appear in the top section 3 Add your additional passwords to the optional password section by clicking the Add button and entering the password into the dialog 4 When you have fin
307. se 2 Select the misspelled word from the Misspelled words list and then e Select the correct word from the Suggested corrections list or enter the correct word in the Change to field and then click Change or Change All e Click Ignore or Ignore All to ignore the misspelled word e Click Add to add the misspelled word to the custom dictionary Click Edit List to edit your custom dictionary 3 Click Done to end spell checking Changing Case To alter the case of text 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Case and then select the desired capitalization from the menu The following options are available UPPER CASE All text is changed to capital letters lower case All text is changed to lower case letters Sentence case The first character of each sentence is changed to capital and the rest lower case Title Case The first character of each word is changed to capital and the rest lower case tOGGLE cASE Changes the lower case letters to capitals and vice versa Changing Kerning Kerning is the space between characters of text Kerning varies from font to font and each font contains specific kerning information Page 130 Working with Text Using Automatic Kerning Your software contains several kerning setting options 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Kerning and then select the desired kerning setting ABCDEF ABCDEF Overlap Touch Narrow ABCDEF ABCDEF ABCDEF Medium Wide Def
308. se Reverse Inverts the current direction Clockwise All paths have the same clockwise direction Counter All paths have the same counter clockwise direction Clockwise Editing Paths The Path Edit toolbar contains tools that allow you to edit paths Straightening Lines This Straighten Point tool is used to straighten a section of a path In some cases when you trace an image extra points are added to the traced path Use this tool to eliminate these points 1 Select the Straighten Points tool by Place the cursor over the path Click the point where the straight line will begins Click the point where the straight line will end A a oe WN Drag the start and end points to adjust the position of the straight line 6 Click Apply or double click anywhere inside the design area oN Page 150 Working with Paths Aligning Points and Segments Horizontally or Vertically Use the Align Horizontal or Align Vertical tools when you want to align several points along a horizontal or vertical line 1 Select the points 2 Select the Align Horizontal or Align Vertical tool Al The points and segments are aligned a i i f _ a i Selected points Points aligned horizontally Aligning Points and Segments to an Angle The Align Points tool aligns selected points along an alignment reference line 1 Select the points 2 Select Align Points tool Ar The alignment
309. se Traced with noise reducion set to reducion set to Less Most Corners Adjusts how strong the corners are traced When None is selected corners are not recovered The Most setting recovers the maximum amount of corners Resolution You can trace using the Full resolution on an image or 1 2 1 4 and 1 8 of its original resolution When the resolution is lowered the tracing process is quicker and produces fewer points but the trace quality will not be as actuate at the reduced resolutions The Optimal setting picks the resolution based on image size to optimize the traces Tolerance Controls how closely the tracing follows the bitmap being traced You can enter values from 0 to 100 In a high resolution image lower values will cause the tracing to follow the bitmap more closely resulting in jagged edges on the curves Higher values will produce smoother and more even curves but some details may be lost Corner Adjusts how recovered corners are drawn Sharp recovers Style the maximum amount of sharp corners Color The color of the resulting vector objects Reverse Traces white areas Image To Autotrace a bitmap 1 Select the Autotrace tool 2 Adjust the tracing parameters in DesignCentral 3 You can trace the whole bitmap or parts of it e Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular bounding box Surround the objects that you want to trace in the bitmap Hold down the SHIFT key to create a square bounding box
310. settings from Text menu or in DesignCentral Finding and Replacing Your software includes a standard dialog box for locating and replacing text To find and replace text 1 From the Text menu select Find Replace 2 Enter the text that you want to find in the field e Click Format button to specify a format to search The Find Format Setting dialog box allows you to locate text by font Style or size e To find a set of characters that may be part of a longer word turn off Match whole word only e To search within a specific part of the text select the text and choose Selection only option e To distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters select the Match case check box 3 If necessary enter the replacement text You can specify the format of the replacement text by clicking the Format button 4 Once the text is found you can e Click Find Next to locate the next occurrence of the text e Click Replace to replace the text Working with Text Page 129 e Click Replace All to replaces all occurrences of the specified text Spell Checking Your software provides a spell checking tool in several languages to check your work 1 From the Text menu select Check Spelling e From the Language list select the language e To spell check within a specific part of the text select the text and then choose Selection only option e Choose the Case Sensitive option to distinguish between upper and lower ca
311. sh Hardness Adjusts how the brush will dissolve with the original image Rotate Angle of rotation Style The brush can have either a rectangular or ellipse shape Page 178 Working with Bitmaps Using Filters Your software allows you to filter bitmaps The following filters are available e Reduce Noise e Sharpen e Color Balance e Blur e Level e Brightness Contrast Not all filters are available for all color modes While applying a filter a on screen preview will be displayed You can resize or move the preview area Also the area where the filter will be applied can be limited using a marquee Reduce Noise Filter Use this filter to clean up scanned images with small imperfections Known as noise To reduce the noise in a bitmap 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Filters and then select Reduce Noise 3 Adjust the filter settings in DesignCentral Radius The size of the noise that will be cleared Preview When this option is checked you will see a preview while adjusting the Radius parameter 4 Click Apply v Working with Bitmaps Page 179 Blur Filter This filter creates a softening effect by averaging the pixels next to the edges To apply the filter 1 Select the bitmap 2 From the Bitmap menu point to Filters and then select Blur 3 Adjust the filter settings in DesignCentral Amount and Radius Higher values in these fields will produce more blurred ima
312. snap feature and then create edit and move shapes to precise locations Page 76 Arranging Objects There are six types of snapping e Snap to Point e Snap to Guide e Snap to Intersection e Snap to Grid e Snap to Edge e Snap to Center of Gravity Windows only To activate the snap from the View menu point to Snap and then select Snap to Some examples of snap a a s Snap to Point Snap to Guide Snap to Grid Snap to Intersection Snap to Edge Snap to Center of Gravity Deleting Objects You can remove objects by deleting them from the document 1 Select the objects 2 Press the BACKSPACE or DELETE key or from the Edit menu select Clear The object will be deleted but will not be entirely removed from your document When you delete an object the deleted object will be placed ina Trash Layer To completely remove objects from your document without moving them to the Trash Layer 1 Select the objects 2 From the Edit menu select Cut Arranging Objects Page 77 To restore objects from the Trash Layer 1 Select the objects in DesignEditor 2 From the Edit menu point to Trash Can and then select Recover Restore To remove all objects from the Trash Layer e From the Edit menu point to the Trash Can and then select Empty Trash Clear Transform After scaling rotating or transforming any item geometrically you can return the item back to its original state by using t
313. specified in DesignCentral and all other letters like the X is proportionally resized C Setting Use font height in Font size in Preferences The height of the font s original bounding box has the size specified in DesignCentral Text Height in x a Design Central You can choose to show this value in DesignCentral in actual size or as a percentage If you want your text to appear with smoother edges on the screen check this option While the Smooth edges of screen fonts option does make the characters appear smoother it creates a discrepancy between the displayed size and the actual size of the characters Some characters show a red border when selected This red border is the actual line that will be outputted Check to make Flexi accept Chinese characters input from the Chinese language kit while running a Roman language version of Windows 3 This option is not present on the Macintosh Working with Text Page 139 Working with Fonts Installing Fonts In your software you can use TrueType Adobe Type 1 FSfont Casfonts and URW fonts Installing TrueType Fonts To install TrueType fonts copy the font files into the operating system s Fonts directory Consult your operating system documentation for details Installing Adobe Type 1 Fonts Adobe Type 1 fonts are supported under all Macintosh operating systems Consult your operating system documentation for details Un
314. splay As Icon to show the OLE object simply as an icon Click Change Icon button to change the icon 4 The selected programs will start creating a window inside your software 5 Resize and edit the contents of the window using the selected program 6 To finish using the selected program press ESC key or click anywhere outside the program window Del SAS eRAtio c BreAtias 0 02 OSE SFO RRO KH ony ARMSR AM vomer New 1 6 w te at E6 z 1 BLU ESSES Aw RRDA 33900 j Q1 2001 J2 2001 SEA OWS 4 After the OLE object has been spreadsheet inserted Inserting Existing Files as OLE Objects 1 From the Edit menu select Insert New Object 2 Select Create From File to merge an existing file into your document 3 Click Browse and find the file to be inserted e Check Display As Icon to show the OLE object simply as an icon Click Change Icon button to change the icon e Check Link option to link the selected file The object in the file will be stored apart from the document and all the changes made in the source file will be reflected in your document If the Link option is unchecked the object will be embedded and stored with the document 4 Click OK Working with Files Page 31 Osea Rs 9 o8 5 BRE SRQ a z 02 i 60 70 76 74 7t Gi SENDHA o oom no oom aot aot Ba wa a The document with a linked OLE object Editing OLE Objects To edit an OLE object 1 Select the O
315. splays 1 or 2 pages of preview per screen Zoom In Zoom Out Allows you to zoom the print preview Close Closes the preview window and returns to your design application Previewing the Design on a Macintosh Computer To preview the design on a Macintosh 1 From the File menu select Print 2 Select your desktop printer 3 Click Preview na A A Preview of Standard pdf 1 Page c i faj p ATE oe I Q Ppt Drawer Back Forward Zoomin Zoom Out Tool Mode C 2004 Scanvec Amiable Lid Ad ngtts reserved M Soft Proof Cancel Print In the Preview window you have the following controls Drawer This button opens the Drawer sub window Page 224 Printing to a Desktop Printer Back Forward Page Page Up Page Down Zoom In Zoom Out Tool Mode e008 LOC_Linearization01 tif BS e y Drawer Back Forward Page Down Fite nama TEES et Step wee 10 wep v I Mics ipb tor bacit material LOC_Linea Pore Taget Pret mache and mesos valet urg SS a Geretoreter Marwaly od ary LOC_Linea a v If a PDF is being previewed the bookmarks appear in the drawer If multiple images are being previewed thumbnails of the images appear in the drawer This control works like the back and forward buttons of a web browser Back takes you back through the previous documents and images that were viewed and Forward moves you forwards again towards the last document opened in
316. t In unidirectional mode the cartridges print from right to left only Bi directional mode prints faster but unidirectional mode usually produces a better quality print If checked the printer will use the value provided to compensate for variations in feed rates during the output process This provides more accurate output Cuts the media after the print is complete If a drying time has been set the media will be cut after the dry time is finished If checked the media will feed past the heads and remain there at the end of the job Click to return all settings on the tab to their default values Setting Job Properties in Production Manager Page 309 Cut Tab m aligi Tues Ig The Cut tab is only visible for jobs Resolution fS steps in being output on a hybrid device Pass or cutter It allows you to specify settings related to cutting M Advance after plat Knife offset 0 020in J Packet size E KB Curve quality High Cutter Options Reset Resolution Set the resolution of your cutting device The default value is already set for optimal results You should not change this value unless you are experiencing problems with your output output size not matching the size it was designed Passes Specify how many times the blade will move over each line Advance after Check to advance the media after output and reset the origin plot Send arc Activates the device s internal curve handling
317. t cuts may only be used on objects that are composed of outlines All other objects must be converted to outlines before applying entry and exit cuts After the entry and exit cuts are applied the objects will become open 1 To add entry and exit cuts to a design 1 Select the objects you want to add entry and exit cuts to 2 Convert the objects to outlines if necessary 3 Select the Add Entry Exit point tool l 4 Set the following options in DesignCentral Entry Set the following values for the entry cut E The type of cut None No cut will be made Line The cut will be a straight line Arc The cut will be an arc Ifthe cutis a line the angle between the cut and the existing outline at the point the cut touches the outline Working with Paths Page 161 If the cut is an arc the degree of arc that the arc will move through Ifthe cut is a line the length of the line If the cut is an arc the radius of the arc Exit Set the values for the exit cut see entry cut above co This setting applies automatic path direction to the open contours created by this function The direction of inside paths holes in an object will be clockwise and the outside paths will be counterclockwise 5 Click Apply x Page 162 Working with Paths 13 Working with Bitmaps A bitmap represents an image as a mosaic of colored dots called pixels The pixels are arranged in a fixed number of rows and
318. t the software under Windows e From the File menu select Exit e Right click on the software icon in the system tray and select Exit from the context menu To exit the software under Macintosh OS X e From the FlexiSIGN PRO menu select Quit FlexiSIGN PRO e Hold down the CONTROL key and click on the FlexiSIGN PRO icon in the dock From the contextual menu select Quit Page 26 Getting Started 3 Working with Files Your document can contain any combination of vector bitmap OLE or PostScript objects Vectors Bitmaps PostScript OLE Vector objects Vectors are a collection of straight or curved segments These objects can be scaled to any size without losing detail or clarity Shapes like rectangles circles and text are vector objects Also called raster images bitmaps are formed by a grid of small dots known as pixels to represent images Each pixel is assigned a specific location and color value A low resolution bitmap image can appear jagged when printed Images described using a page description language known as PostScript These objects can contain a combination of vector and bitmap images When imported into your document PostScript objects can be parsed or previewed OLE is the abbreviation of Object Linking and Embedding and it is available only for Windows OLE is a compound document standard developed by Microsoft and it enables you to create objects with one application and then link or embed t
319. tarburst Blending AC into DE 1 Select two objects 2 From the Effect menu select Blend 3 Adjust the number of steps in DesignCentral 4 Click Apply v Using the Lens Effect Use the Lens effects to control transparency and appearance of an object s color The lens effects are applied to the topmost object and can only be applied on vector objects except for the tranparent lens which can be applied to bitmaps The lens effects are only for color printing Transparent Effect With this effect the object where the effect was applied will have a transparency that allows you to see the objects underneath Page 202 Working with Effects 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Lens and then select Transparent command The following options can be adjusted in DesignCentral Opacity Degree of opacity applied to object This value can range from 0 to 100 Hide Stroke Check this option to apply the transparency to the object s stroke Invert Effect The colors of all vector and bitmap objects under the object where the effect is applied will be inverted 1 Select the objects 2 From the Effect menu point to Lens and then select Invert command The following options can be adjusted in DesignCentral Hide Stroke Check this option to apply the effect to the object s stroke Brighten Effect The colors of all vector and bitmap objects under the object where the effect is appli
320. th the list of colors 5 When finished click OK While adjusting the colors the swatch will show the original color on the top and the new color on the bottom New Color S Original Color Measuring a New Color To determine the color values of a new color by measuring them with a measuring device such as a spectrometer click the Measure button The measurement device can be defined in the Edit menu pointing to Preferences and then selecting Meter Options in the Tool Tab Working with Color Page 89 Deleting Colors Using Color Specs 1 Select the color that you want to delete from the list 2 Click Delete Editing Colors Using Color Specs 1 Select the color that you want to change from the list 2 Edit the name color mode color values etc 3 Click OK Changing The Order of Colors Using Color Specs To reorder the colors in the palette using the Color Specs click on the color in the color list and drag it to its new location S Pale Green Drag S Pale Pink PB Eck Magenta m Purple E Medium Green Color Specs Library Tab Color Library Find Swatch table Default Vendor Used colors Type Pale Green Gold In the Color Specs Library Tab dialog box you can remove colors from swatch tables and add colors from the Color Libraries into the swatch tables To add a color to a swatch table 1 Select the swatch table you want to add the
321. the Preview dialog The Page box lists the current page number for a multipage job Enter a new page number to preview that page Switches to the previous or next page in a multipage job Enlarges or shrinks the previewed job Sets the cursor arrow to work in one of three modes Scroll Tool Use the cursor to move the previewed job around in the preview window Text Tool Use the cursor to select text from a PDF Select Tooli Use the cursor to select a rectangular portion of an image To close the Preview window from the Preview menu select Quit Preview Printing to a Desktop Printer Page 225 Print Options The Print Option dialog box allows you to control several advanced options about desktop printing such as Scale Position and Tiling Displaying Flexi Print Options To display the Print Options dialog box under Windows 1 From the File menu select Print 2 Select your desktop printer 3 Click Options ee Scale Tiling Fit drawing to paper IV Print tiled pages Fit border to paper Overlap 0 000in C Scale Options Iv Print border IV Genter on paper Print wireframe F Include job info Offset x 0 000in F Use device margins poo Offset Y 0 UGU I Ignore overprint PostScript data C Binay ASCII Cancel To display the print options on the Macintosh 1 From the File menu select Print 2 Select FlexiSIGN PRO from the popu
322. the first line of the arc text The top and bottom are determined by the value in Starting Angle If you created your circle by dragging the top is the point where you began to draw the circle aA Starting position of the second line of the arc text After typing the first line of the text press the ENTER key and the text will be placed in the next line Multiple Line Style or at the opposite side of the circle Top Bottom Style Changing Text Attributes Using Control Points Most of the set DesignCentral properties may also be set manually You can click and drag directly the Control Points on the text When you select text and then display the Character or Paragraph tab of DesignCentral the text displays with a number of Control Points around it Each of these Control Points has a special meaning and changes the text when moved You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make incremental Working with Text Page 123 adjustments The following Control Points can be dragged in a text 1 Line Spacing Click this point to select one line of text When a line is selected you may change attributes such as color or font Drag this point to adjust the spacing between lines All lines below the selected line are also repositioned Typing CTRL up arrow and CTRL down arrow while the text cursor is displayed in the text also adjusts line spacing For text and block text CTRL key while dragging moves only the
323. the layer is editable or not Not available for Trash Grid and Substrate layers Printable Specifies if the layer will be printed or not Always disabled for Trash Layer Cuttable ar Specifies if the layer is cuttable or not Always disabled for Trash and Grid Layer Page 50 Using DesignEditor You can change the layer properties by doing one of the following e Clicking the icon on the DesignEditor Layer Tab When the property is disabled it displays a X over the icon Visible Property Enabled p a Visible Property Disabled e Right clicking the layer and selecting the Properties command from the menu Edit the property in the Layer Properties dialog box that will be displayed Changing the Layer Order The order of the layer in the stack determines how the objects are displayed in your design area Layer 1 above the Guide and Grid Layer 1 below the Guide and Grid layers layers You can re arrange the order of the stack by simply clicking and dragging a layer to a new position A horizontal dashed line displays to indicate where in the stack the layer will be placed Merging Layers When you merge one layer with another all elements of the layer that you merged are added to the target layer To merge layers 1 Click and hold the mouse on the on the layer you want to merge 2 While holding down the CTRL key drag the layer to the layer you want to merge it with A horizontal dashed line displays d
324. the values in the entry box or dragging the Shear points To mirror an object 1 Select the objects After selecting an existing object the Size Rotate and Object Tabs are available 2 Click Flip X Axis or Flip Y Axis in DesignCentral Rotate Tab to mirror the selected object horizontally or vertically aS STA Original Object Mirrored horizontally Mirrored vertically Page 46 Using DesignCentral DesignCentral Object Tab The Object Tab will vary according to the objects that you have selected In some cases the Object Tab consists of two tabs For instance when you select text you have a Character Tab and a Paragraph Tab zx A E TN 4 fiiz2m A Regular m Pisem 4 Ee 4 TA fi 00cm o 3 E Afowx s2 piim Apr f apo Sj Al ho apo o ab 00tcm 4 A om 4 eg acm gt 3 fin Object Tab when a Star Object Tab when a Text Object Tab when a Path is selected created is selected created is selected created When you are creating an object only the Object Tab is visible After selecting an existing object the Size Rotate and Object Tabs are available The Object Tab is not available when different types of objects like text and rectangle are selected However if you select objects with same type their common properties are displayed in DesignCentral It shows a value since both rectangles have the same width It is blank since both rectangles have different height
325. ting Color Profiles The software allows you to export all of the ICC profile information for a given setup as a CFT file These CFT files can then be imported back into the software or given to other users to import into their software CFT files can also be created using the Export profile button in the Job Properties or Default Job Properties dialogs However these CFT files contain only the subset of the ICC data that is relevant to the selected settings in the dialog Exporting Color Profiles To export a color profile for a setup 1 Select the output device setup 2 From the Setup menu select Export Color Profiles Save in amp My Documents f e Fv Desktop T My Computer an e To My Network Pla File name DesignJet 800 42 cft Save as type CFT files cft z Cancel ZA 3 Enter the name and the location that will be used to save the document By default the CFT file will be given a name listing the output device setup it was created for 4 Click Save Importing Color Profiles To import a color profile for a setup 1 From the Setup menu select Import Color Profiles Page 292 Using Production Manager Lookin JonAcheson amp ef Fav My Computer My Network Pla File name Files of type CFT files cft Select the folder and the CFT file that will be imported Click Open ee IN File imported successfully 4 Click OK
326. ting the Background Foreground Color When you are editing bitmaps the Bsckeround Foreground IEE lower right corner of the design area Background and Foreground will show the foreground and colors background colors Page 92 Working with Color You can change the background and foreground colors using the same methods used to change the default fill and stroke colors Modifying Existing Color Libraries Color Libraries are files containing a collection of colors Color collections can be based on a particular manufacturer an industry standard or similar concept Like Swatch tables you can create a new custom Color Library or modify an existing one Type Color Name white Part 3000 Measure Replace Creating New Color Libraries by Using Measurement Devices 1 From the View menu point to Color and then select Modify Color Library command Click New Select the Vendor and Type from the list or enter a new name Click OK Enter the new color name and the part number Pak oO DN Click Measure and measure the color using the device my The measurement device can be defined in the Edit menu pointing to Preferences and then selecting Meter Options in the Tool Tab Changing Existing Color Libraries 1 From the View menu point to Color and then select Modify Color Library command 2 Select the Vendor and Type from the list Select the color that will be changed in the list 4 Type the n
327. tmap menu select Convert Marquee to Shape Shape to Marquee Marquee to Shape Editing Bitmaps Using the Move Tool The Move tool copies selected portions of bitmaps marked by marquees 1 Select the bitmap and create a marquee 2 Select the Move tool Mt 3 Click and drag inside the marquee and drag to a new position The image selected by the marquee is moved to a new position leaving an area filled with the background color See Background Foreground Color on page 92 about how to set the background color Hold the CTRL key while dragging the marquee to move a copy of the image enclosed by the marquee while leaving the original in its place Original bitmap with a After dragging the marquee marquee with Move tool marquee with Move tool and CTRL Using the Eraser Tool The Eraser tool is used to remove unwanted parts of a bitmap to Page 172 Working with Bitmaps restore an edited bitmap to its original image or fill an area with the background color The Eraser tool has the following options in DesignCentral In the Brush Tab you can select the shape and the size of the brush For more details see Changing the Brush on page 178 In the Eraser Options Tab you can adjust rm i Opacity The percentage of the image that will be Opacity 100 0 removed by each pass of the eraser 100 o E 75 o 50 o 25 a gt a Eraser Tab Erase to If checked the eraser will remove on
328. tom character Select the text o_o From the Text menu select Define Character Select the font type and style where the character was added Select the character or character code in Character Click Delete Working With Text Styles You can copy text attributes and apply them to other text within your document You may also store text styles within a list The text style contains the following attributes aR wo N e Font e Kerning e Word e Line Spacing Orientation e Style e Size e Tracking e Line Spacing e Direction e Width e Vertical Offset e Character e Slant Justification Orientation Working with Text Page 137 Copying and Pasting Text Styles 1 Select the text with the desired attributes 2 From the Text menu point to Text Style and then select Copy Style Select the text where the style will be applied From the Text menu point to Text Style and then select Paste Style ABCDEF gt coysye ABCDEF SH IIKL Paste Style gt GCGHIKL Storing Styles in the Style List 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Text Style and then select Store Style 3 Type the style name 4 Click OK Applying Styles from the Style List 1 Select the text 2 From the Text menu point to Text Style and then select Apply Style 3 Select the style from the list 4 Click OK Text Preferences To change the text preferences 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences 2 Sel
329. tom color mapping only affects jobs that were added after the color mapping was added Jobs that were already queued are not affected To access the Custom Color Mapping module open the Setup menu and select Custom Color Mapping Page 288 Using Production Manager Dax 6ae Printer name Color Pinter 0 Color mode emk o CobrName ce m y Ik Adding a Custom Color Mapping To map a custom color 1 Select the output device from the Printer Name list 2 Select the color mode you want to map the custom color to from the Color Mode list 3 Click on the Add button in the Custom Color Mapping toolbar oO Color Color Chooser r Color swatch Print Swatch c e eal Ok Increment 5 Mo Jiz eal Cancel wo J0 sae 7 Width 8 5in KE U l r Closest matching swatch ka Ms 4 Mpa ca 4 Type a name for the color in the Color field Select the percentage values for each of the process colors in the color mode selected 6 If desired click on the Print Swatch button to print a set of swatches for the color to help you fine tune your choice see below for details 7 When finished click on the OK button Printing Color Swatches The Print swatch button prints out sets of color swatches which allow Using Production Manager Page 289 you to fine tune your process color values Enter the X and Y value from the printout for the closest matching swatch Upd
330. tour Contour Print Only Only prints the job Contour Only cuts the contour Only Rotate image to fit media If checked the image will automatically be rotated to better fit the dimensions of the output medium if needed Page 272 Using Production Manager Communication Tab F The Settings section of this tab changes depending on the port used to connect to the output device Ports are listed in order of popularity for each device Only the ports that are usable by the output device are listed The standard port for the device is selected by default Some of the port settings may still need to be entered or edited however Port Browse m Settings TOP PAddess 10 1 0 1 Port Number 31 00 Job Defaults Apply Cancel Select the port to which the output device is connected The port list is limited to the ports that are actually present on your computer and usable with your output device LPT Parallel port is the most common method to connect printers to the computer The following settings are available Trans mission buffer Check port state before sending Use standard LPT driver The size of the transmission buffer in bytes If checked the software will send a data packet to the printer to test if the printer is connected before beginning to print the job Whenever possible the software uses a custom LPT driver to increase the perfor
331. ts display with a selection border and Control Points around them to distinguish selection from other objects The color of the Selection Border can be specified by using the DesignEditor Layer Tab See Changing the Layer Color on page 51 for more details Selecting Objects Using the Select Tool To select objects using the Select tool 1 Choose Select tool 2 Click the object that you want to select To select multiple objects hold down the SHIFT key and then click on multiple items You can make a selection by using two modes When you are in the By touching mode any object that intersects the bounding box is selected When you are in the By fully enclosing mode the selection is restricted to those objects that are fully enclosed in the bounding box To select objects using the bounding box 1 Choose Select tool 2 Click and drag creating a bounding box around those objects you want to select Holidng the CTRL key while creating the bounding box temporarily toggles the selection mode to the other setting m i Oo Bounding Box By touching mode By fully enclosing mode Changing Default Selection Mode The default setting in your program is By touching To change the default setting double click the Select tool or do the following 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences command 2 Click Tools Tab Selecting Objects Page 55 3 Click Select tool on the list 4 Change the selectio
332. tting line back to a vector object 1 Select the cutting line 2 From the Arrange menu point to Contour Cut and then select Release Contour Cut Working with Effects Page 211 Page 212 Working with Effects 15 Working with Measurements and Labels The software allows you to measure label and dimension objects By using the measuring tools you can indicate the horizontal vertical or diagonal dimensions of the design or label an object The lines and labels can be output to a printer or cutter For more details see RIP and Print Dialog Advanced Tab on page 251 or Cut Plot Dialog Advanced Tab on page 238 Measuring Distances Use the Measure tool when you need to know the distance between two points in your design To measure the distance between two points 1 Select Measure tool mma 2 Click and drag the cursor Just click to show a position of one point in your design Once you release the mouse button Design Central displays the following information 13497 mm l X Y coordinates of the first point Y 43 697 mm cna 51154 Horizontal and vertical distances from the starting ce oe point to the end point t 65 823mm A 83 363mm Actual distance between starting and end point 521 Angle of the line that joins the starting and end Pas points will have with the horizontal Working with Measurements and Labels Page 213 Creating Dimensioning Lines The Di
333. tting up your scanner are included in your scanner s user manual 1 Make certain your scanner is on and connected to your computer 2 Place your image on the scanner 3 Ifyou have more than one scanner from the File menu point to Acquire Image and then select TWAIN Select and select your scanner from the list 4 From the File menu point to Acquire Image and then select TWAIN Acquire 5 Follow the scanner s directions 6 After your image is scanned a bounding box showing the scanned image displays Working with Bitmaps Page 165 7 Move the bounding box to the desired location and click to place the image Click TAB key changes the cursor position in the bounding box ESC key exits the scanning process ENTER to place the scanned image On a Macintosh you can use plug ins to scan 1 From the File menu point to Acquire Image and then choose Select Plug in Folder and select the folder where the scanner plug in is installed 2 Ona Macintosh from the File menu point to Acquire Image and then select the plug in from the list Creating New Bitmaps You can create an empty white bitmap on your document and draw on it with the bitmap drawing tools 1 From the Bitmap menu select Create Bitmap 2 Edit the Width Height and the Resolution of the bitmap 3 Select the Color mode in the list 4 Click OK Converting Objects into Bitmaps You can convert vector objects and text into bitmaps and then use
334. u select a segment all sharp corners in the path will be converted to right angle corners 2 Select the Make Right Angle tool a S Selected Point g jz A d f 7 zi e f ji ff 7 ete j f X bans Maai a uy a ee 7 i Removing Tiny Objects This tool allows you to remove small objects This tool is especially good to use after autotracing a bitmap 1 Select the Remove Tiny Objects tool ma 2 Adjust the Threshold value in DesignCentral Paths with size below this value are deleted 3 Click Apply or double click anywhere inside the design area Page 160 Working with Paths Creating Entry and Exit Cuts Many cutting tools require a certain amount of time and travel to reach their full power If the tool is cutting the design while it is not yet at full power you can wind up with parts of the design that did not get cut properly Another related problem is that some cutting tools damage the surface of the medium at their points of entry and exit The solution to this is to include entry and exit cuts in the design These are short cuts that lead into the actual cut design at a tangential angle so that the cutting tool can enter the medium and get up to full power while doing the entry cut It can then move into the design and cut it at full power When finished the cutting tool moves away from the design into the exit cut before powering down or withdrawing Entry and exi
335. uction Manager Window sscccccecsseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaees 267 Changing Preference isipite ee 268 Working With Setups cccceeecccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeaaeeeeeees 269 WONO WH JODS aa a Aa 276 MIS fl ale JODS caa Eaa E Seite renee eve en eee 279 Tiling ANA Cropping JODS cccccecssseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeees 282 Using the Color Profiler astron me E 288 Using Custom Color Mapping 0 cccccccccssssseeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 288 Using Global Color Mapping cccccccccseesssseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 290 Importing and Exporting Color Profiles ccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 292 Using Output Size COMpeENSatiOn cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 293 Page iv Contents Usno FP IO GS issena cugmseerstaienee 294 22 Setting Job Properties in Production Managev 297 Accessing the Job Properties Dialog ccccsseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 297 Setting the Preview Pane VieW cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 298 Working with Job Property PreSets cccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Setting Default Job Properties ccccceeececcceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeees 301 Setting JOD Propere S nee e E o R 301 Adding New Media Types to a D VICE cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 317 Setting Ink Split Options cece ccccccecseeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 318 Setting Advanced Color Correction Properties
336. unching the Production Manager for the first time or configuring the output devices The Production Manager Window When you launch Production Manager the main window is displayed To launch Production Manager do one of the following e From your design software select RIP and Print or Cut Plot from the File menu The Production Manager is launched and the RIP and Print or Cut Plot dialog box appears The Production Manager may be hidden behind the design software To bring it to foreground click on the Production Manager icon in the RIP and Print or Cut Plot dialog e Double click the Production Manager icon in the desktop Jox Main Menu Edit Setup View Help Command Co Ay a Buttons a BereEre foe STOP Sender 7 CoyoteCafe Fib CoyoteCafe Fib Holding sn2234 j j BlackDiamond Fib Holding sn2234 30 01 Setup Area BlackDiamond Fib p Vir Cutter com1 Job Area ee 2 RAM 512 MB 245 MB free YM 1037 MB free C 5011 MB free D 6258 MB free RIP threads 0 Output thre Setup Area This area displays the setups output devices currently configured are displayed Click the or the symbols to expand or collapse the list of jobs associated with the setup Job Area This area displays the jobs associated with the selected setup Command Buttons The command buttons allow quick access to most common tasks in Production Manager See Working with Jobs on page 271 for
337. will be displayed in the Text Selection box located on the right side of the dialog Select the text to be replaced You can select multiple items 4 Adjust the parameters Number of Copies The number of copies to be created Copies in a row The number of copies that will be placed in a row Horizontal spacing Horizontal spacing between copies Vertical spacing Vertical spacing between objects If you have a Tab delimited file select it 6 Click Next 7 To manually edit the fields select the field and then type the new text in Edit Text field 8 To use sequential data select one field and then click Serialization Adjust the parameters Numeric The serialized text will be a numeric value Character The serialized text will be a regular text The serialization will be performed starting from the rightmost character Start Starting value This value must be in accordance with above selection Numeric or Character Increment The increment in the serial text To save the current configuration as a Data file click Export 9 Click Finish Grouping Objects Grouping is the process of combining several objects into one single set of objects Grouped objects are moved resized and rotated as one object 1 Select the objects 2 From the Arrange menu point to Group and then select Group command Page 68 Arranging Objects To release the last grouped objects 1 Select the grouped objects 2 From the
338. wing methods Resizing Using DesignCentral Use DesignCentral when you have to adjust an objects size to a precise numeric value 1 Select the objects From the Arrange menu select the Resize command 3 Adjust the values in DesignCentral pasmem New width of the selected objects ji p349cem 4 New height of the selected objects ag i 00 0 Percentage that the width will be scaled tog hug 4 Percentage that the height will be scaled The point selected in this grid will remain x stationary after the resizing LH Proportional Check this option to assure that selected objects will be resized proportionally in width and height Apply scale to all Check this option to resize all objects in the document following the scaling that will be done in the selected objects 4 Click Apply x You can also resize using DesignCentral Size tab but some of the above options will not be available Resizing by Dragging Control Points You can drag the Scale Control Points around an object or group of objects to resize 1 Select the objects 2 Position the cursor on a Scale Control Point Arranging Objects Page 59 lt q Click and drag the Control Point O 3 Click and drag the Scale Control Point e CTRL key while dragging uses the center line of the objects as a stationary point e SHIFT key while dragging scales not proportionally oA oi gi Normal dragging Dragging with SHIFT with CT
339. youts depending on which printer you are igi C cu E GE LP Job jstatus Properties r tif Properties General Panel Advanced Color General Panel Advanced Color r Output settings r Output settings IV Color correction Color Settings IV Ignore overprint Color correction Color Settings I Ignore overprint Media Plain paper Pigment Mi Presets Media Gerber 225 Viny Presets Print mode Best Color mode CMYK z Resolution 300 DPI Color mode CMYKLeLm pigment 2 bits Resolution 720x360 DPI Dither type Angled Screen z Screen Dither type FMXPress 7 Screen Smooth blends Enhanced z Smooth blends Enhanced Dutput profile Gerber 225 Vinyl CMYK__300x600 icc z Properties Output profile None Properties Linearization Linearization m Miscellaneous settings _ r Labels and marks i Print marks m Miscellaneous settings r Labels and marks Print substrate H Gia I Print substrate Print marks Crop marks Print dimensions and labels Color Print dimensions and labels Color Black bi Print as separations i m Print color bands Print as separations All v Print color bands Miep Minge Eee I Botton All r Ein separations m colar Eao M Raon Pollet e Botton D Pintseperations in colar V Print spot colors Spot Color Mapping Print spot col
340. ype spot colors of gradient is defined solely by its end points it has no intermediate points in the middle c Click Ho edit the gradient using the Edit Line See Editing Gradients Using the Edit Line on page 103 for details d Adjust the angle of the gradient in the 4 field Advanced Options for Gradient Fill When the Advanced button is clicked in Fill Stroke Editor Fill Tab for Gradient Fill the Advanced Settings dialog will be displayed Add to swatch table MV Transform with object Olmi E DEE E Gradient name F Use HS transition oe ui fl aA Position H U food Cancel The following parameters of the gradient can be adjusted in this dialog Gradient Name Name of the gradient 1 l Gradient Type aN pr The gradient angle En The gradient being edited The gradient s color mode p i C Color selected in gradient edit bar Position Eo Position of the selected color in the gradient edit bar The value can range from 0 to 100 Using Fill Stroke Editor Page 101 Add to Swatch Table When this option is checked the edited gradient will be added to the swatch table as a new gradient Transform with Object When this option is checked each gradient tile will be proportionally resized when the object is resized RGB HSV The color mode used to create the gradient Adding a Gradient to a Swatch Table To add a gradient you have creat
341. zontal or Vertical 3 Click and drag to create the baseline Duplicating Objects There are several ways to duplicate an object Duplicating Objects by Dragging The easiest and fastest way to create one copy of the object select the object and drag with CTRL key pressed SHIFT key while dragging restrains the position of the copy Click and drag with CTRL key pressed Arranging Objects Page 63 Duplicating Objects Using Copy and Paste This method is recommended when you want to make several copies in different places 1 Select the objects 2 From the Edit menu select Copy command or press CTRL C 3 From the Edit menu select Paste command or press CTRL V 4 Move the cursor to position the copy and click Click TAB key changes the cursor position in the bounding box ESC key exits the paste process ENTER to place the copy o o o a o a o Copy the object And Paste Sometimes you want to create copies with a specific distance from the original object In this case you must change the preferences first 1 From the Edit menu select Preferences 2 Select Tools Tab 3 Select Paste tool from the list on left side of dialog box 4 Check Auto place on paste and import option 5 Set the distance where the copies will be posted from original object Once the preferences are set 6 Select the objects 7 From the Edit menu select Copy command or press CTRL C 8 From the Edit m
342. zontal or vertical guide unlock the guides and then rotate the horizontal or vertical guides in DesignCentral Rotate Tab t 2 4 1 6 8 10 12 K Select the objects Objects converted to guides e In DesignEditor drag objects from generic layer to Guide Layer For more information about the Guide Layer see DesignEditor Layers Tab on page 49 To lock the guides e From the Arrange menu point to Guides and click Lock Guides Page 12 Getting Started Guides cannot be selected by dragging a bounding box around them You have to click the guide To select all guide lines 1 From the Edit menu point to Select and then click Select by Attributes command 2 Select Guide Line in Object Tab 3 Click OK Status Bar The Status bar is the area located on the bottom of your screen and displays the following information The present X Y coordinates of the cursor or additional information about the selected command The default fill and stroke colors or the foreground and background colors when in bitmap editing mode Changing the View You have several commands to change how the design area is viewed Using a Wheel Mouse If your computer is equipped with a wheel mouse you can use the mouse wheel to control the view e Moving the mouse wheel up and down pans the view up and down e Holding the SHIFT key and moving the wheel up and down pans the view left and right e Holding the CTRL key

FlexiSign 7.0 User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents